Rice's Encyclopedia of Silk Magic Vol 2 by Harold R. Rice

COPYRIGHT - 1953 AND 1981 BY HAROLD R. RICE

COPYRIGHT IN CANADA AND IN ALL COUNTIES SUBSCRIBE TO THE BERHE CONVERSION.

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED NO PRRT OF THIS BOOK MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY FORM WIITHOUT PERMISSION IN RIGHTINHG FROM THE PUBLISHER THE MANUFACTUREING RIGHTS FOR THE DEVICES DESCRIBED OR ILLUSTRATED HEREIN ARE RESERVED BV THOSE CREDITED WITH THE EFFECTS DESCRIBED.

PRINTED IN THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA FRIST PRINTING 1953 SECOND PRINTING 1966 THIRD PRINTING 1986

D E D I C A T I O N

C O N T E N T S Dedication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III

CHRPTER ELEVEN Penetrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521

CHRPTER TWELVE Color Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .661

CHRPTER THIRTEEN Color Changing Silks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699

CHRPTER FOURTEEN Silk Dyeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 747

CHRPTER FIFTEEN Reel Magic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 851

CHHPTER SIXTEEN Reel - Less Magic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 887

CHRPTER SEVENTEEN Twentieth Century SilKes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 937

Penetrations Introduction

1

Some of the prettiest effects in magic are accomplished by causing a silk to apparently penetrate some object or to have some apparently penetrate a silk without injurious effect. The effects I have assembled for this chapter are worthy of every performers consideration.

The Lands of Phantasia *

O T T O K A R

2 F I S H E R

Descriptions of this famous effect have appeared in a number of books including the 1937 edition of Hugard’s ANNUAL OF MAGIC, and Volume 4 of Tarbell’s TARBELL COURSE IN MAGIC. Effect : A fan ( wand or similar object) is tiled with a knot in the center of two ropes. Two spectators hold the ends of the ropes while several silks are tied on either side of the fan, Figure 1. Finally, one of the ropes is tied around all of the

silks, Figure 2. Upon command the performer removes the fan and knotted silks from the ropes which are still held by the spectators.

Required :

Two 6” lengths of soft rope, four 18” silks, and a folding fan. Nothing is prepared in advance.

Presentation : 1. Display the ropes, Figure 3 then invite two spectators to assist. 2. Have one spectator hold the fan, an end in each hand. 3. Drape the centers “X-X” of the ropes over the center of the fan, Figure 4.

4.

5. 6. 7.

8.

9.

Take the two strands of “A” in your left hand and the two strands of “B” in your right, Figure 5, then tie a single knot, Figure 6. Pull the ropes to tighten the knot around the fan, Figure 7. Give ends “J” and “K” to one spectator and “L” and “M” to another. If the fan were removed at this point, one spectator would be holding the ends of rope “A” and the other the ends of rope “B’, but due to the manner in which the knot was tied around the fan, the spectators are not aware of existing conditions. The secret of the effect lies in this clever subtlety. Now tie the four silks around the two ropes with ordinary single knots, Figure 1. Some prefer to tie the center of the silks to the ropes, Figure 8. Push, the silks in to the center of the ropes against the fan, Figure 9.

10.

11. 12. 13.

14. 15.

Take one end (either J or K) from one spectator and an end (either L or M) from the second spectator, then tie them in a single knot, Figure 2. Now you have automatically switched ends, giving each spectator an end of each of the two ropes. Take the silks in the left hand and the fan in the right, Figure 10. Advise the spectators that they are to pull sharply upon the ropes at the count of “three," Start counting, and at the same time gradually pull the fan out of the knot. Just as “three” is called, the fan must be pulled completely free of the ropes. Count “three’, and as the spectators pull, jerk downwards sharply on the silks. You now held the fan and knotted silks which are free of the cards held by the spectators, Figure 11.

Note All sorts of articles can be tied in the center of the ropes. Donate the Magician ties a “Walsh Cane to Silk” in the ropes, then changes the cane to a silk at the finish of the effect.

Mystini’s Triple Knot Escape *

3

M Y S T I N I

In this version of the CORDS OF PHANTASIA, a 24” silk replaces the fan used in the original effect. Presentation : 1. Have one spectator hold a 24” silk, then drape centers “X-X” of the ropes over the center of the folded silk, Figure 12. 2. Tie a single knot in the ropes as illustrated in Figure 5,6 and 7, being careful not to pinch part of the silk in the cords forming the knot. The knot appears as in Figure 13. 3. Take the silks and ropes in the left hand, Figure 14. 4. Tie a single knot around the lower part of the knot in the ropes with end “N” of the silk, Figure 15 and 16. 5. The knotted 24” silk is now in the center of the ropes Figure 17. 6. Continue as in the original version as explained in steps 8, 9 and 10. 7. For the release, take end “N” in the right hand and the centers of the four 18” silks in the left, Figure 18. 8. Pull upwards on “N” at the count of “2”, pulling the knot in the silk free of the knot, in the ropes, Figure 19. 9. Continue to pull the 24” silk upwards until it is free of the knot in the rope just as you count to “3”.

10.

Count “3”, and as the spectators pull, pull downwards sharply on the four 18” silks and upwards on the 24”

silk, releasing all five silks from the ropes, Figure20.

Ropes, Fan and Silks *

4

Hugard, in explaining Ottokar Fisher’s version, adds a large wooden embroidery hoop to the silks and fan tied to the ropes. The addition of the hoop makes the final knot tied in the ropes, step 10, THE CORDS OF PHANTASIA, more logical. Presentation : 3. Execute the first nine steps given in Effect No 2, THE CORDS OF PHANTASIA. 4. Introduce the wooden hoop (or a plastic bracelet.)

5.

Take one end of a rope from either assistant and slip it through the hoop, then run the hoop along the rope to the silks and fan tied at the center, Figure 21.

1. Now take one end from the other assistant and tie a single knot, continuing step 10 through 14, effect No. 2. 2. When the silks and fan are released the hoop remains at the center of the ropes, Figure 22.

Deluxe Ropes, Fan and Silks * J E A N

5

H U G A R D

The possibilities of the “Ropes and Fan” effect are almost unlimited. In this deluxe version the items shown in Figure 23 are needed in addition to the two ropes, fan and silks.

Presentation : 1. After tying the ropes around the fan, Figures 4 through 7, thread the articles on the ropes as shown in Figure 24. 2. Pass the ends of the ropes through the sleeves of a jacket, Figure 25.

3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

9.

Take one rope from each assistant, tie the single knot, Figure 26. Have one assistant hold rings “A” and “B” and the other “C” and “D”, Figure 27. Standing behind the jacket, remove the fan but do not display it. Allow the two rings to fall free of the ropes. Pull the silks and cards that were to the left of the fan free of the ropes, then toss them into the air. Repeat with remaining silks and cards. Now expose the fan. The jacket remains threaded on top

10. 11.

ropes. Take the jackets collar in one hand, then tell the assistants to pull sharply on the ropes. Step forward with the jacket as it comes free of the ropes.

Note : Hugard suggests stealing a fish bowl from under the coat just before the jacket is released from the ropes. The bowl is hidden from view by the jacket and is produced as the performer steps to the front of the stage.

My Favorite *

H A R L A N

6 T A R B E L L

In Volume 4 of his COURSE IN MAGIC, Tarbell gives his favorite method of presenting THE CORDS OF PHANTASIA. Two 6 ft. lengths of soft rope and five 18” silks are needed. Presentation : 1. hile two assistants hold the ends of the ropes, tie the Al Baker WRIST TIE around the center of the two ropes as shown in Figure 28 through 32. Briefly, the bite of silk taken between the second and third fingers of the left hand, Figure 30, forms a loop “C” around the tip of the left second finger as the right hand pulls corner “A” down through the large loop, Figure 31.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Carry “A” to the right, tightening the knot, Figure 32. Remove the left second finger from “C” as the knot tightens. Hold the silk as shown in Figure 33.

Bring “A” towards “B”, then down around the ropes, and back to the right, Figure 34. forming a lop around the ropes, Figure 35. Tie a double knot with ends “A” and “B”, Figure 36.

7.

8. 9.

10. 11.

12.

13.

14.

Grasp the ropes with the right hand as shown in Figure 37. Then close the hand into a fist. Ask the assistants to release their ends. Take the ropes between your hands as shown in Figure 38,then tie a single knot in the ropes, Figure 39. Give “XX” to one assistant and “YY” to the other. Tie the remaining 18” silks to the ropes with single knots, Figure 40. Grasp the four silks at “N” with the left hand and the knot in “M” with the right, Figure 40. Pull upwards on the center silk, then downwards on the remaining four. All five silks, still knotted, will come free, and the two ropes will remain outstretched and without a knot between the two assistants.

Penetrative Silks

H A R L A N

7 T A R B E L L

Here is still another version of the CORDS OF PHANTASIA credited to Harlan Tarbell. Two 6’ lengths of soft rope, a wand, and four 18” silks are required. Presentation : 2. Tie the centers of the two ropes around the center of the wand as illustrated with the fan in Figure 3 through 7, then have two spectators hold the ends of the ropes. 3. Using the AL BAKER WRIST TIE Figure 28 through 36, tie one silk to the left of the wand, then one to the right. 4. At this point the apparatus is as shown in Figure 41.

1. Allow the spectator to tie the remaining two silks around the ropes with genuine double knots at the positions shown in Figure 42.

9.

5. 6. 7. 8.

While two assistants hold the ends of the ropes, pull upwards on silks “A” and “B”, causing them to penetrate the ropes, Figure 43.

Take an end of the rope from each assistant and tie a single knot, Figure 44. Grasp the wand in the left and the tips of the two silks in the right. Withdraw the wand, then pull upwards on the silks. The assistants now hold the two ropes (minus the silks and wand) outstretched between them.

Wand, Box and Silk Release * D R.

H A N S

V A N

8 B A A R E N

Effect : In a slightly different version of THE CORDS OF PHANTASIA six silks and a wand tied to two lengths of rope are placed in a box. Upon command the box, silks, and wand penetrate the ropes. Required : In addition to two 6’ lengths of soft rope, SIX 18” silks and a wand, a box with a lock as illustrated in Figure 45 in needed. Presentation : 3. Tie the two ropes around the center of the wand as illustrated with a fan in Figure 3 through 7, then have two spectators hold the ends of the ropes. 4. Tie the silks to the ropes with genuine knots, Fig. 46.

1. Insert end “B”. of the wand through the hold in the back of the box, Figure 47. 2. Now pass end “A” of the wand through the front, Figure 48.

5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.

12. 13.

Push the silks to the center of the ropes. Thread the ropes through the holes in the ends of the box, Figure 49. Close the lid, then lock the box. To make everything even more secure, take one rope from each spectator and tie a single knot, Figure 50. With the spectators holding the ends of the ropes, withdraw the wand. Tap the locked box with the wand, they lay the wand aside. Command the spectators to pull the ropes. Catch the locked box as it penetrates the ropes. Allow a spectator to open the locked box, disclosing the silks inside and still knotted.

Grandmother’s Necklace

9

The CORDS OF PHANTASIA principle used in the effects just described is said to have been derived from an even earlier effect known as GRANDMOTHER’S NECKLACE. As the several effects to follow use the GRANDMOTHER’S NECKLACE principle it is important that you understand the secret before I apply it to the adaptions. Effect : Three wooden beads are strung on two cords, Fig. 51, then one of the cords is tied about the beads, Figure 52. The performer removes the beads while two spectators hold the ends of the cords, Figure 53.

The Secret : The cards are tied at their centers with a lop of weak thread, Figure 54. The thumb and first finger hide the union when the cards are displayed, Figure 55,and it appears that two cards are held side by side. The first bead is strung over two ends and passed to the center hiding the union, Figure 56. Then the remaining beads are added, one on each side of the first, Figure 51. By bringing two ends to the center to tie a single knot, the cords are reversed, Figure 52, and when the performer or spectators pull on the cords (breaking the thread) the beads are free and the cords are para llel, Figure53.

Improved Grandmothers Necklace * H A R O L D

R.

10 R I C E

At times I prefer to display the cords separately before presenting a version of GRANDMOTHER’S NECKLACE. Some performers will prefer it to the method employing a thread to join the centers of the two ropes. Here is my original method which appears in print for the first time.

them in the right hand in the position shown in Figure 58. Taking card “C-D” at “Y-Y” with the left hand, Figure 58, carry it to the left, Figure 59. Note that center “X” of cord “C-D” is pinched tightly between the first and second fingers of the right hand just beneath the last joint of the first finger. Raise the hand momentarily to allow cord “A-B” to slip off the hand, Figure 60, then bringing “Y-Y” up to the right as the right hand assumes its original position, Figure 61. Drop ends “B-C”, Figure 62 and take “B-A” directly below the right hand with the left Figure.63. Pull down on “B-A”, pulling a small loop in cord “D-C” just to the right of “X”, Figure 63, then release “X” as the right fist is closed, Figure 64.

It is important that all the steps just explained are executed as one continuous move, ending with the cards in the position shown in Figure. 64, creating the illusion that two cords now pass through the closed fist.

From this point the routine depends upon the particular effect being presented as is explained in the various routines to follow. In most instances the next step is to tie a silk around the center of the cords. To do so, take a silk in the left hand, Figure 65, then lay the looped center “X” over the center of the silk, Figure 66.

Bring the left thumb over the loop immediately, Figure 67, then tie a single knot in the silk with the right hand. If properly tied the loop is held securely within the folds of the fairly tight knot in the silk and the thumb can be safely withdrawn, Figure 68.

Rice’s Flying Colors *

S C O T T Y

11 L A N G

Effect : Three silks tied to two long cords fly free from the cords, still knotted, jumping high into the air, Figure 69. Preparation : Two 9’ lengths of rope and 3-18” silks are needed. Prepare the ropes with the thread, Figure 70, unless my improved method, Effect No. 10, is preferred.

Preparation : 15. Take the center of the cords in the left hand, Figure 71, and a silk in the right. 16. Display the Silk, Figure 72. 17. Drop corner ‘A” and pass the right hand down to the center of the silk, point “C”, Figure 73. Now release corner “B” from the left hand. 18. Bring the silk up and around the cords at “X”, Figure 74. Then tie a single knot in the silk around the cards with the left & right hands.

5. 6. 7.

8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.

Drape the silks and cord over the left wrist, Figure 75. Display the second silk, Figure 72. Taking point “Y”, Figure 75, in the right hand, tie the second silk around the cords with a single knot at “Y”, Figure 76.

Display the third silk, Figure 72. Taking point “Z”, Fig. 75, in the right hand, tie the third silk around the cords with a single knot at “Z”, Fig. 77. Display the cords and silks, Figure 78. Take ends of cords in the right hand. Lower the left arm and raise the right, then withdraw the left wrist, Figure 79. Take ends “S-Q”, in the left hand, spread arms, and display silks, Figure 80. Drop end “R” and “S” momentarily, and tie a single knot with ends “P” and “Q”, Figure 81.

15. 16. 17. 18.

19.

Take “Q-R” in the left hand and “P-S” in the right, allow the center of the cord to sag, Figure 82. Tilt the head slightly backward and gaze upward toward the ceiling. Raise the arms up and down in a graceful manner much like a bird flaps its wings. Repeat the move three times, increasing speed each time. As the cords move upward the third time, extend the arms quickly and sharply, breaking the hidden thread and causing the cord to become taut. If done properly, the silks will

Rice’s Glas Go *

H A R O L D

12 R.

R I C E

Effect : A glass cylinder is placed over two ropes with a silk tied at their centers. The performer removes the cylinder and the silk while two spectators hold the ends of the cords, Fig. 83.

Presentation : 1. Tie the silk to the cords as explained in steps 1 through 5 under the Presentation of RICE’S FLYING COLORS and as illustrated in Figure 70 through 75. 2. Display the cylinder. 3. Drop two ends of the ropes through the cylinder, then pass the cylinder on down the ropes until the silk at their center is inside, Figure 84.

4.

5. 6. 7.

8.

Invite 2 spectators to assist. One holds ends “P” and “R”, the other, ends “Q” and “S”. Performer supports the weight of the cylinder on his upturned palm, Figure 85. Take one end from each spectator, then tie a single knot, bringing the knot down against the cylinder, Figure 86. Return ends to spectators. Now one holds “P” and “Q”, the other “R” and “S”. Place a palm over each end of the cylinder, Figure 87, then at the count of “three” command the spectators to pull on their cords. As the spectators pull, lift up on the cylinder and it and the silk will come free of the ropes, Figure 83.

Eseaping Silks *

13

This effect is the same as RICE’S GLAS-GO. However, a metal can with a hole in each of the removable lids is used in place of the glass cylinder, Figure 88.

A Penetration **

14

E D M U N D

Y O U N G E R

Here is still another version of GLAS-GO. In this version the ropes appear to penetrate the body of a lady assistant as the cylinder and silk are Freed, Figure 89.

Presentation : 1. Prepared as in GLAS-GO to the poin where two spectators hold the ends o the ropes and the cylinder is over the silk at their centers, Figure 85. 2. Now invite a lady from the audience to assist.

3. 4.

5. 6.

Have the lady hold the cylinder. Instead of tying two of the cords around the cylinder, Figure 86, take them to the back of the lady assistant and tie a single knot, Figure 90. Now pass the ends to the assistants again, Figure 91. Command the assistants to pull at the count of “three” and the young lady to walk forward at the same time. The result will be as shown in Figure 89.

Silk and Tube Trick *

M E N D E L S O N

15 A N D

F O X

Here is a clever effect combining MYSTEINI’S TRIPLE KNOT ESCAPE and RICES-GLAS-GO. Effect : A glass cylinder with a hole in its wall is displayed. A silk is tied to two ropes and the ropes and silk are placed inside of the cylinder. Upon command the silk penetrates the cylinder, and the cylinder the cords, Figure 99.

Preparation : A cylinder, Figure 92, 2-9” lengths of rope and an 18” silk are needed. Presentation : 1. Tie the ropes around the silk as explained in MYSTINI’S TRIPLE KNOT ESCAPE and as illustrated in Figure 93 through 96. 2. Cover the center of the cords and the silk with the cylinder, then bring one corner of the silk through the hole in the cylinder, Figure 97. Assistants hold the ends of the ropes. 3. Tie a single knot around the cylinder with the two ends of the cords, then return the ends to the assistants, Figure 98.

4. 5. 6.

7.

Take the exposed corner of the silk in the right hand and the center of the cylinder in the left. Command assistants to pull on the ropes at the count of “three”. Count “one”, “two”, then pull sharply on the silks as you count “three”. As the assistants pull the ropes, silk and cylinder are free, Figure 99.

Penetration Xtra-ordinary * T A N

H O C K

16 C H U AN

This effect is an excellent follow up for RICE’S GLAS-GO. Effect : A glass cylinder, a sheet of black paper with a hole in it, and a silk are displayed. The silk is placed inside of the cylinder and the paper wrapped around the outside. The performer causes the silk to penetrate the cylinder and to exit

through the opening in the black paper, Figure 104. Preparation : The cylinder, black paper and a silk with thread and wax attached are needed, Figure 100. Presentation : 1. Place the silk inside of the cylinder and press the wax at the end of the thread to the outside, Figure 101. 2. Wrap the paper around the cylinder with the wax under the opening, Figure. 102. Paper should not be too light. Hold the paper in place with a rubber band. 3. Holding the cylinder in the left hand, Figure 103, raised and lower the right hand several times as though attempting to pinch a hole in the wall of the cylinder through the opening in the paper. Actually more and more of the thread is pulled through the hole as a new grip is taken close to the paper each time the hand is raised. 4. As the tip of the silk appears, pull the silk through the opening in a clean sweep, Figure 104.

Rice’s Pent-A-Mind *

H A R O L D

17 R

R I C E

Here is a smart effect in the illusion class. Effect : Two silk sashes tied about a girl’s waist penetrate her body, Figure 108 and 113. Preparation : Join the centers of two vari-colored silk streamers 6” x 9” with a thread, Figure 105.

Presentation : (Standard Method) 1. Invite a lady and two gentlemen from the audience to assist. 2. Place the center of the sashes at the lady’s back and have the gentlemen hold the ends, Figure 106. 3. Working from behind the girl, tie a single knot in front of the girl at her waist with two ends momentarily released

4.

by the gentlemen, Figure 107. At the count of “three” command the gentlemen to pull the sashes through the girl, Figure 108.

( Rice’s Improved Method ) 1. Invite a lady assistant from the audience. 2. Place the joined sashes, Figure 105, around her neck, Figure 109. 3. Stepping behind her, bring the sashes down around her waist, then tie a single knot, using both sashes, Figure 10. 4. Drop all ends momentarily, calling attention to the knot, Figure 111.

5.

6.

Take ends “C-A” in one hand and “D-B” in the other, remaining behind the girl, Figure 112. Pull sharply and the sashes will penetrate the girl, Figure 113.

Passing Through The Ribbon *

18

E D D I E J O S E P H Effect : In this version of GRANDMOTHER’S NECKLACE, the girl passes thru to the front of two ribbons, Figure 118. The addition of several silks adds to the mystery. Preparation : Two 9’ lengths of ribbon (or rape)’ b-18” silks; and a borrowed linen handkerchief are needed. The ribbons are joined at “X” with thread, Figure 105. Presentation : 1. Tie a borrowed linen handkerchief around the ribbons at ‘X’, hiding the union. 2. Place the girl behind the ribbons, and have two gentlemen hold the ends, Figure 114. 3. Stand behind the girl, take one end from each assistant out tie a single knot, Figure 115.

4. 5. 6.

7.

Tie a silk at “A” and “B”, Figure 116. Now tie silks at “C, D, E” and “F”, Figure 117. Command the girl to left up on the borrowed hand and to walk forward at the count of ‘three’ as the gentlemen pull on the ribbons. The result is shown in Figure 118.

Note : Joseph suggests using your own lady assistant. Instead of a thread at “X”, the ribbons are shown separately, then joined with a pin, Figure 119, white the assistants are brought to the stage. The girl removes the pin through the hank as she takes it from the ribbons, step 6.

Penelease *

19 J.

B E A T T I E

This effect first appeared in Eric C. Lewis’s MORE STUDIES IN MYSTERY. Effect : A lady assistant securely fastened with ropes and silks to a wooden stock, Figure 125, is freed at the performers command, Figure 127. Preparation : Two 9’ lengths of rape, a 36” silk, 2-18” silks and a wooden 3 fold screen are needed. Join the center of the ropes with a thread, Figure 70. The apparatus is arranged as shown in Figure 120 at the beginning of the effect. Presentation : 1. Invite two gentlemen and a lady from the audience to assist. 2. Take the 36” silk in the R. hand and the union of the ropes in the left, walking to the front of the stage. 3. Have two gentlemen hold the ends of the ropes as you tie the center of the 36” silk over the union, Figure 121. 4. Ask the lady assistant to stand behind the silk and the ropes.

5.

6.

7.

Take the diagonal ends of the silk and pass them around her waist, knotting them at the back, Figure 122. Back the lady assistant into the screen, thread the ends of the ropes through the holes, then the ends back to the gentlemen, Figure 123. Tie the center of the 18” silks to the ropes to the right and left of the lady, Figure 124, then tie the ends of the silks around her wrists, securing her hands to the ropes, Figure 125.

8.

9.

Take one end of a rope from each gentlemen, pass the ends through the openings in the screen, tie a single knot at the lady’s back, then rethread the ends through the openings and return the ends to the gentlemen, Figure 126. As the gentlemen pull on the ropes at the count of ‘three’, the lady assistant walks forward penetrating the ropes and the screen, but with the silks still tied around her waist and wrists, Figure 127.

Note : The effect may be worked without the screen if desired.

A Different Grandmother’s Necklace * F.

H.

20

J E U D E V I N E

Effect : Two rapes, penetrate the performer’s neck and two selected bracelets, Figure 132.

Preparation : Two 9’ lengths of rope, 2-24” silks, and 4 celluloid bracelets of different colors are needed. Join the centers of the ropes with thread, Figure 70. Presentation : 1. Place the ropes around your neck, union at the back, Figure 109. 2. Have two spectators select two of the four celluloid bracelets. 3. Thread the selected bracelets on the ropes, Figure 128. 4. Tie a single knot with two of the ropes, Figure 129, to hold the bracelets in place.

5. 6. 7. 8.

9.

Add the remaining bracelets to the ropes, Figure 130. Tie a silk under each bracelet to hold it in place, Figure 131. Give one spectator ends “A-C’, and the other, ends “B-D”, Figure 131. Command the spectators to pull at the count of “three”. As the spectators pull, the ropes penetrate your neck, the two selected bracelets fall to the floor, and the remaining bracelets and silks remain on the cords, Figure 132.

Rice’s Dissolve *

H A R O L D

21 R

Effect : A silk tied around a rope with a double knot penetrates the cord. Required : A 6’ length of soft rope and on 18” silk. Presentation : 1. Have a spectator hold the rope as shown in Figure 133.

R I C E

2. 3.

4. 5.

6.

Hold a corner “A” of the silk as in Figure 134. Bring corner “B” around the rope and place it under the left thumb, Figure 135. Note pink “X”. Bring the left second finger across “X”, Figure. 136. Pass the right hand through the loop to take end “A”, Figure 137. Pull end “A” through the loop as shown with dotted lines, Figure 138. Keep the left second finger in the loop which is formed when “A” is pulled through the large loop, Figure 139, and keep it there until

7. 8.

9.

10.

the knot around the silk is medium taut. Withdraw the left second finger. Now, tie a second knot on the audience’s side of the rope, Figure 140. Hold ends “A” and “B” and pull gradually in opposite directions, Figure 141. The silk penetrates the rope (as the first knot dissolves, unknown to the audience,) Figure 141.

Silk Away *

A F T E R

22 M I L B O U R N E

C H R I S T O P H E R

Effect : In Christopher’s version a rope penetrates a silk tied to it. By combing SILK AWAY and DISSOLVO, a double mystery results. Required : A 6’ length of rope and an 18” silk. Presentation : Present the first eight steps of DISSOLVO, Figure 133 through 140.

2. 3. 4.

5. 6.

7.

Take the rope from the assistan and hold it is shown in Figure 142. Form a loop in the rope, Figure 143. Slide the right thumb under the rope at point “X”, Figure 144, as the left hand pulls to the left to tighten the fake knot. Withdraw the right thumb, leaving a small loop in the rope Figure 145. Have a spectator hold the ends of the rope as you take those of the silk. At the count of three you and the spectator pull; the silk penetrates the rope, Figure 146.

Pent-A-Silk *

23 F L O Y D

D.

B R O W N

Floyd Brown’s clever version of my DISSOLVO appears in print for the first time. Effect : Two knotted silks penetrate each other. Required : Red and green 18” silks. Presentation : 1. Have a spectator hold the green silk in a horizontal position, Figure 147. 2. Holding the red silk as shown in Figure 148, take end B in the left hand, Figure 149. 3. Now tie the fake knot as shown in Figures 138 and 139. 4. Then tie a second knot, Figure 150. 5. Bring red knots to bottom of green, Figure 151. 6. Have the spectator tie two single knots in his green silk, Figure 151. 7. Holding corners of the silks, Figure 152, the performer and spectator pull in opposite directions and the silks penetrate, Figure 153.

Snap-Away-Knot *

H A R L A N

24 T A R B E L L

Here is an American version of the Jay – Bee “undisturbed knot” effect. Effect : A silk penetrates one rope as it jumps to another. Required : 2-6’ lengths of rope and an 18” silk. Presentation : 1. Holding the rope as shown in Figure 154, form a lop in the rope, Figure 155 and 156. 2. With the right hand, bring loop “X”, Figure 156, down into position shown in Figure 157. 3. Place the center of the silk in the loop, then take the diagonal corners of the silk, dropping ends of rope, Figure 158. 4. Have a spectator tie a single knot wit the silk, being careful not to allow it to form tightly around the rope, Figure 159. 5. Allow the spectator to tie a second single knot, forming a double knot in the silk, Figure 160. 6. Holding the cords at “A & B”, Figure 160, ask the spectator to release the corners of the silks.

7. 8. 9.

10.

As he does so, pull sharply in opposite directions, straightening the rope, Figure 161. Allow the spectator to hold the rope in the position shown in Figure 161. Place the center of the second rope through loop “C”, Figure 161, then tie a single knot in the second rope Figure 162. With both ropes taut, pull on the rope at points “D” and the silk will penetrate the first rope and will be found securely tied to your rope, Figure 163.

Snap – Away Variation * M R S.

J O H N

25 S Y N D E R

J R.

A careful three silk version of the Jay-Bee effect was introduced by Mrs. John synder, Jr. Effect : A red silk tied to a blue one penetrates it as it joins a second red silk. Required : Two 24” red and a 24” blue silk. Presentation : The presentation is the same, with silks substituted for the two ropes. 1. Form a loop in the blue silk, Figure 154 thru 157. 2. Tie a red silk to the blue, Figures 158 thru 161. 3. Fasten the second red silk to the first, Figure 162. 4. Pull on the second red silk, bringing the first red silk from the blue, Figure 163.

Pull –A-Pant Silks **

G E N E

26 T A R B E L L

The possibilities of the Jay- Bee Knot are almost unlimited. For example, the following effect relies upon this unique principle. Effect : Two silks, knotted together, penetrate each other. Required : A 24” red and a 24” blue silk.

Presentation : 1. Hold the silks as illustrated in Figure 164. Note corner “B” is lower than “A”, and “D” lower than “C”. 2. Tie a loose square knot, Figures 165 and 166. 3. Have a spectator tie a double knot with corners “C” and “D” of the red silk, Fig. 167. (The knot should not be too tight against the blue silk.) 4. Take corners “A” and “B” of the blue silk as illustrated, Fig. 168,then pull sharply to straighten out the blue silk, Figure 169 and 170. 5. Have the spectator tie a double knot with corners “A” and “B” of the blue silk but not too close to the knot in the red silk, Figure 171.

6.

7.

Give a spectator corners “A” and “B” of the blue silk as you insert your right first finger in loop “X” of the red, Figure 172. Pull sharply and the silks will separate, Figure 173.

‘Fourth Dimension’ Silks

E D W I N

27 T A B O R

Effect : Although the centers of two silks are twisted together, the silks penetrate each other ! ( Tarbell’s * and Tabor’s ** versions differ slightly, so I am including both. Required : A 24” red and a 24” blue silk. TARBELL VERSION Presentation : 1. Hold the silks as shown in Figure 174. Note that the point where they cross is off center, Figure 175. 2. Bring corner “D” of the blue silk around the center of the red, Figure 176,then bring

3. 4. 5. 6.

corner “B” of the red silk around the blue silk, Figure, 177. Note that the left thumb holds the crossed portions securely, Figure 178. Now bring end “C” up and over the union at the centers, Figure 179. Figure 180 shows the silks minus the left hand holding them. Bring ends “A” and “B” together, Figure 181, Figure 182 shows the silks minus the hands. Pull the silks apart, Figure 183.

TABOR VERSION Tabor carries the effect one step further. After step 5 Tabor has a spectator tie a knot with ends “A” and “B” of the red silk. The knot goes fairly tight against the union at the centers. Then a knot is tied with ends “C” and “D” of the blue silk. Taking “A” in one hand and “C” in the other, the performer pulls, separating the silks, Figure 184.

Release From Reason *

28

A F T E R W A L T E R G I B S O N A N D L. V. LYONS

The Gibson – Lyons version of this effect employs a linen handkerchief and a piece of cotton stating. I find it works equally well with a silk and length of soft rope. Effect : A silk tied with a genuine knot around a rope penetrates the cord, Figure 192. Required : An 18” silk and a length of soft rope. Presentation : 1. With two spectators holding the ends of the rope, place the silk in position, Figure 185. 2. Bring end “B” around “A”, Figure 186, and through the loop, forming a knot, Figure 187. 3. Show the knot to be genuine.

4.

Taking the knot in the right hand and with considerable slack in the rope, force point “X”, Figure 187, at the rope

through the knot with the finger or thumb of the left hand, Figure 188. 5. Pull end “A” through loop “X”, Figures 188 and 189. 6. Tighten the knot by pulling end “B” of the silk, Figure 190. 7. At the same time pull on the rope at point “Y”, taking the loop “X” inside the knot. 8. With the spectators still holding the ends of the rope firmly, lift the silk sharply, pulling it free of the rope, Figure 192. (Note : Gibson and Lyons suggest steps 4 and 5 be done unknown to the audience, but I find it as effective to do the moves openly.)

Penetration Quickie *

29

Tarbell explains this quickie in Volume 3. Effect : A silk held by a spectator penetrate the rope held by the performer, Figure 195. Required : An 18” silk and a short length of rope. Presentation : 1. Insert the rope through the loop in the silk, Figure 193. 2. Bring your hands together quickly, allowing your right thumb to loop the rope at the left, Figure 194. 3. Continuing, separate the hands suddenly, releasing the end of the rope held in the right hand. 4. At the same time, run the right thumb along the rope to the right, drawing the end of the rope through the silk and into position shown in Figure 195.

Silk Thru Silk *

H O W A R D

30 W AR R I N G E R

Effect : A red silk penetrated a blue silk placed over the left fist. Required : An 18” red and an 18” blue silk. Presentation : 1. Place corner “A” of the red silk between your teeth, Figure 196. Note the position of corner “X”. 2. Bring the closed left fist in front of corner “X”, Figure 197. 3. As you drape a blue silk over the left fist, clip corner “X” between the 3rd and 4th. Fingers of the left hand, Fig. 198. 4. Form a well in the center of the blue silk with a finger of the right hand, Figure199.

5. 6. 7.

8.

9.

Take corner “A” and place it deep in the well, Figure 200. Now bring corner “B” up and into the well, Figure 201. Note the position of the left thumb. Bring the left thumb against the second finger, then tilt the hand to the audience to show the red silk encircled by the blue one, Figure 202. Reach under the blue silk, obtain corner “X”, and pull it down slowly, the red silk apparently penetrating the blue one, Figure 203. To finish, turn the top of the well to the audience as you withdraw the blue silk from the left fist.

Silk Penetration *

M O H A M M E D

31 B E Y

This is Leo Horowitz’s version of a silk through silk effect. Effect : A red silk penetrates a blue one. Required : An 18” red and an 18” blue silk. Presentation : 1. Spread a blue silk over the left fist. 2. With a twisting motion form a depression in the center of the blue silk with the First Finger, Figure 204. 3. Non draw the right second finger quickly across the left thumb to the left to replace the first finger, Figure 205. 4. Look down through the depression made in the center of the silk, and you will see you have formed an open channel through which the red silk will now pass, Figure 206. 5. Push the red silk into the top of the channel, then reach under the blue silk and slowly pull the red silk down through., Figure 207. Note : (Tarbell credits the principle of this penetration to Seymour Davis – Volume 5, Tarbell Course of Magic.)

Thimble Thru Silk *

C H E S T E R

32 D O B S K I

Effect : A thimble penetrates a silk. Required : A thimble and an 18” silk. Presentation : 1. Drape a silk over the closed left fist. 2. Display the thimble on the first finger of the right hand. 3. Deposit thimble in center of silk, Figure 208,then withdraw the finger. 4. Show the finger free of thimble. 5. Prepare to insert the finger in the thimble again. As you do, tilt the left hand as illustrate, bringing the left finger under the silk, Figure 209,the into the thimble, Figure 210. 6. Allow the folds of the silk to fall around the right closed fist, assisting with the left hand, Figure 211. 7. Call attention to the thimble on the finger under the silk. 8. With a waving twirling motion, shake the silk covering the thimble aside.

9.

Properly executed, the last move will cause the thimble to appear, apparently having penetrated the silk, Figure 212.

Ball Thru Silk *

33 I R E L A N D

This effect made popular by Ireland is available is golf or billiard ball form. Effect : A ball apparently penetrates a silk. Required : An 18” blue silk and a golf or billiard ball with a ‘clinging’ half shell.

Presentation : 1. Hold a corner of the silk in the left hand as the ball with the shell is taken with the right. 2. Toss the ball with shell into the air and catch it in the right hand. 3. Place the ball in the left hand, shell against palm, Figure 213. 4. Take the silk as illustrated, Figure 214. 5. Still holding corner “B”, take ball in right hand, leaving shell in left. 6. Drape the center of the silk over the shell and left palm, Figure 215. 7. Place ball against silk and press it into shell, Figure 216. 8. Show ball suspended in silk, Figure 217. 9. Raise the lower edge to reverse silk, showing the other side, Figure 218, exposing shell. Ball appears to have penetrated silk. 10. Reverse silk again, ball to audience, left hand at top, right hand behind silk and cupped around ball, Figure 219. 11. Give silk slight pull with left hand while holding shell – This will loosen ball. 12. Move right hand gripping shell down toward lower edge of silk, ball riding on top of the silk. 13. As the ball reaches the edge of the silk it will fall into the shell, Figure 220. 14. Press the ball firmly into the shell, then toss the ball with shell into the air and display the silk.

Glass Penetration *

34 T H A Y E R

Effect : A silk penetrates a piece of plate glass held in a frame. Required : A frame which holds a sheet of glass, two ghost tubes, and a metal clip, Figure 221 ; also, two 18” red silk. Preparation : Load one of the silks into the shaded area shown in Figure 221.

Presentation : 1. Show both ghost tubes empty empty, Chpater 7, Volume 1. 2. Place the clip in place over the glass. 3. Insert a ghost tube on each side of the glass, Figure 222. 4. Push part of the remaining red silk into the compartment of tube “A” with a wand. 5. Now pull part of the duplicate silk from tube “B”, Figure223. 6. Continue until all of one silk is inside of “A”, and the other silk is out of “B”.

7.

Disassemble the apparatus and show glass to be solid.

Educated Silks

35

Effect : A silk is selected from several knotted on a ribbon. The chosen silk falls from the ribbon upon command. The silks vanish from a cylinder, then appear on an assistant’s back. Now all of the silks drop free of the ribbon. Required : Eight 18” silks, 2 each of 4 different colors; two 36” lengths of ribbon ; a special ‘phantom tube’. The tube is in 2 pieces, Figure 224. One end of a length of elastic is fastened to the inner tube. To the other end fasten 4 small pieces of silk of colors duplicating those to be used later, and a length of ribbon, Figure 225.

Preparation : 1. Tie 3 of the silks to the ribbon. 2. Form a loose knot in a corner of the 4th. Silk, Figure 226. 3. Slip a bight of ribbon into the knot, Figure 227. 4. The silks are now as shown in Figure 228. 5. Tie a loose knot in a corner of each of the four duplicate silks. 6. Fasten the silks to the duplicate ribbon with bights, Figure 227. 7. Fasten the ribbon and silks to the assistants back. 8. Tuck the silk fake down into the cylinder, Figure 229.

Presentation : 1. Display silks, Figure 228. 2. The manufacturer claims that due to the four colors used the spectator will almost always select green. If you prefer to be certain, use a force such as the COLLINS FORCING FRAME, page

3. 4. 5. 6.

7. 8. 9.

10.

468, Chapter 10, Volume 1. Draw the ribbon taut, and the green silk will fall to the floor. Untie the knot, then tie the green silk in place on the ribbon. Place the silks and ribbon inside the fake end of the tube. Pull end A of the ribbon and silk fake an inch or two out of the tube, Figure 230, then release the ribbon. Elastic will pull silk fake back into the tube. Show the tube empty. Find the silks on the back of the assistant. Command all the silks to drop from the ribbon. The silks drop as the ribbon is made taut and the bights are pulled out of the knots in the silks.

Obedient Silks *

S T E W A R T

J U D A H

36

Effect : Any silk freely selected from four tied to a 54” length of tape falls upon command to the floor, Figure 238.

Required : Four 18” silks and a 54” length of black twill tape. The Secret : The secret of this unique effect rests in the novel method of tying the silks to the tape. Preparation : 1. Lay the tape outstretched on the table. 2. Starting about 8” form the left end of the tape, form a loose loop around the corner of a silk, Figure 231. 3. Form a second loop within the first, Figure 232. 4. Now draw the first loop up very tight around the silk by pulling on “X”, Figure 233. 5. Place a bight of the silk in the second loop, Figure 234. Now draw the loop up very tight ground the bight by pulling on “Y”, Figure 234. 6. Silk now appears as shown in Figure 235. 7. Repeat the first six steps, tying a second silk about 6” to the right of the first. 8. Repeat with the remaining two silks. Presentation : 1. Display the four silks tied to the tape, Figure 236. 2. Permit any spectator to freely name any silk. 3. Take the tip of the selected silk in the left hand and the silk at its middle in the right, Figure 237. 4. Ask spectator to blow up the knot. As he does, pull slightly on the silk in opposite directions. This pulls the tiny bight out of the tape but the knot remains. 5. Hold the tape again as shown in Figure 236. 6. Ask the spectator to command his selected silk to fall to the floor. 7. As he does, pull slowly but sharply on the ends of the tape, and the selected silk will fall to the floor as the knot unties, Figure 238. (See ‘UNCANNY HANKIES’ – Page 660)

A ‘Magic Stuff” Penetration * R O B E R T

37 H A R B I N

Effect : A box with out top or bottom is threaded on a tape. Three knotted silks lowered into the box emerge tied to the tape. The Secret : The box is a ‘jap box’ with two flaps “X” and “Y”. A compartment “Z” in one end and flap “X” contain faked silks, Figure 239. Preparation : 1. The tape is of double thickness and about 4 yards long. 2. Sewed inside the tape are three metal wedges of graduated sizes, Figure 240, which are about two feet apart. There are three corresponding disks. Wedge No. 1 passes easily thru disks 2 and 3 but not disk No. 1. Wedge No. 2 will pass thru disk 3 but not 2 or 1. Wedge No. 3 will not pass thru any of the disks, Figure 241. 3. Six 18” silks, 2 sets of three different colors are needed. Tie one set with single knots, and

4.

into each knot sew one of the disks, concealing the discs in the knots but leaving the holes free, Figure 242. Place the gimmicked silks in the compartments, Figure 239, the silk with the largest disk, first, etc. The bulk of the silks goes into Flap “X”. Disks must line up with the holes in the compartment “Z”.

Presentation : 1. With flaps “X” and “Y” closed, show box empty. 2. Thread about a yard of the tape thru the holes in the box. Have a spectator hold ends of tape firmly. 3. Lower a silk into the box, knot and diagonal end showing, Figure 243. 4. Lower flap “Y” and drop knot inside, Figure 244. 5. Move box on tape, first wedge pulling part of first silk from compartment “Z” into view, Figure 245. 6. As faked silk emerges, work the exposed diagonal corner of silk up and into “Y” with fingers, Figure 246. This must be timed to correspond with the appearance of the balance of the first silk wedged on the tape. 7. Repeat with the remaining two silks.

Confucius Saber *

H A R O L D

38 R.

R I C E

Effect : Mysterious Confucius ( a wand) has a Saber (paper knife) in his throat and a cobra (streamer) wound about his neck. As the saber is removed, the snake penetrates Confucius’s neck. Required : A paper knife, 9 x 48” streamer, and a wand with a slot in it, Figure 247. Presentation : 1. Place knife in slot, then drop center of silk over knife, Figure 248. 2. Pass end “A” around wand, Figure 249. 3. Pass end “B” around wand, Figure 250. 4. Cross the ends under the knife, end “B” crossing under end “A”, Figure 251. 5. Now cross the ends above the knife, end “B” crossing on top of “A”, Figure 252. 6. Finally wind the silk around the wand once more, again crossing “B” on top of “A”, Figure 253. 7. Have the ends held by two spectators.

8. 9. 10.

Command spectators to pull at the count of three. On two pull the knife from the slot, then count three. The silk penetrates the wand.

Cutting A Woman In Half * J E A N

39 H U G A R D

This version of CONFUCUS SABER appeared in Hugard’s 1938 –39 ANNUAL OF MAGIC. Required : A 6” x 12’ silk streamer and a large knife or sword. Secret : A lady assistant holds the sword against her waist. With the sword acting as the paper knife, proceed to do No. 38, CONFUCIUS SABER. Figure 254 shows the effect just before the release. As the spectators pull on the streamer the assistant removes the knife about 2” from her waist. The replaces the knife as soon as the silk streamer penetrates (?) her body.

Handkerchief Frame *

H A R L A N

40 T A R B E L L

This is Tarbell’s version of an old but wonderful effect. Effect : A silk penetrates a borrowed linen hank tacked to a frame, Figure 262. Secret : The secret is in the construction of the frame, Figure 255, as shown in Figure 256. Part “A” of one side slides up and down. Presentation : 1. Borrow a lady’s linen handkerchief. 2. Fasten it to the frame with thumb tacks, Figure 257. 3. Note that one edge of the hank is tacked to the movable side “A”. If “A” were released, hank and slide “A’ would drop down the frame, Figure 258.

4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

11.

With linen hank tacked in place, put frame in a paper bag 14” x 15”, Figure 259. As the last of the frame goes in push side “A” down a few inches with the right thumb, Figure 260. Reverse the envelope, allowing A to fall to the bottom of the frame. Holding the apparatus as shown in Figure 261, push a pencil thru the hank (?) and envelope. Now pull a silk thru the hole made by the pencil, Figure 262. Reverse the envelope, allowing “A” to fall back into its original position, right hand assisting, Figure 263. With “A” locked in place, remove the frame and show linen hank unharmed, Figure 264. For a silk thru silk effect, use a silk hank instead of a borrowed linen.

Cig-penetration *

41 T E N K A I

Effect : A lit cigarette penetrates a silk and is found in the performers pocket. Preparation : 1. Place a lit cigarette in a tank in your left trouser pocket. 2. Finger palm a large thumb tip in your left hand, Figure 265. Presentation : 1. Drape a silk over the first finger of the left hand, Figure 266. 2. Place a borrowed lit cigarette between your lips. 3. In the mean time, work the

thumb tip up to the fingertips, Figure 267. 4. Bring the right hand to the left, nip the silk between the right first and second fingers and carry the thumb tip away behind the silk, Figure 268. 5. Take the cigarette into the left hand while the right works the thumb tip on the right thumb, Figure 269. 6. Replace the cigarette between the lips. 7. Display the silk, thumbs to back, Figure 270. 8. Release the corner held in the left hand. 9. Form left hand into a fist and rape silk over it, Figure. 271. 10. Ask a spectator to form a well in the center of the silk. 11. Illustrate by doing so yourself. As you do, place the right thumb under the left, Figure 272. ( Silk is eliminated to simplify the illustration). 12. Palm off the thumb tip through the silk as the right hand is taken away, Figure 273. 13. Now silk and thumb tip are in the position shown in, Figure 274. 14. After spectator makes well in silk, insert your first finger into it as though making it deeper. At the same time place your right thumb in the thumb tip again. 15. Place the right thumb in the well and leave the tip inside. 16. Remove the right thumb and stroke the folds of the silk downwards once. 17. Drop lit cigarette into thumb tip. 18. Push right thumb into tip to crush cigarette and remove thumb and tip with cigarette in it. 19. Take the corner of silk nearest you with right hand as shown in Figure 275. Note that tip is hidden from view. 20. Slowly pull silk thru left hand, then open left palm. 21. Stroke upwards on silk with left hand, Figure 276. 22. When you reach upper corner stop, taking position shown in Figure 277. 23. Now extend Fingers, Figure 278. 24. Bring hands in front of you to position Figure 279.

25. Carry the silk up with the right hand, leaving the tip in the left hand, Figure 280. 26. Assuming Figure 281, place palmed tip against trousers, Figure 282, roll hand forward extending fingers, Figure 283. 27. Tap pocket with fingers while palm holds tip against trousers. 28. Now reverse the moves … Figure 283, then 282, and finally back to 281, rolling tip down into fingers. 29. Reach in left trouser pocket and remove lit cigarette from tank, leaving tip in pocket. 30. Show cigarette, then smoke it.

‘Pop Up’ Cigarette *

M A R T I N

42 G A R D N E R

This effect from the Tarbell Course is an excellent follow-up for Tenkai’s CIGPENETRATION. Effect : A cigarette covered with a silk suddenly ‘pops up’ thru the center of the silk. Presentation : 1. Hold the cigarette as shown in Figure 284. 2. Apparently cover the cigarette with a silk, Figure 289. 3. Instead, swing the cigarette away, Figure 285, as the silk comes into place, Figure 286, the second finger taking the cigarette’s place. 4. Drop the hank over the hand as shown in Figure 287. 5. The audience view is shown in Figure 289.

6. 7. 8.

Tuck the rear of the silk well down into the crotch of the thumb. Command the cigarette to ‘pop up’, Figure 290. To cause the penetration, merely bring the cigarette up to the position shown in Figure 288.

Cigarette Thru Silk *

K E I T H

43 C L A R K

Here is another excellent follow-up for the Tenkai routine. A lit cigarette penetrates a silk. Presentation : 1. Assume position in Figure 291 with silk and cigarette. 2. Bring the left hand up to toss the silk over the cigarette, Figure 292. 3. Thumb palm the cigarette, Figure 293. 4. Now drop the silk over the right hand as the left is turned over, Figure 294. 5. Close left fingers around the right thumb …supposedly the cigarette, Figure 295. 6. Bring the right hand behind the left and deposit the cigarette in the crotch of the left thumb, Fig. 296. 7. Take the silk at “X”, Figure 297, with the right hand,

8.

9.

then twist the silk. At the same time slowly push the cigarette up into view with the left thumb, Figure 298. Now open the silk to show it is unharmed.

Penetra Silk *

H A R L A N

44 T A R B E L L

Effect : A silk passes thru a tumbler into a glass casket. Secret : The tumbler and casket are prepared. Required : A crystal casket, Figure 299 ( Volume 1, Chapter 7, Page 233) ; a tumbler with a celluloid insert, Figure 300, and a cover, Figure 303, 2-18” red silks. Preparation : Place one silk in the hidden compartment, the other in the casket, Figure 301. Presentation : 1. Show casket and tumbler. 2. Remove the silk from the casket. 3. Place glass on casket, then silk in glass, Figure 302. 4. Cover the glass with cylinder, Figure 303. 5. Release catch freeing silk in hidden compartment. 6. Remove cover and carry insert and silk away with it, leaving

empty tumbler on casket, Figure 304.

Silk Filter *

45 P E T E R

W A R L O C K

Effect : A silk passes thru one glass into another, Figure 311. Required : Two small whiskey glasses, a rubber band, a small plate, a 12” or 18” silk, and 2 very thin linen handkerchiefs. Secret : A metal or plastic lid with a lip that fits loosely over the mouth of one of the glasses is needed. Either sew or glue the lid to the center of one of the hanks, then sew the hanks together, Figure 305. Presentation : 1. Show the two glasses. 2. Place the silk one glass, a small portion of the center of the silk protruding, Figure 306.

3.

4. 5.

6.

7.

Place the linen hank and lid over the mouth of the glass, then put the rubber band in place, Figure 307. Note that the band encircles the lip of the lid and not the glass. Lower the covered glass over the reversed second and empty glass, Figure 308. Now prepare to set the arrangement on the plate. In doing so reverse the two glasses with the right hand while holding the hank and lid with the left, Figure 309. Remove the rubber band and band and hank to show silk is now in the bottom glass, Figure 310. Note the right thumb firmly presses the center of the silk to the plate. As the glasses are lifted away, the thumb holds the expanding silk to the plate, Figure 311.

Silk Thru Glass

46 B R U N E L

W H I T E

Effect : Although a tumbler holds water, a silk penetrates its bottom. Required : A bottomless glass, a glass disk, and a metal cylinder, Figure 312; on 18” silk with a weight sewed tone corner, and a pitcher of water. Preparation : Put the disk in place at the bottom of the tumbler. Presentation : 1. Fill glass with water, then pour it back into the pitcher. 2. Cover the tumbler with the cylinder, then push the disk up inside with a free finger, Figure 313. 3. Pass the silk thru the glass and cylinder, weighted tip first, allowing it to fall to the table, Figure 314. 4. Allow disk to drop back in place, then fill glass with water again. 5. Remove the cover and show glass full of water.

Penetrating Silk *

R O B E R T

47 B O W E R M A N

Effect : A freely selected silk leaves one glass and penetrates another. Required : A mirror glass (Vol. 1, Chapter 8, Page 325), an unprepared duplicate glass, two tubes to cover the glasses, and a metal tray, Six 18” silks (Two each of red, white, and blue ) are also needed. Preparation : Roll a red, a white, and a blue silk, and place them on pins just under the edge of the coat, Vol. 1, Chapter 6, Page 164. Presentation : 1. Have a silk freely selected. Let us say it is red. 2. Show the mirror glass as ordinary, then cover it with a tube. 3. Place the selected red silk in the back compartment of the mirror glass and the remaining silks in front. 4. Now place the tray on top of the cylinder, Fig. 315. 5. While showing the remaining tube empty with the left hand, steal a silk ( the selected red) from under the coat with the right. 6. Transfer the tube to the right hand which holds the palmed silk just inside, Figure 316, while the left picks up and shows the remaining glass. 7. Set the glass on top of the tray, then cover the glass with the tube, dropping the palmed silk into the glass as you do so, Figure 317.

8.

9.

Remove the cylinder from the top glass and show the red silk, Figure 318. Remove the tray and tube from the bottom glass and show the red silk missing.

The Triple Penetration

W I L L

48 G O L D S T O N

Effect : A silk penetrates a linen hank, a tumbler, and a newspaper, Figure 326. Required : A cardboard fake with celluloid lip attached, a metal tube, Figure 319; a tumbler, a linen hank, a sheet of newspaper, and 218” silks. Preparation : Place a folded silk between the pages of the newspaper, Figure 320. Presentation : 1. With fake in right palm, Figure 321, show the tube with the left. 2. Transfer the tube to the right hand, fake going inside, Figure 322. 3. Tuck silk into top of tube …actually into fake. 4. Take the tube away, leaving the fake in the right hand. ( Reverse of Figure 322.) 5. Obtain the linen hank from the trouser pocket, leaving the fake therein. 6. Place the tube on the center of the hank, Figure 323. 7. Bring the hank up around the tube, holding the corners in place with a rubber band, Figure 324. 8. Place the tube and hank in a glass which rests on the newspaper, Figure 325. 9. Bring the newspaper up around the glass and twist the corners to close the top. 10. Break thru the paper below the bottom of the glass and pull the duplicate silk into view, Figure 326. 11. Show the silk gone from the tube inside of the glass and hank.

Three Handkerchiefs

H A T T O N

49 A N D

Effect : Three silks, although sealed penetrate the containers at will.

P L A T E

in

individual

tumblers,

Secret : Three mirror glasses , a long cylinder, 6-18” silks, (2 each, red, white, and blue.), 2 glass disks, and a metal tray are needed. Preparation : Prepare the mirror glasses as shown in Figure 327. Presentation : 1. Remove silks from fronts of mirror glasses, show glasses and silks, then replace silks. 2. Stack the glasses on the tray, a disk separating each glass, Figure 328. 3. Hold the tray in the left hand, place the cylinder over the glasses. 4. Transfer the tray to the right hand to show the left empty. Note ! This action automatically reverses the position of the glasses, Fig. 329. 5. Remove the cylinder and show position of silks, Figure 330. 6. Rearrange glosses as in Fig. 331, then cover with cylinder.

7.

Pass tray to other hand, reversing glasses, then remove cover, Figure 332. 8. Rearrange glasses again, Figure 333, the cover with cylinder. 9. Pass tray to other hand, reversing glasses, then remove cover, Figure 334. 10. Rearrange glasses again, Figure 335, then cover with cylinder. 11. Pass tray to other hand, reversing glasses, then remove cover, Figure 336. Silks are now back in original position. Note ! Hatton & Plate suggest using a mechanical turn table, Vol. 1, Chapter 8, page 327. However I prefer the more subtle method of transferring the tray from one hand to the other for each change.

The Ghost Silk

E D W A R D

50 B A G S H A W E

If you own a handkerchief casket (Volume 1, Chapter 7, Page 232) also known as the ‘Bates’ box, you can build this penetration. s A silk dropped into a square chimney penetrates a sealed transparent box. Required : A chimney constructed as shown in Figure 337, a 3-3/4” square of glass, and a ‘Bates’ box, 2-18” duplicate silks. Preparation : Place one silk under the flap fake in the ‘Bate’s’ box, the other in the right trouser pocket. Presentation : 1. Place the supposedly empty box on the right palm. 2. Rest the square of glass on top of the box. 3. Finally cover the box and glass with the chimney. 4. Transfer the apparatus to the left hand, leaving the fake palm in the right hand, releasing the silk into the Bate’s box, Figure 338. 5. Remove the silk from the pocket, leaving the fake behind. 6. Drap flap as silk is placed

7.

in top of chimney, Figure 339. Close flap, remove chimney and glass, and show silk inside of box. Finally show chimney to be empty.

Cut and Restored Silk J E A N N E

51 V A N

Z A N D T

Now for some cut and restored effects. Effect : Two silks placed in a paper cylinder and cut into two parts are found whole again. Preparation : Place two 18” silks in a paper cylinder with two rubber bands located as shown in Figure 340.

Presentation : 1. Withdraw the two silks and show tube. 2. Replace the silks, Figure 340, showing how they are in view at both ends of the tube. 3. Remove silks again, this time slipping band “A” over their centers, unknown to the audience. 4. Secretly reverse ends of silks to form position shown in Figure 341, while spectator unrolls cylinder. 5. Place silks on paper, reform cylinder tightly about silks, then replace rubber band “B”, Figure 342. 6. Holding ends of tube, pull on tips of silks as spectator cuts cylinder at its center with scissors,

7.

8.

Figure 343. As the cylinder separates, bring two halves side by side, Figure 344,and take a corner of each silk in the right hand, Figure 345. Quickly pull the silks from the halves of the cylinder, Figure 345.

Separated Silk

52 J O E

O V E T T E

Effect : A silk placed in a paper cylinder and cut into two parts is found whole again. Secret : A large thumb tip with a piece of silk glued inside, Figure 346, a 12” silk, and a piece of stiff paper are needed.

Preparation : Place the thumb tip and silk in the lower vest pocket. Presentation : 4. Reach into pocket and get tip on right thumb as silk is removed. Keep the tip hidden behind silk. 5. Lay silk aside and display paper, Figure 347. 6. Form paper into a cylinder around right thumb with left hand. 7. Withdraw right thumb, leaving tip inside the tube, Figure 348. 8. Now transfer the tube and tip to the right hand, Figure 349. 9. Crumple about half of the 12” silk with the right hand, then tuck about ¾ of it into end “A” of the tube, leaving the balance in view, Figure 350. 10. Reverse the tube, reach into end “B” with the left fingers and pull the piece of silk from within the tip into view.

1. 2.

3.

Hold tube with both hands, pinching the center of the tube flat, Figure 351. Hold tube with left hand; cut through the center of the tube with scissors. Separate the two pieces of tube.

11.

12.

Bring the cut centers of the tube together once more, push the piece of silk back into the tip, then steal it out on thumb. Now pull the silk slowly from the tube and display it.

Cut and Restored Hank * T.

53

S A K A M O T O

Few know the secret of this effect !! Effect : A cut silk visibly restores itself! Secret : A sheet of black paper is folded and glued, forming a cylindrical pocket along one end, Figure 352. Note that paper is scored into quarters. A piece of silk with thread attached, Figure 353,is in one end and the pocket sewed as illustrated, Figure 354. Required : Prepared tube, 18” silk, wand and scissors. Presentation : 1. Show paper, then form it into a flat tube, compartment on out side, Figure 355. 2. Push the silk into compartment B with a wand, Figure 356. 3. Reach into A and withdraw a portion of the fake silk, Figure 356. 4. Now holding tube as in Figure 357, pull down on the real silk and the thread, causing part of the fake silk to go back into tube. This is a most i i

5. 6.

7.

Cut tube with scissors which pass under the thread and above the stitching in tube, Figure 358. Separate the cut tube to show two separate pieces. Then bring the ends together again. Now for a beautiful finish. Holding the cut tube as shown in Figure 359, pull down on the real silk and thread. The fake goes down into compartment. “A” as the read silk emerges !

Snip A Silk

54 H A R O L D

R.

R I C E

Effect : A silk is restored after being cut into two pieces, Figure 367. Secret : A prepared sheet of paper imprinted with black stripes front and back, scored twice, and slit as illustrated, Fig. 360, is required. Required : Prepared paper, 18” silk, and scissors or large knife. Presentation : 1. Show silk and paper. 2. Fold paper on scored lines, slits to back, Figure 361. 3. Holding paper vertically, force slit section to the front with the left thumb, Figure 362. 4. Drop silk in top and force it through with a wand, center of silk exposed to performer at opening in back, Figure 363. 5. Reach for scissors (or knife) with right hand as left thumb and first finger form a loop in the center of the silk, Figure 364. 6. Place one prong of the scissors (or knife) under the loop, Figure 365. 7. Fold the paper over the scissors (or knife), Figure 366. 8. Cut paper into two pieces. 9. Reverse the paper so ends are uppermost, then fan the two pieces, Figure 367. 10. Pull down on center of silk rapidly, Fig. 368. Show it unharmed, dropping papers to floor.

Super Sharp Scissors *

G E O R G E

55 B R A U N D

Braund suggests using a kraft “ pay envelope” and a length of silk ribbon instead of a silk and prepared paper employed in my version No. 54. Figure 369 shows the prepared envelope. Preparation : 1. Place the length of ribbon inside the envelope, then close but do not seal the flap. Presentation : 1. Pick up the envelope and remove the ribbon. 2. With scissors, cut off both ends of the envelope. 3. Force the ribbon thru the envelope with a wand, Figure 370. 4. Fold the envelope of its center, Figure 371. 5. Pull down on the ends of the ribbon, forming an arch about 1” below the fold, Figure 372. 6. Insert the scissors, Figure 373, then cut the envelope without harming the ribbon. If desired, a spectator may do the cutting. 7. Now fan the two cut portions, Figure 367, then pull the ribbon free, Figure 368.

Extra Sharp Scissors * C.

56 E.

L O G A N

Logan’s version uses a 12” silk and an ordinary envelope prepared in advance. Preparation : 1. Close but do not seal the flap. 2. With a sharp razor blade cut the back of the envelope at points indicated with dotted lines, Figure 374. Presentation : 1. Show envelope, then seal flap in place. 2. With scissors cut away ends “A-B” and “C-D”, Figure 374. 3. With a wand push the silk thru envelope, Figure 375. 4. Complete the effect by cutting and restoring the silk as shown in Figures 371, 372, 373, 367,and 368.

Cut and Restored Ribbon * T O M

57 A U B U R N

Effect : The center of a ribbon threaded thru an open box is restored after being cut with a pair of scissors. Secret : The effect depends upon a cleverly constructed box. Preparation : Construct a box from plywood as shown in Figure 376. Inside ends are red; back and bottom are flat black. Now insert a hinged flap, Figure 377. Then attach two pieces of red thread to box and Flap, Figure 378. Attach a length of ribbon to the threads so ends line up with slots in box, Figure 379. Finally bring flap up against back, hiding strip of ribbon. Required : Prepared box and 12” length of silk ribbon. Presentation : 1. With flap up, thread the ribbon thru slots in ends. 2. Show back of box, allowing flap to fall down, Figure. 380. 3. Turn front of box to audience, then cut center of fake

4.

5.

ribbon with scissors. Turn back of box to spectators, raise flap, then turn front of box back to audience, showing ribbon whole again. Remove ribbon from box and toss it into audience.

Novel Silk Penetration *

H A R O L D

58 R.

R I C E

Effect : A silk penetrates performer’s trouser pocket, passes into a glass, penetrates another, then passes back to the original pocket again ! Required : A mirror glass, an ordinary glass of same design, a book, 2 blue and 3 red 12” silks, and 2 linen handkerchiefs. Preparation : Place a blue silk in the mirror glass, a red silk in the top of the right trousers pocket, and a blue in the top of the left in preparation for the “top of pocket dodge”, Vol. 1, Chapter 10, page 514. Presentation : 1. Showing the glasses, book and linen hands, assemble

them as shown in Figure 381, secretly turning the mirror glass as it is covered. 2. Pull out and show both pockets to be empty, Figure 382. 3. Replace the pockets, dislodging silks, Figure 383. 4. Roll the red silk (Vol. 1, Chapter 8, page 292) , and place it in (top corner of ) left pocket, Figure 384. 5. Remove it (duplicate red) from right pocket. 6. Roll the red silk and put in the (top corner of) left pocket again. 7. Pull out right pocket and discover silk did not pass thru body into it this time. 8. Remove blue silk from left pocket, explaining that the red silk in failing to pass is ‘blue with rage’. 9. Roll the silk, appearing to take it in the left hand but retaining it in the right, Vol. 1, Chapter 8, page 291. 10. Toss the empty closed left fist toward the top glass tumbler, opening the hand. 11. Taking one corner of linen hank, pull it away with the right hand, disclosing glass, Figure 385. Silk is not there ! 12. Replace hank, dropping palmed silk unnoticed into glass, Figure 386. 13. Remove book and second linen hank, disclosing blue silk in mirror glass. 14. Cover mirror glass again, secretly giving it a half turn. 15. Replace book. 16. Replace covered top glass (now loaded with blue silk). 17. Command blue silk to penetrate upwards. 18. Success ! Remove top hank and show blue silk. 19. Show silk missing from bottom glass. 20. Roll blue silk and place it in (top corner of) right pocket. 21. Find red silk back in left pocket as right is shown empty.

Walking Thru a Ribbon * U.

59 F.

G R A N T

Effect: Two spectators pull a silk ribbon thru a girl’s body, Figure 393. Required : The loop of ribbon and ring apparatus, and two ribbons with snaps attached to one end and rings to the other, Figure. 387. Presentation : 1. Show the loop of ribbon to be unprepared, then take the two rings as illustrated in Figure 388 as lady assistant is selected from audience. 2. Stepping to left of girl, right hand takes ribbon at point “X”, Figure 389. As assistant raises her arms, pass the ribbon around her body and to the front. 3. Take the ribbon “X” into the left hand, forming a complete circle around the assistant’s waist. However, and this is important, the left hand retained both rings during this business. 4. At this point ribbon and

rings are as shown in Figure 390. 5. Have girl hold ribbon tightly just behind rings with one hand, Figure 391. 6. Now fasten a snap in each large ring. 7. Finally have male spectators standing at each side of the girl take a small ring, Figure 392. 8. At the count of three command the girl to release the rings at her waist and the men to pull sharply. 9. As they do, the ribbon appears to penetrate the assistants body, Figure 393. Note: For variation, a silk can be tied just behind the rings instead of having the assistant hold the ribbons, Figure 394.

Perfect Ribbon Thru Body

A L A N

60 L A M B I E

Effect : A single ribbon penetrates a lady’s body, Figure 402. Required : Two prepared silk ribbons with rings assembled as shown in Figure 395. Presentation : 1. Display ribbons and rings, Figure 396, ring “B” secretly palmed. 2. Taking “C” in right hand, pull to right, bringing rings “A” and “B” into the left hand. 3. Display ribbon, Figure 397. 4. Pass large ring “D” over “C”, Figure 398. 5. Now place ribbon around spectators waist so “D” is at front, Figure 399,and “A-B” and “C” are at the back, Figure 400. 6. Place ring “C” over a finger of the left hand, taking “A” in the left and “B” in the right, Figure 401. 7. Have male spectator take loop “E” firmly. He is at the front and to the left of the girl, and performer behind her, facing audience. 8. Tell girl to raise her arms at the count of two. 9. At count of three release ring “C” and pull sharply in opposite directions on rings “A” and “B”. 10. Ring “C” will pass thru spectator’s ring “D”, and ribbon will now be at back of girl, apparently having penetrated her waist, Figure 402, leaving spectator with short ribbon in his hand.

Thru A Wedding Ring

H A R R Y

61 L A T O U R

Effect : A silk appears, penetrating a wedding ring, Figure 408. Required : A silk with thread attached, and a wedding ring, Figure 403. Preparation : Place silk between 3rd and 4th, buttons of vest, ring in pocket, and button outside, Figure 404. Presentation : 1. Remove ring from pocket, Figure 405, and display it, Figure 406. 2. Now bring right shoulder nearest the audience. 3. Pull on thread to the left with the left hand, drawing corner “A” of the silk from vest thru the ring, Figure 407. Right hand and arm hide action from audience. 4. Without pausing, take corner “A” of the silk in the left hand, turn to face audience, and pull the silk half way thru the ring. At the same time move the right hand along the silk to corner “B”, Fig. 408, displaying the silk thru the ring.

Ring of Jhoth *

N E L S O N

62 H A H N E

Effect : Performer causes a ring to penetrate a silk held by spectator. Required : Two ⅞” bone rings and an 18” silk handkerchief. Preparation : Place a ring over corner “B”, Figure 409. Bring corner “A” in front of “B”, Figure 410, and place silk in breast pocket. Presentation : 1. Remove silk from pocket, Figure 410. 2. Bring left hand near center of silk to conceal ring as corner “A” is dropped, Figure 411. 3. Taking silk and ring it left hand, have spectator hold diagonal corners, Figure 412.

4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

11.

Remove duplicate ring (No. 2) from vest pocket and place it between first and second fingers, Figure 413. Bring right hand over to push ring further down into the left hand. However, a very clever ‘switch’ is made. Under cover of the right hand take ring No. 2 on the right thumb, Figure 414. At same time push ring No. 1 up into view with left thumb, Figure 415. Move right hand to right, holding ring No. 2 behind silk, Figure 415. Pull silk slightly to right with right hand as left fist is opened and ring no. 1 disclosed on the silk, Figure. 416. Draw ring No. 1 off of silk and pass it for examination, Figure 417. Return silk to breast pocket with right hand, leaving ring No. 2 with silk, Figure 417.

Ring On Silk * Effect : A ring penetrates a silk held by a spectator, Figure 421 Required : An 18” silk and two duplicate finger rings. Preparation : Fold a silk, Figure 418, then twist it, Figure 419. Slide a finger ring over one end, then tuck the ring out of view under a convenient fold, Figure 420. (If desired the fold can be held in place with a tiny dab of magician’s wax.) Presentation : 1. Pick up silk, giving it several additional twists. 2. A spectator holds the diagonal corners of the silk. 3. Introduce the duplicate ring, holding it in the left hand. 4. Appear to take the ring in the right hand, executing the ‘french drop’, Volume 1, Chapter 8, page 293. 5. Bring the right hand down sharply on the silk, force the duplicate ring from under the folds and to the center of the silk, Figure 421.

63

Ring On Ward *

W A R O L D

64 R.

R I C E

This, one of my first silk effects, was explained in THE BOYS BOOK OF CONJURING. Effect : A ring tied din a silk penetrates it and appears at the center of the performer’s wand, Figure 427. Required : A wand, on 18” silk, a borrowed linen hank, and two very thin duplicate wedding rings. Preparation : Cut thru one of the rings, then file the ends to sharp points, Figure 422. Place the cut ring your left little finger. Presentation ; 1. Display unprepared wedding ring held in left hand. 2. Place the center of the silk over the hand, at same time switching rings under cover of the silk. 3. Have a spectator take the cut ring thru the silk, Figure 423. The unprepared ring is now on left little finger. 4. Have spectator tie silk tightly with thread below ring, Figure 424, then tie thread to center of wand, Figure 425. 5. While spectator ties ring in silk, slip unprepared ring over end of wand, Figure 425. 6. Have spectator cover wand and silk with his linen hank, Figure 426. 7. While spectator holds ends of wand, reach under hank, bend fake ring and force sharp end thru silk. Reshape ring and place it on left little finger. Finally rub silk to close hole in it. Unprepared ring is now at center of wand.

8.

Remove linen hank and show ring on wand, Figure 427.

The Prayer Chain *

C A R Y L

65 F L E M I N G.

Effect : A silk streamer (or silk cord) claimed to be a Tibetan Priest’s prayer chain, Figure 428, penetrates the performer’s neck. Required : A 6” wide silk streamer about 8 feet long. Sew the ends together to form an unbroken circle. Presentation : 1. Place the streamer around your neck, Figure 429. 2. Taking streamer at point “X”, Figure 429, form a second loop around your neck, Figure. 428 and 430. 3. Form a third loop in the bottom of the first, Figure. 431. 4. Put third loop over head, point “Y”, Fig. 431, to back of neck. 5. Grasp the streamer at points “ZZ” and pull, The prayer-chain will appear to penetrate the neck.

Sifted Thru Silk * K E N

66 D E

C O U R C Y

Effect : Salt appear to penetrate a silk. The Secret : In addition to an 18” silk and a shaker of salt, two thumb tips are needed. Place a tip on each thumb. A quantity of salt is in the tip on the left thumb. Presentation: 1. Place the silk over the left fist, at the same time stealing the left tip containing salt into the left palm, Figure. 433. 2. Form a well in the center of the silk at “X”, Figure 433. with the right thumb, leaving the tip therein, Figure 434. 3. Pour a quantity of salt into the well (tip). 4. Press the salt down with the right thumb, stealing the tip. 5. Pull silk away, showing the salt gone. 6. Pour salt from left fist (tip) to floor, Figure 435.

Silken Obedience *

F R A N C I S

67 B.

M A R T I N E A U .

Effect : One of four silks tied to a cane, Figure 436, and freely selected by a spectator, penetrates the cane and falls to the floor.

The Secret : A cane, four 15” silks, for small beads of colors matching the silks, some thread, 4 rubber bands, and 4 - ½” long common black pins are needed. Preparation : 1. Prepare the threads as shown in Figure 437. 2. Place a rubber band around the orange silk, Figure 438. 3. Fasten silk to cane as shown in Figures 439 and 440. 4. Finally tie a single knot in the center of the silk directly over the pin but not around the cone. 5. Repeat with the remaining three silks, assembled about 6” apart along the cane, Figure 441.

Note

how the threads pass thru the silks as they are added.

Presentation : 1. Take the cane in the left hand as shown in Figure 442, Note the position of the colored beads. 2. Have a color freely selected. 3. With the right hand pull the proper thread to release the selected silk as the left flips cane upwards. 4. As silk is released it flies into the air.

Silk Thru Cane *

F R A N C I S

68 B.

M A R T I N E A U.

Effect : A silk tied around a cane penetrates it. The Secret : A cane and metal “clamp” painted red to match a red 18” silk is needed. Presentation : 1. Drape the loosely rolled silk over the cane. 2. Then secretly clamp the gimmick on to the silk, Figure 443. 3. Now secretly toss end “A” over the cane, Figure 444, while holding end “B” and turning to the spectator.

4. 5. 6.

Hold cane through the silk while spectator ties a single knot under the cane with ends “A” and “B” of silk. Have spectator hold ends of cane tightly while you pull on ends “A” and “B” to tighten knot. Silk penetrates cane, Figure 445.

Cane Through Silk *

F R A N C I S

69 B.

M A R T I N E A U.

For variation, reserve the SILK THRU CANE penetration. Merely do No. 31, Mohammed Bays SILK PENETRATION, explained earlier in this chapter, using cone instead of a silk for penetration.

Pull Apart Silks **

70

I first saw this effect presented at an I.B.M. convention, and it appears in Tarbell’s COURSE IN MAGIC. Effect : Two silks looped together penetrate each other. Required : Two 18” silks, one red, one green. A borrowed hot. The Secret : Tie two diagonal corners of the green silk into a knot, Figure 446. Then reverse the silk, bringing the knot to the center, Figure 447. Now roll the silk to hide the knot, Figure 448.

Finally roll the red silk and place it beside the prepared green one. Presentation : 1. Pick up the red silk and tie it as shown in Figure 446. 2. Pass the green silk through the red, Figure 449, and tie a false knot, Volume 1, Chapter 10, Page 510, Fig 349. 3. Drop the two looped silks into a borrowed hat. 4. Reach inside and pull the fake knot of the green silk apart. 5. Unfold the green silk and take the real knot in the left hand, right opening the loop. 6. Take knot of red silk in right hand. 7. Display the two silks now separated.

The Magic Weg

C H A R L E S

71 W A L L E R .

Waller, in his FOR MAGICIAN’S ONLY, gave a new principle that has since been employed in several excellent penetration effects. Effect : A silk penetrates a cambric hank covering a glass tumbler, Figure 454. Required : A bottomless glass, a red cambric hank of mottled pattern, 2-12” green silks, and a very small rubber band such as used in orthodontia work and available at all dental supply houses. The Secret : Drape the hank over the left fist. Starting at one diagonal corner, force the green silk into the hank’s center, a bit at a time, accordion fashion, until the other diagonal corner is reached, Figure 450. Place the rubber band around the hank as illustrated, Figure 451. Presentation : 1. Show glass, then ball green silk and drop it into the glass, Figure 452. 2. Display cambric hank, then drop it over glass, Figure 453. 3. Balled silk falls thru bottom of glass and into left hand. 4. Holding mouth of glass to audience, twist hank, causing green silk to slowly penetrate into view. 5. Take away penetrating silk and pocket it with the palmed duplicate, Figure 454. 6. Remove hank and show glass empty.

Ball Penetration *

72 K A R L I N

Effect : A red ball penetrates a green silk. Required : An ordinary glass, two I” red rubber balls, a hairpin, an 18” green silk, small rubber band, and a piece of thin thread. The Secret : Force the hairpin thru a ball, Figure 455, then attach the ball to a corner of the silk with a thread, Figure. 456. Fasten the remaining ball in the center of the green silk with a rubber band, Figure 457, as in the original Waller effect, Figure 451. Presentation : 1. Holding ball in one hand and silk in other, Figure 458, drop ball into glass, then cover with the silk, Figure 459.

2. 3.

Cause the second ball to penetrate the silk as in No. 71, THE MAGIC WEB, Figure 460. Remove the silk from the glass, ball with thread remaining behind the silk, Figure 456.

Prisoner In the Silk *

J U L E S

73 G I R A U D

Effect : A borrowed ring placed in a box vanishes, penetrates a silk, and reappears in a sealed glass tumbler. Required : A Phantom tube, a bottomless glass, a duplicate unprepared glass, a jewelers ring box, a pull to vanish the box, a silk vanisher, two pieces of ribbon, two small rubber bands, a prepared and on ordinary 18” silk. The Secret : Cut a hole in the center of the silk large enough to permit the ring box to pass thru it. Then enclose a circle of elastic in a hem around the hole in the silk. The elastic, when un-stretched, should close the hole completely, Figure 461. Next make a pull to vanish the ring box, Figure 462. Preparation : 1. Place the pull around the waist, Figure 463. 2. Fasten the prepared silk around the unprepared glass by tying corers of the silk with a strip of ribbon, Figure 464.

3. 4. 5.

Note that the taut silk forces the hole in silk open. Place the rubber band (fastened to the pull) in the vest pocket along with the extra rubber band, Figure 465. Place unprepared silk, remaining ribbon, and ring box in bottom of bottomless glass. Assemble apparatus in the phantom tube, ( Volume 1, Chapter 7, Page 184) as shown in Figure 466.

Presentation : 1. Lift phantom tube and lay it on its side on a table as bottomless glass and contents are displayed. 2. Show bottomless glass, then drop it, mouth downwards, into the tube, Figure 467. 3. Sit the tube in this position (Figure 467) on the table. 4. Borrow a ring and place it in the ring box. 5. Remove the two rubber bands as one from the vest pocket, Figure 465. 6. Place both bands as one around the box, Figure 468. 7. Place box in left hand, then cover both with ordinary 18” silk. 8. Ask spectator to take box thru silk. As he reaches for it release box which flies under the coat, Show box gone. 9. Now introduce the piece of ribbon and vanish it and the silk. Use one of the methods given in Volume 1, Chapter 8, or use an Ideal Color Change or Palmo, Volume 2, Chapter 13. 10. While attention is called to phantom tube on table , steal ring box from pull into left hand. 11. Remove phantom tube, disclosing silk tied around glass. 12. Take tips of silk in right hand and set glass on left palm, palmed ring box going inside, Figure 469. 13. Have spectator untie ribbon, allowing silk to fall over palm, disclosing ring box in glass, Figure 470. 14. Have spectator take away glass, open box, and identify ring

Thimble Thru Silk * R A Y

74 M A C

Effect : A thimble penetrates a silk. Required : An 18” blue silk, two metal thimbles, and a small rubber band. The Secret : Hold the thimble hidden in the center of the silk (ala Waller) with a rubber band, Figure 471. Presentation : 1. Show the duplicate thimble on the tip of the right first finger. 2. Drape prepared silk over right hand, thumb palming first thimble, Figure 472. 3. Pull silk down around finger with left hand and thimble appears to penetrate , Figure. 473.

M A T H

Super Penetration *

G L E N G R A V A T T Effect : A silk in a tube penetrates a glass tumbler. Required : A presto Hank Vanisher (Vol. 1, Chapter 8, Page 339). Figure 474 : two red and a green 18” silk : an ordinary glass tumbler ; a prepared newspaper. The Secret : Place a red silk in the center of the newspaper page, Figure 475, then paste a piece of paper over the silk, Figure 476. Presentation : 1. Show the red and the green silks, then have the red silk selected, using the familiar ‘Spectators Choice’, page 652. 2. Drape the green silk over the left forearm. 3. Place the red silk in the cylinder (and the fake). 4. Catch hook in green silk, leaving fake, Figure 477. 5. Take green silk and fake and lay them aside. 6. Place (empty) cylinder in glass, Figure 478. 7. Wrap glass in newspaper so

75

8. 9.

duplicate silk is at bottom. Tear paper and pull down on silk, Figure 479. Show glass and cylinder empty.

‘SPECTATOR’S CHOICE’ – FORCE Let us say you have a green and a red silk and you wish to force the red one. Ask spectator to select a color. If he chooses red, thank him, and lay the green aside, using the red. If green is selected, say “that leaves the red” as you lay the green aside. In either case you use the red. The same force can be used with any number of silks. For example, red is to be forced from yellow, green, red and blue. Have a spectator name two colors , laying aside the two which do not include the red one. Now finish with the two as suggested above, ending with the desired red.

Adhesive Glass *

76 P E T E R

W A R L O C K

Effect : A silk penetrates a glass adhered to a newspaper. Required : A prepared transparent plastic glass, a fake hidden in a newspaper, and an 18” silk. The Secret : Obtain a clear plastic glass with a rolled lip at a five and ten cent store. Cement a circle of steel piano wire under the lip, Figure 480. Next, make the newspaper fake. On a piece of cardboard

cut as illustrated and slightly longer than the mouth of the glass, place two small horseshoe magnets, Figure 481. Fasten the two magnets in place with gummed paper tape, Figure 482. Place the fake inside of the folded paper, Figure 483 Presentation : 1. Show silk and place it in glass. 2. Place glass on left palm. 3. Take non – magnetic end of paper in right hand place hidden magnet along the edge of the mouth of glass. 4. Take away left hand, showing glass adhered to the paper, Figure 484. 5. Pull a corner of silk from glass, then cover mouth of glass with paper and fake, Figure 485. 6. Now pull silk gently from glass, Figure 486. Note : (If magnets are not strong, hem should be removed from side of silk that leaves glass last.)

Red Devil *

F R A N C I S

77 B.

M A R T I N E A U.

Effect : One of the two silks visibly penetrates a sealed glass. Required : An 18” red silk with 8” of black thread attached, Figure 487 ; an unprepared 18” green silk, a glass tumbler, a rubber band, and a white linen hank. Presentation : 1. Show unprepared glass. 2. Place red silk in glass, Figure 488. 3. Wedge green silk in mouth of glass. 4. Fasten linen hank over mouth of glass with rubber band, Figure 489. 5. Pull on thread to bring corner “A” of red silk down and under left thumb, Figure 490. 6. Break thread from corner of silk. 7. Invert glass, exposing silks contained therein, Figure 491. 8. Right hand assisting, move left hand to new position, Figure 492. 9. Take corner “A” in right hand and pull silk upwards and to the right, Figure 493. 10. Pass silk and still sealed tumbler for examination.

Hakne Silk Penetration

N E L S O N

76 H A H N E

Effect : A colored silk penetrates a borrowed linen hank. Required : An 18” red silk and an Ideal Color-Change. Tube , Fig. 2, Chapter 13. (First acquaint yourself with the handling of the tube gimmick as explained in Chapter 13.) Presentation : 1. Borrow a linen handkerchief and place it over the half closed left fist. 2. Make a well in the hank with the right first finger, then

3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

8.

load in the fake, Figure 494. Insert the red silk into the white hank (and fake) Fig. 495. As you tuck the last of the red silk in, steal away the fake into the right hand ( see Chapter 13, Effect No. 7). Insert the fake in the bottom of the left fist still covered with the white hank. Pull the red hank down into view, it having penetrated (?) the white hank, Figure 496. Steal the fake out of the left hand as you pull the white hank away, Figure 497. Show left hand empty and white hank unharmed.

Knot is Not a Knot *

L A R R Y

79 B E C K E R

In Chapter 20 I will give you a number of knot effects, but this one seems to fit better in this chapter.

Effect : A silk penetrates a rope, Figure 504. Required : A soft rope and an 18” or 24” silk. Presentation : 1. With two spectators holding the rope loosely, drop the silk off center over the middle of the rope, Figure 498. 2. Form a loose knot in the silk, Figures 499 and 500. 3. Pull the center “X” of the rope thru the loose knot, Figure. 501. 4. At the same time pull corner “A” of the silk above the loop, Figure 502. 5. Pull corners “A” and “B” of the silk, tightening the knot around the loop, Figure 503. 6. As the spectators tighten the rope by pulling, pull the knotted silk up and free of the rope, Figure 504.

Silk Thru Rope *

P R O F

80 J A C K

M I L L E R

Effect : A rope penetrates a silk. Required : A length of rope and an 18” or 24” silk. Presentation : 1. Spectator holding diagonal ends of the silk throughout the effect, take the rope in Figure 505 position. 2. Take “X” in the left and “Y” in the right, Figure 506. Then extend the hands, tying a bow knot, Figure 507. 3. Reach through the loops and pull “A” and “B” through, Figure 508. 4. Now pull on the ends of the rope until the bow is reduced to a small knot, Figure 509. 5. Drop ends of the rope, Figure 510. 6. Take the ends of the rope again, but bring end “B” up on the same side of the silk as “A”, Figure 511. 7. Pull sharply on the rape and it penetrates, Figure 512.

Uncanny Hankies *

81

G E O R G E

B L A K E

Effect : Four silks just tied to a tape untie while in a bag ; then they become tied in place again. Bag discarded, the silks visibly untie, one by one, at spectator’s command. Required : Twelve 12” silks (3 each, red, yellow, green and purple) ; three 1” x 27” tapes, one prepared as in Figure 513; and a changing bag. Preparation . Pull ends of pins out of slots. Wrap red silk around first pin and tape as in Figures 514-1516-17. Repeat with yellow silk. Green & purple silks are fastened as in Figures 518 & 519. Place prepared tape in change-bag ; then four silks and another tape. Turn handle of bag. Presentation ; 1. A spectator holds tape while you tie on a duplicate set of silks. 2. Show change-bag, place silks & tape inside. 3. Turn handle, remove separate silks & tape. 4. Turn handle, drop silks & tape in bag. 5. Turn handle, remove silks fastened to prepared tope, lay bag aside. Silks are magically tied (?) to the tape again. 6. Hold tape at its extreme ends, steel pins away from audience. 7. Have any spectator freely select a color, secretly pull the proper bead, and silk visibly unties itself. 8. Repeat with each of the remaining silks on the tape.

C o l o r

C h a n g e s

Introduction Most of the methods in this chapter are mechanical and their operation will be apparent if the illustrations are studied carefully.

Single Color Changing Silks *

1

T A R B E L L

Effect : A red silk changes to green then back to red again. Required : Two 18” silks… one red, one green. A 1” brass ring. The Secret : 1. Place the red silk on the green, then sew them together at their centers for about two inches, Figure 1. 2. Put the red corner “C” on “A-B”, Figure 2. 3. Lay green “F” on “H”, Figure 3. 4. Sew green silk a shown with a dotted line, Figure 4. ( Do not catch the red silk.) 5. Turn the silk bag inside out, Figure 5. 6. Sew red silk as shown with a dotted line, Figure 6. 7. Bring corners to their original positions, Figure 7. 8. Cut off about 1” of “C-D”, then sew the ring in place, Fig. 8. 9. Bring green corner “B” up through the ring, Figure 9. Preparation : 1. Show the red silk, Figure 10. 2. Take green tip “B” in the right hand and pull up, changing red silk to green, Figure 11. 3. To change the silk to red again, pull down on red tip “A’, Figure 12.

The Gumping Knot *

2 T A N N E N

Effect : A knot tied at the bottom of a silk jumps to the top. Required : An 18” Tarbell single color change silk made with TWO RED silks. Preparation : 1. Show the silk, then tie a small knot at “A”, Figure 14. 2. Now pull down on the ring with your right hand, exposing knot “B” near the top, Figure 15.

Change Thru Tube *

STEWART

JUDAH

Effect : A red silk passed through a paper cylinder becomes green. Required : A Tarbell single color change silk and a 6” square of green stiff paper. Presentation : 1. Hold red silk in left hand, Figure 16. 2. Place the ring near the bottom of the paper, Figure 17. 3. Roll the paper into a cylinder and place a rubber band at its center. 4. Reach into the bottom of the tube and pull the green corner “B” down, Figure 18. 5. Lift the tube with the right hand, leaving ring in left, Figure 10.

3

The Ever-Change Silk E.

D.

4 P R O U D L O C K

Effect : A silk changes to a different color time and time again. Required : Four Tarbell 12” single color changing silks as follows: red to green, green to orange, orange to blue, blue to green. Preparation : Arrange the prepared silks in your breast coat pocket so that nothing shows but a portion of the red (red to green) silk, Figure 19. Presentation : 1. Take red silks from pocket and display it without showing green tip, Figure 10. 2. Make color change, Figure 11, show green silk, then replace silk in pocket. 3. Under cover of the hands bring green (of green to orange) silk into view, Figure 20. 4. Later in program withdraw green (green to orange) silk and change it to orange, Figures 10 and 11. 5. To spectators the same silk has changed from red to green to orange. 6. Continue as explained, making changes from time to time, ending with blue to green. 7. To conclude, use the original red to green (now green), finishing with a red silk, just as you had when you started.

A Flashy Opening *

5 J.

B R O W N

Effect : A red silk held as shown in Figure 21 visibly changes to green, Figure 22. The Secret : Arrange a fish-line pull on your body, Figure 23. ( See Chapter 8, Volume 1.) Now prepare the red silk as in Figure 24. Finally, accordion pleat the green silk and place it inside of the red pocket, Figure 25. Fasten the snap in the small ring at “A” and with silk in the left hand, walk on to the stage. Presentation : 1. Hold silk as shown in Figure 21. 2. Shoot arms forward releasing red corners “A’ and “B”, holding green corner “C”. 3. Pull takes red silk up sleeve, leaving green silk in right hand, Figure 22. 4. Use green silk in next effect.

M.C. Color Change

6

This single color change has appeared under various names. Abbott titles it NEW COLOR CHANGE, Tarbell calls it the FLASH COLOR CHANGE. Effect: A white bordered red silk, Figure 26, changes to a white bordered green silk, Figure 27. The Secret : Merely sew the two silks shown in Figure 26 and 27 together along their four edges, making one silk, green on one side, red on the other. Presentation : 1. Drape the red silk over the left fist, Figure 28. 2. With first finger or right hand push center of silk into left fist, Figure 29. 3. Take green center at bottom of left fist and pull silk down, Figure 30. 4. Display the green silk, Figure 31.

Flash Color Change *

H A H N E

7 -

T A R B E L L

As a variation of No. 6, M.C. COLOR CHANGE, show a card with a hole, Figure 32, then the red silk, which when pulled thru the card, Figure 33, becomes green.

Double Color Change **

H O R A C E

8 G O L D I N

Effect : A green and yellow silk, Figure 42, changes to red and blue, Figure 43. The Secret : 1. Place a red silk on a green one, then fold them as shown in Figure 34. 2. Sew corners together at point “A’, Figure 34. 3. Tuck red silk well back inside of the green, then sew, Figure. 35. 4. Cut off corners “B”, Figure 35, then sew a 1” metal ring in place, Figure 36. 5. Now turn green silk bag inside out, Figure 37. 6. Tuck green bag well back inside of red silk, then sew, Figure 38. 7. Fasten corner of blue silk to red, Figure 39. 8. Turn red bag inside out and down over blue silk, Figure 40. 9. Fasten corner of yellow silk to green, Figure 41.

Presentation : 1. Show green and yellow silk, Figure 42. 2. Pull ring down with right hand as left holds blue tip, Figure 43.

Instantaneous Transposition * J U L I A NP

9 R O S K A U E R

Effect : Red and blue silks tied together, Figure 44, change places, Figure 45. The Secret : This is a variation of the Goldin double color change, but only three silks are used, two reds and one blue. Figure 46 gives the details of the construction. Presentation : 1. Show red silk tied to the blue, Figure 44. 2. Pass ring down, disclosing blue silk tied to red, Figure 45.

Drop Color Change

10

The effect is said to have originated in England. Effect : Two red silks tied together change to two green ones. Required : Two red one two green 18” silks, all with wide white borders. Preparation : Sew a red (Figure 26) and a green (Figure 27) silk together along their four edges, making one silk, red on one side, green on the other. Now fold the silk and sew along edge “A-B”, Figure 47. Next sew a corner of the green silk to the green bag at “A”, Figure 48. Turn the bag inside out and over single silk, exposing red part of bag. Finally, join the remaining red silk to the red silk bag at “A”, Figure 49. Presentation : 1. Show two red silks, Figure 49. 2. Holding corner “C”, Figure 49, shake silks sharply and bag falls, Figure 50, making the change to two greens.

Triple Color Change *

H A R O L D

11 R.

Effect : Three white silks change into three colored ones. Required: Six 18” silks-three white and one each in red, yellow and blue. A 1” brass ring. Preparation : 1. Place a white silk on the yellow one sew them together along “AB-C” to form a bag, cut off about 1½” of corners at “A”, then sew in the 1” ring, Figure. 51. 2. Now join the red and blue silks to the yellow bag at point “C”. 3. Turn the bag inside out, taking the colored silks inside, Figure 53. 4. Join the two white, silks to the white bag at “C”, Figure 54. Presentation : 1. Display the three white silks, Figure 55. 2. Bring the left hand to the right, taking the ring in the left hand as the right

R I C E

3.

holds the blue corner. Pass ring down over white silks with left hand, Figure 56, changing the silks to yellow, red and blue, Figure 57.

Triple Color Change *

H A R O L D

12 R.

R I C E

As a variation, instead of using white silks as in No. 11, change three colored silks, Figure 58, to three others, Figure 57.

Jri-Color Change *

H A R O L D

13 R.

R I C E

This is my version of an effect said to have originated in England. Effect : A red silk change to blue, then to green. Required : Three 18” silks (red, green, and blue) and 2-1” brass rings. The Secret : 1. Fold the three silks on their diagonals, Figure 59. 2. Place green edges “G-CC” inside of red edges “F-BB”, then sew thru all four thicknesses from “F to BB”, Figure. 60 3. Place green “H-BB” inside of blue “J-DD” and sew from “J to DD”, Figure 61. 4. Turn red silk inside out and back over green silk, Figure 62. (Note all three silks have one common point, “X.”)

5.

Cut off red and green corners “F” and sew in 1” Ring, Figure 63. 6. Reach thru ring and obtain corner “J”, Figure 64. 7. Cut off green-blue corners “J” and sew in second 1” ring, Figure 65. 8. Reach thru two rings and obtain corner “E”, Figure 66. 9. Catch the centers of all three silks at “Y” with thread, Figure 66. Presentation : 1. Show red silk, Figure 67. 2. Holding blue tip with left fingers, pass both rings down the silk with right, disclosing blue silk, Figure 68. 3. Bring silks to horizontal position, hold one ring in right hand as other passes a ring to the left, changing silk to green, Figure 69. 4. Silk can be changed back to red now if desired.

New Color Change *

P E R C Y

14 A B B O T T

Effect : A green silk, after shown on both sides, changes to red. The Secret : A red and a green white bordered silk, Figure 70, are sewed together on the diagonal, Figure 71. Presentation : Note : All illustrations are as performer sees them. 1. Display green silk, Figure 71, red side to spectator. 2. Add corners “A-B” to “C-D” as silk is given a quarter turn and is folded on the diagonal, Figure 72. Note position of right thumb. 3. Bring right hand upper most, dropping single green flap, Fig. 73.

4. 5. 6.

7.

Right hand assumes new position shown in Figure 74. Now fold “X” over behind “Y”, Figure 75. Right hand, still in Figure 74 position, releases green and red corners, thumb and first finger holding red as the silk is shaken sharply. Flaps drop, Figure 76, changing green silk to red, Figure 77.

Perfect Color Change

15 G O L D S T O N

This is an earlier version of Abbott’s NEW COLOR CHANGE. Effect : A red silk changes to blue. The Secret : A red and a blue silk, Figure 70, are sewed together where indicated in Figure 78. Preparation : Bring blue corner “D” up on “B”, Figure 79. Then fold “A” on “C’, Figure 80. Presentation : 1. Holding “B-D”, release “B” and shake silk. 2. “B” drops over “E”, changing silk from red to blue , Figure 81.

Color Changing Knot *

E R I C

16 C.

This effect has been adapted from an idea by Fred Culpitt. Effect : Dye a red band across one corner of a 36” white silk, Figure 82. The Secret : Dye a red band across one corner of a 36’’ white silk, Figure 82. Preparation : 1. Tie a single knot, in the red portion of the silk, Figure 83.

L E W I S

2. 3.

Tuck “X”, Figure 83, into the top of the knot, Figure 84. Wrap white silk around knot, then tie it in place with very weak thread, Figure 85. (Thread used is obtained by unraveling a length of regular thread, Figure 86.)

Presentation : 1. Display the silk, Figure 87. 2. Tie a slip knot in end “B”, Figure 88. 3. Appear to drop end “B”, but actually “A”, Figure 89. 4. Now snap silk sharply and threads will break, exposing red knot in “A”, Figure 90, and hidden slip knot in “B” will disinterqrate.

Vice-Versa Change *

A R T H U R M. P O P E Effect : A within silk changes to blue, a blue to white.

Required : An 18” whjte and an 18” blue silk. Presentation : 1. Display silks, Figure 91. 2. Take corner of white silk between first and second fingers of left hand and corner of blue between second and third fingers of right hand, Figure 92. 3. Bring corners of silk to crotch of first and second fingers of left hand, twisting the white corner to the left and the blue to the right, Figure 93. 4. Figure 94 shows silks from audience view. In actual performance right hand cloaks tips above left hand from view. 5. Pull silks up with right hand, Figure 95, then show left hand empty, Figure 96.

17

Berg’s Miracle Silks *

J O E

18 B E R G

Berg has given the performer three excellent effects employing the Arthur Pope principle. Required :

Two silks dyed as shown in Figure 97 are used in the next three effects.

Novel Color Change *

J O E

19 B E R G

Effect : Green and red silks pulled through the hand change color, Figure 95. Preparation : Tie the two silks together at their special corners with a knot. Presentation : 1. Display the knotted silks. 2. Holding the silks in the right hand, Figure 98, untie the knot, but leave the ends crossed, Figure 99. 3. Close the fist around the silks, Figure 100. 4. Taking the corners in the left hand, pull the silks up through the right hand, Figure 101.

Sucker’s Waterloo *

J O E

20 B E R G

Effect : A red silk ( which performer tries to vanish and which spectators discover in his pocket) changes to green. Required : A red tipped green silk, Figure 97, a red silk, and a vanisher are needed. Preparation : Roll the special silk, Figure 102, and place it in the right rouser pocket, Figure 103, red tip exposed. Attach pull, Vol 1, Chapter 8, Page 299, then place it in vest pocker Figure 103.

Presentation : 1. Secretly obtain pull in right hand as left displays red silk. 2. Push silk into right fist (and pull) 3. Release pull, right hand going to right trouser pocket, giving “method of vanish’ away to spectators as they discover the exposed red tip. 4. Take red tipped green silk into right hand, Figure. 104, all but tip hidden. 5. Now change silk to green, Figure 105.

Two Silk Monte *

21 J O E

B E R G

Effect : Spectators are unable to correctly name the colors of two silks placed in two match boxes. Required : In addition to the two special silks, Figure 97, two penny match boxes are needed. Presentation : 1. Place a portion of a silk in each box, special tips

2. 3. 4. 5.

6.

first, Figure 106, without exposing the tips. Display the boxes, place rest of silk in their boxes, then close the boxes. Shuffle the boxes so that the colors of the contents are not known. Open the boxes from their opposite ends, exposing the fake tips, Figure 107. Close boxes, then shuffle the boxes again, this time making it easy for the spectators to follow. Ask a spectator to identify the box containing the red silk. Then open the selected box at the original end and withdraw the green silk, Figure 108.

Ervin Color Change Silk

D R. E R V I N

22

Russ Walsh called this ‘oldie’ to my attention. Effect : Performer, after failing to vanish a white silk, changes it to red. Required : An 18” red and an 18” white silk, and a white and a red corner. The Secret : Place white corner “B” on a corner “A” of the red silk, Figure 109. Sew bottom of “B” to red silk at “X-X”, Figure 110. Place red corner “C” on white “B”, Figure 111. Finally sew “C” to red “A”, starting at “Y” and finishing at “Z”, Figure 112. Preparation : Accordion pleat corners “M” and “N” to center of red silk, Figure 113. Now pleat end “P” up to pocket “C’, Figure 114. Finally bring corners “A” and “C” down around pleated silk, exposing white “B”, Figure 115. Place prepared silk in upper corner “Y” of right trouser pocket, Figure 116. Presentation: 1. Pull out right trouser pocket, then show it empty. 2. Replace pocket, forcing hidden silk to the bottom at “X”, Figure 116. 3. Display white silk. 4. Pretend to vanish it by rolling it between the palms, Volume 1, Chapter 8, Page 291. 5. In an obvious manner, reach into your right pocket with right hand containing palmed silk. 6. Leave silk in corner “Y”, Figure 116, withdraw hand, and show both hands empty.

7. 8. 9.

10.

Spectators cry “silk is in right pocket”. Take prepared silk in right hand but with white tip showing, Figure 104. Admit you couldn’t vanish silk, then change its color by pushing white tip down into silk pocket, forcing pleated red silk through bottom of hand and into view. Display red silk, Figure 118, left thumb and first finger pinching “A-B-C” together.

Ervin Variation

23 D R.

E R V I N

In doing No. 22 Ervin suggests keeping the rolled silk in the left hand as the (empty) right goes into the right trouser pocket. Now turn to the left, and while spectators are watching the right hand, deposit the rolled white silk in the coat breast pocket.

Laundry Mystery *

L A R S E N

24 A N D

Effect : A black silk changes to white ; water changes to ink. The Secret : A mirror glass (Volume 1, Chapter 8, Page 325.) with a prepared insert, Figure 119-A, is required. In addition, an ink pellet, a white and a black silk, and a cover for the glass are needed. Preparation: Place pellet in “A”, and white silk in “B”, Figure 119A. Place the cover, and the glass containing the insert, on the table, Figure 119-B. Presentation : 1. Shown the glass, then cover it with the cylinder. 2. Pour water into section “A”, Figure 119-B.

W R I G H T

3. 4. 5.

Place the black silk in section “C”, Figure 119-8.. Produce the dry white silk. Remove the cover and show the water now black as ink.

Instantaneous Color-Change Silk V E R R A L L

Effect : A green silk changes instantaneously to red, Figure 122 The Secret : A prepared green silk, Figure 120, and a “Flash Ball” (Volume 1, Chapter 8, Page 312) are needed in addition to an ordinary red silk. Preparation : With a dowel stick tuck the red silk inside of the pocket in the green silk, leaving a corner protruding through ring “B”. Attach corner “A” to the hook in the flash ball. Place silk and ball on the table, Figure 121. Presentation : 1. Pick up silk as in Figure 122 2. Press spring release on ball, green silk going inside, leaving red silk, Figure 123.

25 W A S S

Symsilk *

26 R O B E R T

H A R B I N

Effect : A breast pocket silk repeatedly changes color, Figure 132. The Secret : An ingenious fake is employed, Figure 124. Glue two grooved strips to the sides of a thin wooden panel, Figure 125. Two right angle brass uprights which accommodate a threaded rod, Figure 126, are screwed to the top of the frame, Figure 127. A second rod is securely fastened through the lower ends of the uprights, Figure 127. Next make an endless band of black satin that will fit tightly around the fake. With satin in place, sew a wire arm, Figure 128, to the satin, Figure 129. Now screw a brass plate, Figure 130, to the bottom of the frame. Tie one end of a length of black silk fishing line to the center of wire arm, then pass the card, through the hold in the bottom plate, Figure 131. Finally sew 5 different colored pieces of silk at regular intervals on the satin band, Figure 124. Preparation : Place the fake in the coat breast pocket, Figure 132, wire arm near top and the back of the fake, Figure 129, then pass the cord through a small hole in the bottom of the pocket, and through the holes in two safety pins or rings fastened to the vest at the back, Figure 133. Presentation : Call attention to the color of silk at top of fake, Figure 132, pull on cord at back of coat, and next color pops up into view. Repeat four times, causing five color changes. At conclusion fake is in position shown in Figure 124.

Note : (Top top rod, Figure 127 is removed before the endless satin belt is put into place. The rod when replaced, makes the satin band very taut.)

Meet the Missus *

H A R O L D

27 R.

R I C E

This is the American version of the English “Mr. And Mrs. Green.” Effects : A colorful story wherein Miss white marries Mr. Green; and a few years later we find five “little greens’ between them. The Secret : This self contained effect is constructed as shown in Figure 134. In addition, an 18” white silk is needed. Preparation : Turn bag inside out, attached silk going inside, Figure 135. Roll “little greens” and tuck them under the brass ring, Figure 136. Presentation : 1. Display Mr. Green and Miss White, Figure 137. 2. The preacher (magician) “joins them”..tie knot, Figure 138. 3. Pass ring down with left hand, Figure 139, “Miss White” becomes Mrs. Green. 4. Add corner “C” to ring in left hand, Figure 140.

5.

Take end of ribbon and “C” in right hand and spread arms, displaying silks and “little greens”, Figure 141.

Gamblers Silks *

J U L I A N

28 S.

B U S H

Effect : Three silks are dropped into a paper cone, then two silks are removed. The spectator who thinks he has discovered the third silk is “stung”! The Secret : In addition to the prepared silks, Figure 142, a special “stung” silk, Figure 143, and a sheet of stiff paper, Figure 144, are needed. Preparation : Fold part one of paper, Figure 144, over on two, Figure 145. Fold “stung” silk and place it on paper at “X”, then complete the fold, Figure 146 and 147. Put rubber band in place, Figure 148.

Presentation : 1. Display silks, Figure 149. 2. Drop silks into cone, “C” going in last, Figure 150. 3. Tear off tip “A” of cone, and pull silks through hole, Figure 151. 4. Lay aside two silks and “bet” no one can tell you the red silk has gone. As silk is believed to still be in cone, tear it at its center, exposing red “stung”, Figure 152. 5. Display “stung” silk.

Color Changing Jie * M R S.

V A L

H.

S E E W A L D

Effect : Performer changes his necktie from red to green. The Secret : The secret is in the rather complicated construction of the tie. Preparation: 1. Press a piece of red silk (cut to correct shape) into a tie, Figure 153. 2. Form a green bag, studying Figure 154 carefully. 3. Place red tie, Figure 153, upside down and inside of the green bag, Figure 154, red tip “E” thru opening, Figure 155. 4. As shown in Figure 155, sew four edges “A-B-C-D” together; sew oval (not round) ring in bottom end; catch back of red silk to green bag at four points indicated with black dots in illustration. 5. Push red tip “E” down inside of its own tie and out thru oval ring opening, Figure 156. 6. Now place green bag on a piece of green silk cut like a tie, top being flat and tip formed into a trianglar pocket, Figure 157.

29

7. 8.

9. 10. 11.

Catch red-green color change to green silk at “X”, Figure 158. Now fold green silk of Figure 157 around green bag (red – green color change), then sew green silk from “A” to “B”, Figure 159. Catch green tie to color change bag (not red tie inside of it) at points marked “X”, Figure 159. Pull ring up to top of tie, changing tie from green to red, Figure 160. Put tie in place, tying ribbons around neck.

Presentation : 1. Call attention to red tie. 2. Pass ring down, changing tie from red to green.

COLOR CHANGING SILKS Introduction

1

In this chapter I will deal primarily with gimmicks usually concealed in the hands larger fakes will be discussed in Chapter 14. I will treat the better known fakes first, then conclude with variations and lesser known gimmicks.

Color-Change Handkerchief Tube

2

David Devant was one of the first to use a metal tube with a cloth tape at its center, Figure 1. However, the early model was too large to be concealed in the hand. A paper cylinder was usually employed with the tube.

Ideal Color Change Tube L.

L.

3 I R E L A N D

The ‘miniature’ version of Devant’s tube, Figure 2, has been made popular by L.L. Ireland and is generally referred to as the IDEAL color change tube.

Simplex

4 H A R O L D

R.

R I C E

My SIMPLEX, Figure 3, does not employ the usual tape, and its diameter is smaller. The tube, fitting the end of a finger, figure 4, is manipulated like a finger tip instead of with thumb and finger as used in IDEAL tube steals, Figure 5.

Color-Change Handkerchief Ball

5

Professor Hoffmann gives an interesting and detailed history of what we no know as the HANDKERCHIEF BALL, Figure 6. John Hamley is credited with its invention.

P a l m o

6 H A R O L D

R.

R I C E

Increasing in popularity is my PALMO, Figure 7. Rather than being round, Figure 5, as suggested by Hamley, this fake is oval in shape. As the gimmick tapers sharply

near the openings, the end of the finger stealing the fake during the routine, Figure 8, need not bend as far as it must when the traditional round ball is used.

Ideal and Simple Manipulations

7

All four of the gimmicks just described (Figure 1 to 8) are handled in a similar manner. Before giving you several famous routines, let us study some basic sleights that should be mastered. First we will work with the ‘tube’ manipulations. Producing The First Silk : 1. Place red silk in tube, then wrap green around it, Figure 9. 2. Get the tube in position, Figure 10. 3. Exposing right palm but with tube hidden, show left palm, Figure 11, then back of left hand, Figure 12. 4. Close left fist around tube and withdraw the right finger, leaving tube in the fist, Figure 13. 5. Now steal the tube, leaving the green silk in the left fist, Figure 14, then assume Figure 10 position with the right hand. 6. Bring the hands together, reaching into the closed left fist with the right thumb and first finger, and obtain corner “A (Figure 9) of the green silk. 7. Separate both hands and the green silk appears between them, Figure 15.

The Color Change : 8. Drop the corner of the silk held in the left hand, Figure 15. 9. Pull the silk up thru the left hand several times, Figures 16 and 17. 10. The third time step 9 is executed, lay the tube in

13. 14.

15.

in the left hand, Figure 18. Now push the green silk into the tube, Figure 19, withdrawing the red silk from the tube. As the last of the red silk is withdrawn, clip its end against the palm, Figure 20. Now steal the tube, Figure 14, then assume Figure 10. With the right hand ; Figure 21 with the left.

Disposal of the Gimmick : 11. Prepared to stroke red silk, Figure 21, with right hand. 12. As you take silk at “X”, Figure 21, extend right finger leaving tube in left sleeve, Figure 22. Run right hand down to center of silk, then carry silk away in the

16. 17.

18.

right hand as left is shown empty. Display the silk, Figure 23. Taking silk in left hand, lower left arm allowing tube to fall from sleeve into silk, Figure 24. Pocket silk and tube.

Hank Ball and Palmo Manipulations

8

The ‘ball’ gimmicks are manipulated in a manner similar to the tube fakes. To load the ball, place it over the center of the silk, Figure 25, then tuck in the ends. The Color-Change : 2. With the ball on the second finger of the right hand, show the hands empty, using the moves shown in Figures 10-13. 1.

Some may, prefer the change over-palm’. Have the ball in the right hand, Figure 26. Now turn the body to the right as the ball is passed into the left hand by running one palm over the other, rolling the ball at the same time, Figure 27. Books on billiard ball routines give more detailed information.

3.

With loaded ball now in the left hand, do the color change, Figures 19- 24.

Novak Steal * : Bob Novak has favored me with photos of how he steals my PALMO ball at the conclusion of the routine. 1. 2. 3.

4.

The green silk is almost entirely in the ball and the read almost out, Figure 28. The balance of the red silk is secretly pulled from the ball and layed along its outside, Figure 29. The right second finger pushes the lost of the green silk into the ball, Figure 30. Then, instead of lifting the ball out of the left hand, merely bend the right finger into the right palm, Figure 31, carrying the ball away with it, Figure 32.

5.

Finally withdraw the right finger from the ball and open the right hand into a natural position, Figure 33.

Another Finish : Place an extra silk in the bottom of the breast pocket, Figure 34. With silk in position shown in Figure 35, pull the silk over the left palm, starting at point “X”, and continuing until corner “A” is reached. At the same time approach the pocket, Figure 34. Just as tip “A” crosses the left palm, extend the right finger and drop the ball into the breast pocket, back of right hand masking the move.

Third Finger Steal : I have suggested using the second finger in the steals explained thus for as this is the finger most performers employ. However , one professional uses his third finger. Some readers may prefer the third finger steal. Bottom of Hand Color Change : Most performers tuck the silk into the top of the fist and bring the second silk (different color) out of the bottom. Try just the reverse ! Note that at the finish you steal the ball from the bottom of the fist instead of the top.

Judah Surprise *

S T E W A R T

9 J U D A H

Stewart Judah showed me a most spectacular finish for my PALMO routine. As the last of the green silk, Figure 28, goes into the ball, the red corner ‘pops-up’ to replace the green, Figure 36. The hand is immediately shown to hold nothing but a red silk. The Secret : 1. Using PALMO instead of a tube, do the moves shown in Figures 10-19. 2. Continue the change until silks are in the position shown in Figure 28. At this point about 1” of the red silk still remains in the ball. 3. Next take red silk at a

4.

5.

point about 2” below the left fist and lay this along the outside of the PALMO ball, Figure 37. Now steal the ball, lifting it up and away. Figure 38. As ball comes up thru the left hand and into the right, the remaining 1” of red silk in the ball appears at the top of the left fist, Figure 36. A startling finish !

Flash “Color-Change”

10 Effect : To convince the audience that the silk actually changes color, performer finishes his routine with the silk half dyed ! The Secret : A fake, Figure 39, attributed to Lloyd, is loaded with a special red silk with a green corner, Figure 40. The center of the red silk is placed in the fake and the green tip is forced under the clip, Figure 41. In addition to the fake and prepared silk, a solid green silk is needed. Presentation : The presentation is the same as that used in the standard color change. However, at the point where about all of the green silk is in the top of the fake and all of the special red is out,

Figure 28, push the rest of the green corner into the fake, and at the same time steal the fake, Figure 38. This leaves the performer with the silk as shown in Figure 42. Now explain that the silk is only “half dyed’. To prove it, withdraw the silk; and display it.

Note : By using Stewart Judah’s JUDAH SURPRISE (Effect No. 9), my PALMO BALL, and the special silk, Figure 40,the some effect can be accomplished.

‘Clean-Cut” Color Change *

11

T A R B E L L

This is Tarbell’s modern version of a Fu Manchu favorite. A red silk changes to green. Required : A red and a green 12” silk; and a “clean-cut “gimmick, Figure 43. Preparation : Place the green silk in the bottom of the fake, Figure 44. Now place the fake under the red silk which rests on the table, Figure 45. Presentation : 1. Pick up fake and red silk, Figure 46. 2. Transfer both to the right hand, loop falling over thumb, Figure 47.

3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

10.

Assume new position shown in Figure 48, then grip fake as in Figure 49. (Silk is not included in illustration) Open silk and display it, Figure 50. Release corner held in the right hand. Take center of the silk in the right hand, Figure 51. Release the corner held in the left hand, assuming Figure 48 position again. Raise fingers, getting Figure 47 position. Bring the left hand between the silk and fake, Figure 52. Start forcing the red silk into the fake, Figure 53, forcing the green silk silk from the fake into the left palm.

11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16.

Continue until all of the red silk is in the fake, Figure 54. Now lift the fake from the left fist, Figure 55. Move hands apart, Figure 56. Open left hand and show the green silk, Figure 57, then display it at full length, Figure 58. Transfer the silk to the right hand, Figure 47. Finally place the silk and fake in your pocket.

Hand ‘Ultra” Color Change *

12

It is interesting to trace the development of this mechanical fake designed to change the color of a silk, i.e., red to green. 1.

Haffmann, in LATER MAGIC, gives credit to the Hamley Brothers for inventing the fake shown in Figure 59. A red silk is placed in Compartment “A”. To perform, palm the fake, then show a green silk.

Engage a corner of the green silk on the pin “X”. Take tip “B” of the red silk and end “Y” of thread together and pull down, Figure 60. The green silk is wound around the spindle as the red silk is pulled down into view.

2.

3.

REGOW’S MAGIC STUDIO currently manufactures a version known as Nu - Kwik Kolor Change, Figure 61, and credited to Leo J. Demski. Here a corner of each silk is stuck to a gummy tape instead of being fastened to a needle point.

Jean Hugard, in his 1938 Magic Annual, * describes an ingeneous gimmick, Figure 62. The fake is clipped to the hand as in Figure 63. A green silk whose corner if fastened to the pin “X” is wrapped around half of the

spindle as a red silk (previously wrapped around the other half of the spindle) is pulled down into view, Figure 64.

4.

A fake marketed for many years by Petrie-Lewis, Figure 65, is described by Louis Nikola in MAGICAL MASTERPIECES. Figure 66 shows details of the gimmick; Figure 67 gives the gimmick in operation, performer’s view.

Preparation : To get first silk inside fake, engage a corner in wire loop soldered to “B”. Now turn spindle with key at end “A” of spindle. Key winds silk inside of fake.

New Vanishing Color Changer *

13

Here is a pull with a second hole near the bottom, Figure 68. Place a red silk in the pull, then attach it to the body as shown on page 299, Chapter 8, of Volume 1. Place a green silk over the fake. To perform, obtain the fake in the right hand and the green silk in the left. Tuck the green silk into the tap of the fake and pull the red out of the bottom, Figure 69. Finally release the pull as the red silk is displayed.

Di-Jt**

14 J E S S E

Effect : A red silk, placed in a tube, changes to green. The Secret : In addition to a red and a green 12” silk, the tube and fake shown in Figure 70 are needed

T H O R N T O N

Preparation : 1. Place a green silk in the fake and a red in the tube, Figure 71. Now put the fake in the tube, Figure 72. Presentation : 1. Take the tube in right hand, then transfer it to the left, clip going between the first and second fingers, Figure 73. 2. Take the red silk at “B” and pull the silk down and out of the tube. 3. Lift the tube with the right hand, leaving the fake in the left, Figure 74. 4. Show the empty tube to the audience. 5. Lower the tube into the left hand and over the fake. 6. Tuck the red silk up into the bottom of the tube and the fake, forcing part of the green silk up thru the top. 7. Force all of the red silk into the fake. 8. Pinching green silk against the tube, lift the tube with the right hand, Figure 75, leaving the fake containing the red silk in the left hand. 9. Holding tube in the right hand, remove the green silk with the left, then pocket the silk and the fake.

Double Color Change *

15

Here is the first of several gimmicks that are handled much like the better known ones. A metal tube is divided vertically, Figure 76. A green silk (loaded into compartment “A” before performing) is pulled into view as a red is tucked into compartment “B”.

New Handkerchief Gimmick ** L.

L.

I R E L A N D

The second fake is an all purpose gimmick, Figure 77,which can be used for other effects as well as the now familiar color change.

16

Tube To Cigarettes *

G L E N N

17 G.

G R A V A T T

Not all fakes need to be secretly disposed of after the color change. For instance, a square tube, Figure 78, with a stiffened front and side of a cigarette package, Figure 79, attached, Figure 80, becomes a pack of cigarettes at the finisl, Figure 71.

Subtle Color Change **

H A R O L D

18 R.

R I C E

There are several methods of changing the color of a silk without the aid of a hidden gimmick. I have had considerable success with this method. First, roll a green silk, Finger Fold, Chapter 3, Page 40, Volume 1. Presentation : 1. Palm rolled green silk in left hand as red is displayed,

1. 2.

3.

4.

5.

Figure 82. Take red silk in Right hand, then drape center of silk over closed left fist, Figure 83. Alternating with first and second fingers of the right hand, push the red silk down into the close left fist and on top of the palmed green silk. During this ‘pocking’ action keep rotating the red silk so it form s a ball. Masking the front of the left hand with the right, open the top two fingers of the left fist momentarily while the second finger of the right forces the balled red silk into the right hand, Figure 84. Continue as though forcing the red silk deeper into the left fist. Now pull the green silk into view from the bottom of the left fist, Figure 85.

Snappy Color Change *

M I L B O U R N E

19 C H R I S T O P H E R

Effect : After producing a red silk the performer changes it to green. Required : A red and a green 18” silk, and a magicians wand. Preparation : Wrap the red, then the green silk around the end of the wand, Figure 86. Presentation : 1. Take the wand in the right hand, Figure 87. 2. Pass the end of the wand over empty left palm, Figure 88. 3. Bring the hands together, Figure 89, then transfer the wand and silks to the left hand, Figure 90. 4. Now use the wand to show the right hand empty (as was done with the left, Figure 88). 5. Now take the wand in the right hand, drawing off the red silk into the left, Figure 91. 6. Place the wand under the

7.

8.

9. 10. 11.

12. 13.

14. 15.

left armpit, Figure 92. Taking a corner of the silk between the left thumb and first finger, produce the red silk, Figure 93. Roll the silk into a ball between the two palms, retaining the silk in the left hand. Make a ‘magical pass’ over the left with the right hand. However, when the left is opened, the silk is still there. Repeat the roll, but this time keep the rolled silk palmed in the right hand although spectators believe the silk to be in the left (For details, see Page 291, Chapter 8, of Volume 1.) Now reach for the wand with the right hand, Figure 94. Here is the important move ! As the wand is brought out, the green silk on its end is automatically pulled into the left hand which supposedly holds a red silk, Figure 95. Tap the left hand with the wand. Finally, open the left hand and disclose the green silk !

Variation : Another method of getting the silk from the wand into the left hand is shown in Figures 96, 97 and 98.

Semantic Silks *

A L B E R T

20 B.

G RI G G S

Here is an example of what can be done with a large Handkerchief Ball, Figure 5. Effect : A white silk becomes red; then yellow ; red ; blue; and finally, white again. Required : Four 12” silks and a 1½” Hank Ball with catgut loop, Figure 99. Preparation : Fold the red silk HANK BALL FOLD, Figures 63-69, Page 43, Chapter 3, Volume 1. Starting at one corner and ending at the other, push the silk into the ball. Fold and add the yellow and blue silks in a like manner. Place the loaded ball on a table where it is covered with a white silk.

Presentation : 1. Take silk and ball in right hand, Figure 100. 2. Transfer silk and ball to left hand, Figure 101. 3. Tuck white silk into palm and behind ball as the red silk is pulled into view, Figure 102. 4. Now steal the ball as follows ; You are in Figure 102 position. As you come up with the right hand to tuck in the last of the white silk, insert the right thumb into the loop, Figure 103. Transfer the ball to the right hand as the white silk is pushed into the left fist, Figure 104. 5. With right thumb extended, stroke red silk, starting directly under the left fist and continuing down to the center of the red silk, Figure 105. 6. Taking the red silk in the right hand, show the white in the palm of the left, Figure 106.

7.

8. 9. 10.

11. 12. 13.

14. 15. 16. 17.

18.

Explain that to do this trick you need two silks and that you will demonstrate how it is done. Lay white silk aside momentarily. Take a corner of the red silk in the left fist, Figure 105, then bring silk and ball into the left fist, Figure 107. Start to tuck white silk down into top of the left fist.. actually into the ball. Pull down part of the yellow silk from the ball as the white is pushed into the top. Pretend not to see the white is changing to yellow not red. Continue until all of the white is gone and all of the yellow is in view. Withdraw the yellow silk and say ..” Now I am confused!” With the red silk and ball still palmed, Figure 107, tuck yellow silk into left fist and ball. As yellow goes in, pull part of the red down into view. Now steal ball, Figures 103-105. Yellow silk has vanished and you have but a red, Figure 108. Explain that a magician does not always use two silks. While pattering, transfer red silk and ball, Figure 100, from right hand to left, Figure 101. Push red silk into tap of ball, withdraw the blue, then repeat Figures 103-106.

19.

Conclude by explaining if everyone will say ‘white’ the blue silk will return to its original white. 20. Repeat steps 17 and 18, ending with the original white silk (taken from the ball.)

Suggestive Color-Change * M A R K

21 J A C O B S

Effect : Performer demonstrates that, through the power of suggestion, he can convince spectators a white silk changes to red. Required : A 12” white silk and a large thumb tip with a corner of a red silk glued in place, Figure 109. Preparation: With red corner inside of the thumb tip, place the tip under a white silk on a table. Presentation : 1. 2. 3.

4.

Get tip on right thumb as you pick up the white silk in the right hand. Show the silk and hands freely. Push white silk into the left fist, then leave the thumb tip at top of fist, Figure 110. Explain that although the silk is white, mass hypnotism will cause spectators to believe the silk

5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.

is red. Pull red corner into view, Figure 111. Spectators see white (?) corner as red. Tuck red corner back into lip, then steal tip on right thumb. Reach up into bottom of left fist with right thumb and first finger and leave the tip therein. Pull the red corner into view, Figure 112. Repeat step 6 above. Close by pulling the white silk from the left fist and showing both hands freely. Oh yes ! Don’t forget to release your spectators from the hypnotic spell !

Transposition Color Change *

22

Effect: Red and green silks held by spectators either change color or change places. Required: Ideal color change tube Figure 2; 1-12” red and 2-12” green silks; 3-½’ gummed disks; 4 paper clips ; 2 pieces of paper 4” x 6”.

Preparation : Print your initials on a disc, then attach disc to a corner of a green silk. Place the silk in the color change tube. Put the tube and 2 paper clips in the right coat pocket. Place duplicate green silk, paper squares, 2 paper clips, 2 labels, and a pencil on a table. Presentation : 1. Produce the red silk, Chapter 4, Volume 1, Encyclopedia of Silk Magic. 2. Have spectator initial disk, then fasten it to a corner of the red silk. 3. Place prepared red silk in right coat pocket, part of silk remaining in view. 4. Roll a paper into a cylinder. Close one end with a paper clip. Hold cylinder in left hand. 5. Go to pocket and get red silk (and loaded tube). 6. In draping silk over top of cylinder, allow tube to drop (tape end up) into cylinder, Figure 113 and114. 7. Show red silk again, having spectator identify his initials. 8. Push red silk into cylinder and tube, forcing green silk into bottom of cylinder. 9. Steal tube containing red silk, Figure 115.

10. 11. 12. 13. 14.

Go to right pocket for paper clip and leave tube behind. Close top of cylinder with paper clip. Place cylinder in spectator’s breast pocket. Show green silk. Place your own initials on a label, then fasten it to a corner of the green silk. 15. Place silk in right coat pocket, part of silk still in view. 16. Form paper into cylinder and close bottom with paper clip. 17. Get green silk (and tube) from pocket. 18. Repeat steps 6 thru 11 explained above. 19. Give this closed cylinder to a second spectator. 20. Now spectators open cylinders. Second spectator finds first spectator’s initialed silk in his cylinder, and first finds performer’s in his ! Did the silks change places or color ?

Traveling Knot *

23 I R E L A N D

Although not a color change, this effect uses a color change tube and makes use of some basic moves of value to the reader. Effect : A knot is tied in a blue silk held by performer travels to a red silk held by a spectator. Required: Two 18” red, one 18” blue silk; an ideal color change tube, Figure 2. Preparation : Tie a single knot in the center of a red silk, then place the silk in the tube, Figure 116. By holding the tube in position

shown in Figure 117, the hand can be shown empty from almost any angle. For example, note in Figure 125 a tube could be hidden by the thumb, Figure 126.

1. 2. 3. 4.

5.

Hold both silks (red and blue) to a spectator white tube is palmed into Figure 123 position. Take red silk in Figure 117 position as part of blue silk is placed in your pocket, Figure 127. Performer then tucks the red silk into his left fist. To do so, bring the second finger up under tip of silk, Figure 118,then insert finger into end of tube through silk. Now place tip of silk (and tube) in left fist, Figure 119. Push part of red silk into the tube, forcing the knotted silk into the left fist, Figure 120.

6. 7. 8.

9.

10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18.

Work the knotted silk to one side of the tube, Figure 121, with the left third and fourth fingers. Finally push the rest of the red silk into the left fist and tube. Now to steal the tube. Insert 3rd finger of right hand into end of tube, Figure 122, then bend finger to bring tube up into right palm, Figure 123. Move to new position, Figure 124, and push finger into closed left fist as though forcing all of red silk well into left hand. Steps 5 thru 10 should require but a few seconds. Open right hand, holding knotted silk crumpled Figure 125. Spectators believe this to still be the first red silk. Place crumpled silk in spectators hand and ask him to close his fist around it. Remove blue silk from your pocket, Figure 126, leaving tube behind. Tie a “vanishing knot” in the blue silk, Figures 128-131. Ask the spectator to blow on the blue knot. As he does, pull on the ends of the silk, Figure 131, and the knot will dissolve. Ask spectator to open his hand and display his red silk. The vanished knot is in the spectator’s red silk.

Note : To tie the false knot, the part of the silk between the 2nd. and 3rd fingers is retained, Figure 130, and partly drawn through the loop as the loop slips off the finger, forming the knot shown in Figure 131.

The Dyeing Silks *

B E R T

24 D O U G L A S

Effect : Performer explains he used to make his lying dyeing silks to match milady’s costumes but gave it up. He then explains why. The Secret: Three color changing tubes and 5-12” silks are needed. Preparation : Load tube No. 1 with a green silk and tube No. 2 with a yellow silk. Tube No. 3 is empty. On a table place the tubes, each covered with a white silk. Presentation: 1. Pick up white silk and Tube No. 1, Figure 132. 2. Push part of white silk into tube, Figure 133. 3. Pull part of the green silk into view, Figure 134. 4. Continue until all of the white is in the tube and most of the green in view. 5. Steal tube, Figure 135. 6. Casually draw back the left sleeve and secretly drop tube in breast coat pocket, Figure 136. 7. Withdraw the green silk from left hand and display silk as both hands are seen to be empty. 8. Explain that this is how you matched a lady’s green dress. 9. Place green silk on table and take a second white silk and tube, Figure 132. 10. Repeat steps 2 to 8, showing a yellow silk to match a yellow dress.

11. 12.

13.

Place yellow silk on table and take the third white silk and tube. (Figure 132). Proceed as if repeating the color change but actually do a vanish, pushing white silk into tube, then stealing tube and dropping it in the breast pocket. Now for the climax. Say “And now why I quit my magic dyeing. The last lady who asked me to match her costume was a … NUDIST !”Open your hands and show the white silk has vanished.

Perfect Color Change *

25

M A Y E T T E

Bill Chaudet, Blackstone’s successor, brought this color change variation from France. The Ideal Color Change tube is loaded with an accordion pleated silk, Page 38, Chapter 3 Volume 1. Instead of pulling out part of the green silk as part of the red is pushed into the tube, Figure 134, the green silk is retained tightly compressed in the hand until all of the red silks is in the tube. Figure 137. Now slap the back of the left hand and release the green silk, a part of which will spring into view, Figure 138. Finally, steal the tube and the other diagonal end of the silk flies into view, Figure 139.

Aee To Silk *

26 K E N

D E

C O U R C Y

Effect : A blank silk changes to a card silk as the card becomes blank. Required: A blank card painted with “pip solution “ (sold by dealers as “IT’S A PIP”) to resemble at Ace of Spades ; an Ideal Color Changing tube ; an 18” Ace of Spades silk, and an 18” white silk. Load the card silk into the tube. Presentation: This effect needs little explanation. 1. Form the card around the tube, Figure 140. 2. Push the white silk into the tube, forcing the card silk out into view. 3. Steal out the tube. 4. As you display the card silk, wipe the pips off of the card, Figure 141. 5. Show card to be blank.

Jaysee Color Change Supreme * J A C K

27

C H A N I N

Many have enjoyed Chanin’s routine. Now you can share it. Effect; To identify a green silk just produced, the performer ties a knot in it. The silk is passed through the performer’s hand and emerges red and still containing the knot. After the knot is untied, the red silk is pushed through the hand again. Now the silk emerges green, its original color. Required: An ideal color change tube, an 18” red and an 18” green silk. Preparation: Tie a single knot in the red silk, Figure 142. Starting with corner “B”, push the silk into the tube. Prepare green silk with HANK BALL FOLD, Page 43, Chapter 3, Volume 1. Place the green silk in the folds of the coat at the bend of the left arm and the tube in the left sleeve, Figure 143. Shirt sleeves have been rolled above the elbows. Presentation: 1. Show both hands empty, Figure 144. 2. Pull up the right coat sleeve with the left hand. 3. Now pull up the left coat sleeve,

4. 5.

6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

11.

stealing the green silk, Figure, 145. Bring the hands together and develop the silk, Figure 146. Now tie a false (slip) knot in one corner of the green silk, Figures 147-151. Now display the knot as you lower the left hand, Figure 152. Tube drops into hand as shown in Figure 153. Push part of the green silk into the left hand and tube, Figure 154. Work slip knot out as it goes into the tube. Now pull out the red knot, Figure 155. Continue until all of the green silk is the tube and the red silk is out, Figure 156. Note little finger of the left hand clips end of the red silk.

12. 13.

14. 15. 16.

17.

Now steal the tube, Figures 157-159. Approach the red silk to stroke it with the right hand, Figure 160, leaving the tube in the left sleeve, Figure 161, as the hand passes down the silk, stopping below the knot, Figure 162. Show hands empty, Figure 163. Untie knot and display red silk, Figure 164. Now, starting with Figure 152 and the red silk, repeat the routine (minus the knots), and end with the green silk, Figure 164. Drop left hand slowly, and as you bow, allow the tube to fall into the left hand and green silk. Pocket both.

Color Change Expose *

P R O F E S S O R

28 J A C E

M I L L E R

Professor Jack Miller has fooled dozens of magicians with this smart routine, and it is with pride that I include this effect in my book. Effect : Following the clever vanish and reappearance of a red silk the performer offers to “expose” how magicians do the color change trick. Showing two silks, he proceeds to vanish one …

but both vanish. Then, quick as a flash, one is back again. Now the second vanishes. In conclusion both silks reappear. Required : Two prepared long finger tips, Figure 165. A prepared Ideal color change tube, Figure 166. A 12” red and a 12” green silk. Preparation : Push red piece of silk into tube, red and green pieces into finger tips. Roll green silk and place it under coat collar at the back of the neck. Place tube and green silk, red silk, and green finger tip behind some object on a table, Figure 167. Place red finger itp in right trouser pocket. Presentation : Patter : “I have been asked to explain how I change a green silk to red.” Part one : 1. Take the red silk in the right hand. 2. Present the first eleven (II) steps of ELUSIVE HANK (as explained in detail on page 332333 of chapter 8, Vanishes, Volume 1) , Stopping after the tip is stolen from the left fist and is on the right finger. As for as the audience is concerned, the red silk is now in the left fist. Patter : “Never be misled…

Now watch more closely !” Part two : Patter : “ In addition to the red silk in my left hand, I need a green silk. Then I will show you the secret of how a magician changes a silk from green to red.” 4. Leave the finger tip on the table as you pick up the green silk and tube. 5. Place tube and corner fastened to it in left fist, Figure 168. 6. Push part of the green silk into the tube and pull the piece of red out of the bottom, Figure 169. 7. Push the red back into the tube, then push in the remainder of the green, stealing the tube into the right hand, Figures 157-159. Patter : “Now I have a green silk on top of the red in my left, hand. Next I must add some ‘magic’ powder.” 8. Reach on your table with the right hand, leave the tube and come away with the green finger tip on the right hand. 3. Insert tip in left fist and pull green piece into view. Patter : “Now I will vanish one of the silks because I must have but one silk left when I finish the trick. So I”ll sprinkle the ‘magic’ powder on a silk. If I put the powder on the green silk, the GREEN would vanish (point to green piece at top of closed fist), but if I sprinkle it on the red, the red one would vanish (point to bottom of fist).”

9.

Push green piece into left fist, stealing tip on right finger, then sprinkle ‘invisible’ powder on bottom of fist. 10. Open left fist, now showing hand completely empty. Patter : “You see…the red silk has vanished.” 11. Immediately close left fist and reach in , leaving finger tip. Quickly pull out the green piece. 12. Push green piece back into finger tip, steal tip, then reach for more powder, leaving tip on the table. Patter : “Now to vanish the green silk, we need more powder. We sprinkle on the powder, and behold … the green one has vanished too !” 13. Slowly open fingers, showing left hand empty. Patter : “ If you didn’t see where the silks went I’ll show you. 14. Produce green silk from collar and red from pocket..

Red-Blue Blue-Red * L E S

29 M A N T E R F I E L D

Many uses of the Ideal Color-change will be obvious to the creative magician. Here is an example of an excellent effect. Effect : A red and blue silk, each placed in envelopes, change places. Required: Two 12” red, one 12” blue, an Ideal tube, and two envelopes with large flaps. Preparation: Load the tube with the red silk, and place the tube in the right coat pocket.

Presentation: 5. Show the envelopes and have them initialed. 6. Secretly obtain the fake on the second finger of the right hand. 7. Take one of the envelopes in your left hand, envelope flap toward you. 8. Raise the flap with the right hand, Figure 170. 9. Insert the right fingers into the envelope to open it. Leave the tube inside, Figure 171, as you withdraw the right fingers. 10. Push the blue silk into the envelope and fake. When about half of the silk is in, casually turn the envelope so spectators can see silk, Figure 172, then turn to the Figure 171 position.

1. 2. 3.

4.

Continue to tuck the blue silk in, forcing the red out of tube and into envelope. Steal the fake, Figure 173. Seal the envelope, then hand it to a spectator. Repeat with the second envelope and remaining red silk, Follow steps 2 thru 9.

11. 12.

Pocket the fake now containing red silk. When spectators open the envelopes, red and blue silks have changed places.

Two Tips

30

In closing, I give you two tips that may be of value in preparing your own routine.

GETTING THE TUBE : F.W.Boeckel calls this IT’S A STEAL*. Let us say you plan to dye a red silk green. Load your Ideal tube as in Figure 174. Now place the tube in your breast coat pocket Figure 175. When you want the tube, pull the red silk up with the right hand, left resting on the breast pocket, Figure 176. As the tube comes out of the pocket, drop the red silk over the left hand which has just palmed the tube, Figure 177. Show the right hand empty. Now take corner “A” in the right hand, pulling the red silk free of the tube. The tube with loaded green silk is in the left hand and the red silk in the right. Now do the color change.

GETTING RID OF THE TUBE : You have completed the color change (red to green), stolen the tube, and hands are in the Figure 178 position. Take corner “A” between the right thumb and first finger, and pull the silk free of the left hand. Keep the left hand closed as though still containing the red silk. Toss the green silk over the left shoulder, dropping the tube into the breast coat pocket, Figure 179. Open the right hand and show it empty. Show the left empty as an after thought. Take the green silk from your shoulder and go into your next effect.

SILK DYEING Introduction

1

In this chapter I will describe effects employing tubes concealed in cylinders, and apparatus having built in tubes. Before describing some of the better known tubes I will trace the origin of ‘Silk Dyeing’. Then I will explain methods of loading and stealing dye tubes. Next I will discuss some of the lesser known tubes, and finally I will give the basic effects employing dye tubes.

Hunter and Devant

2

A casual remark made over fifty years ago by G. w.hunter to David Devant led to one of the greatest effects in magic … the dyeing of a silk by passing it through a paper cylinder. So tomorrow’s greats will always remember a great of the past, I give you the famous Devant Handkerchief Trick.

The Handkerchief Trick

D A V I D

3 D E V A N T

Effect : After producing three white silks the performer dyes them by magic. Finally one is vanished, only to reappear tied between the other two. Required : Nine 12” silks : - 3 white and 2 each of red, yellow and green. A dye tube ( the original Devant model is pictured in Figure 1) and a sheet of stiff paper 8” x 10”. Also two glass cylinders (chimneys), a Devant pull, Figure 2, and a

Devant vest servante, Figure 3.

Preparation : The white silks are prepared as will be explained later. Insert three different colored silks (one at a time) into the tube. After creasing the paper, place it over the tube, Figure 4. Tie the three remaining silks together, Figure 17, roll them into a small ball, put a rubber band around them, and place them behind some object on a table. Place the servante under the vest, Figure 5. With the pull in place, Figure 6, pull loop “A” down, insert a white linen hank in it, then let part of the hank go up inside of the sleeve.

Preparation : Part One : 1. Produce the first white silk from the elbow, Page 59 Chapter 4, Volume 1. 2. Produce the second white silk (Match Box, De Kolta Method, Page 96, Chapter 5, Volume 1.) 3. Place a corner of the silk in the vest pocket, stealing a loaded false finger. 4. Produce the third silk from the finger, Page 106, Chapter 5, Volume 1. 5. Drop the false finger into the servante, Figure 5. Part Two: 6. Pick up paper and tube as you place the white silks on the table, Figure 7. 7. Show the paper, Figure 8, then form it into a cylinder around the tube, Figure 9. 8. Show the white silks, one at a time, then add them to the left hand, Figure 10. 9. Show the right hand empty. 10. Take the three white silks and push them into the bottom of the cylinder and tube, forcing the colored silks up into the cylinder. 11. Produce the yellow silk, placing it in the left hand position formerly held by the white silks, Fig. 10. 12. Produce the green silk and repeat step No. 11. 13. Now produce the red silk. As it is exhibited in the right hand, move the left hand to the opening in the vest and allow the tube to fall into the vest. servante, Figure 11. 14. Lay the three colored silks aside, unroll cylinder, and show paper empty. Part Two : 15. Withdraw the linen hank from the right sleeve, Figure 6, getting loop “A” on the right thumb. 16. Wipe face with hank, then place it in the breast coot pocket.

17. 18. 19.

20.

Display the two glass cylinders, then replace them on the table. Pick up the three colored silks and display them. Keep the yellow and green silks in the right hand, placing the red back on the table and on top of the packet of three knotted silks. Knot the green and yellow silks together, roll them into a small packet, then place a rubber band around them.

21. 22.

23.

24.

25. 26.

27. 28. 29.

30.

Take the packet in the left hand, Figure 12. Pick up the red silk (and the packet of three knotted silks) with the right hand, Figure 13. Needing the left hand, transfer its packet of two silks to the right hand, Figure 14. Reach for one of the glass cylinders with the left hand, dropping the bundle of two into the vest servante, Figure 15. Have a spectator hold the cylinder. Place the bundle of two silks (actually three) into the cylinder, Figure 16. Work the red silk into loop “A” of the pull. Place the red silk in the second cylinder. Vanish the silk from the tube, Page 305, Chapter 8, Volume 1. Have the spectator remove and display the packet of silks from his cylinder, Figure 17.

The Devant Tube

4

The Devant tube was merely an oval metal tube 1½”x 4”, Figure 1. Since its presentation, dozens of original versions” have appeared. I shall describe a few fo the earlier ones.

The Carradi Utility Tube

5

For illustrated details, see page 330, Chapter 8, Volume 1.

The Barrel Tube

6

Two pulls, similar in shape, are shown in Figures 18 and 19. The pulls pivot on a rod passing through their centers. Elastic attached takes the pull under the coat or up the sleeve.

Stanyon Tube

7 E L L I S

S T A N Y O N

This tube, Figure 20, was the first to have a tape divider. The prongs made it possible to pass the tube from one hand to the other.

Roterberg Tube

P R O F E S S O R

8 R O T E R B E R G

Roterberg’s tube was built in the silk. Sew 1½” x 2½” pocket to a blue silk, Figure 21. Sew a silk bag, Figure 22, at the middle of the pocket, Figure 23. Finally, sew rings of fine soft wire in top and bottom of pocket, Figure 24. Next, force the blue silk into the pocket thru opening “B”, Figure 24, filling the built-in silk tube, Figure 25. To present, either palm prepared tube or load it into a paper cylinder. Show a red silk, force it into end “A”, and show the blue silk, Figure 26.

Willmann’s Tube

H E R R

9 W I L L M A N N

Willmann’s tube was metal and sewed between two silks, Figure 27. The double silk is forced up into its self contained tube through end “X”, Figure 28. Now, a red silk pushed into end “Y’ will force the double blue silk out of its tube. If more than one change is used, a second silk (yellow) is also loaded into end “X”. Then red and green silks pushed into “Y” will emerge yellow and blue.

Cup Dye Tube

10 H E R R

W I L L M A N N

Roterberg divided his tube with a cloth bag; Stanyon with a cloth tape. Herr Willmann was among the first to use a sliding metal cup, Figure 29.

Today’s Dye Tubes

11

Almost all of today’s dye tubes are either one of two styles; the Stanyon tape divider or the Willmann sliding cup.

Al Baker Dye Tube

12 A L

B A K E R

The Willmann tube is made by a number of manufacturers but the style designed by Al Baker, Figure 30, is considered the most popular.

Braun Dye Tube *

13 J O H N

B R A U N

Many manufacturers make a tape divided tube (ala Stanyon). Such tubes are usually larger than the sliding cup style and accommodate larger silks. The John Braun dye tube, Figure 31, is a popular size.

Loading Silks Into Dye Tubes H A R O L D

14 R.

R I C E

Few magicians load silks into dye tubes properly. The ‘Trap Fold’, page 34, Chapter 3, Volume 1, should be used unless otherwise indicated.

Loading Dye Tubes Into Cylinders

15

Methods of loading the dye tube into the paper cylinders fall within one of three possibilities : 1. 2. 3.

To have the dye tube inside of the cylinder prior to presentation. To load the dye tube as the paper is shown or formed into a cylinder. To add dye tube after the cylinder is formed.

Advance Loading

16

If the tube has been placed inside of the paper cylinder before your performance, go into your silk dyeing effect without calling attention to the cylinder. Some performers feel it is suffice to show the cylinder empty at the conclusion of the effect.

Behind Paper

17

Lay the tube under the paper, Figure 32, Pick up the paper and tube, Figure 8 or Figure 33. Bring bottom edge “B-B” of paper up and in front of tube, Figure 34.

Now release edge “A-A”, Figure 35. Both sides of

the paper having been shown, roll the paper into a cylinder around the tube, Figure 36.

In a Paper Roll

18

Place the tube in a loosely rolled cylinder , Figure 37. Pick up the cylinder and unroll it, Figure 38. Drop “A-A”. At the same time move hands, paper, and tube into Figure 39 position. Now roll cylinder, Figure 36.

Front Drop Lay the tube under the paper, Figure 32. Pick up paper, Figure 40. Take paper at “X”, Figure 40 in the left hand, and pas the tube and right hand down the paper to point “Y”, Figure 41. Drop “X”, Figure 42. Bring “X”, up over the tube, Figure 43. Roll paper around cylinder. Now transfer the cylinder and tube

19

to the left hand, Figure 44.

Empty Cylinder

20

Note an opening “A” runs inside of the cylinder and along the side of the tube, Figure 44. With tube and cylinder in this position, cylinder can be proven empty by passing a wand through “A-A” Figure 45, or by pushing a white silk through “A-A”, Figure 46.

Behind Silks *

R I C E

21 -

V A N

Z A N D T

Set the tube in a vertical position, Figure 47. Roll the paper into a large cylinder and place a rubber band around

its center. Place the cylinder over the tube, Figure 48, take away the silks, and display them. Pick up the cylinder and tube and present the effect.

Palmed Tube *

R I C E

22 -

V A N

Z A N D T

Palm the tube in the right hand while spectator rolls the paper into a large cylinder , Figure 49. Take the cylinder in the left hand, then transfer it to the right, slipping the end over the dye tube, Figure 50.

Front and Back * R I C E

23 -

V A N

Z A N D T

Place the tube under the paper, Figure 32. Take the paper and tube as in Figure 51. Bring “B” up under the left thumb, Figure 52, then release “A”, Figure 53. Now roll the

the paper and tube into a cylinder.

Vest Pocket Steal * R I C E

24 -

V A N

Z A N D T

Slit the bottom of the right vest pocket and place the tube therein, Figure 54. After showing paper, drop right hand to Figure 55 position position and steal the tube behind the paper as the left is shown empty, reaches for the silks, or moves a table. Roll paper and tube into a cylinder.

Dress Vest Steal * R I C E

25 -

V A N

Z A N D T

Place the tube at the center of the dress suit vest, Figure 56. Steal the tube behind the paper, Figure 57. Roll the paper and tube into a cylinder.

Sash Steal

26 H O R O W I T Z

If you work in costume and wear a sash at the waist, carry the tube as Figure 58,and steal it as shown in Figure 57.

Vest Steal **

27 F R A Z E E

Even magicians have been fooled by this method used by Frazee for over 30 years. Unbotton the center vest

button and slip the tube in place, Figure 59. Bring paper in place and steal tube, Figure 60. Roll paper and tube into a cylinder.

Finger Steal *

28 M A X

H O L D E N

Place the tube under the paper, Figure 32. Pick up the tube, Figure 61, and paper, Figure 62. Pull up the right sleeve, Figure 63, and show the front of the paper. Note position of the tube. Take the tube in Figure 61 position. Transfer the paper to the left hand and pull up the left sleeve, Figure 64, as the back of the paper

is shown. Take the paper in the right hand again, Figure 63, and roll the paper and tube into a cylinder.

A Hooked Tube * R I C E

29 -

V A N

Z A N D T

Solder a pointed hook to a black dye tube, Figure 65. Hook the tube on the slleve near the elbow, on the side of the body, or on a piece of apparatus. After a spectator rolls the paper into a cylinder, scoop the tube into the cylinder, Figure 66, as the other hand reaches for the silks.

Catgut And Tube **

J O H N

30 M U L H O L L A N D

Prepare a tube as in Figure 67. Hong the tube over a needle at the back of a table, Figure 68. Place the paper on the table. Pick up paper and tube, Figure 69, and show the paper, Figure 70. Bring “A” up as you lower the tube with the left thumb, Figure 71. Hold the tube and paper, Figure 72, reverse both, Figure 73, then roll the paper and tube into a cylinder, using both hands.

Ala Bogart *

R I C E

31 -

V A N

Z A N D T

Suspend the dye tube ala Bagart, page 188, Chapter 7, Volume 1. The tube goes into the cylinder as it is placed in the holder.

Tube and Jumbler * R I C E

32 -

V A N

Place the loaded tube in opague tumbler or plastic drinking cup, Figure 74. Form the cylinder, then place it in the tumbler and over the tube, Figure 75, while reaching for the silks. Remove cylinder and tube and proceed.

Z A N D T

Seavante and Tube * R I C E

33 -

V A N

Z A N D T

Place the tube on a servante behind a chair or table. Show the paper, then lay it over the chair or table, Figures 76 and 77. Pick up the paper and tube and form a cylinder, Figure 36.

With a Silk *

R I C E

34 -

V A N

Load the tube with the required colored silks, then add a white one, Figure 78. Place the tube and a white silk on the table, Figure 79. Form the paper into a cylinder. Pick up the tube and white silk and push both into the bottom of the cylinder, Figure 80. Force the tube up inside, lettering the silk stay behind, Figure 81. Now, push the white silk

Z A N D T

into the tube. This forces the white silk out of the dye tube and up into the cylinder. Remove the white silk from the top of the cylinder. To the audience it appears that you put a white silk in at the bottom of the cylinder and pulled it out of the top, proving the cylinder empty. Actually this business has been a cover to permit you to load the tube into the cylinder.

In a Silk *

35 J E A N

H U G A R D

A dye tube pointed white is used. Sew a pocket in the corner of a white silk and put the dye tube therein, Figure 82. Form a cylinder of paper. Take the cylinder and silks (at their corners) in the right hand, Figure 83. Push one white silk through the cylinder with a wand to prove the cylinder empty. As you return the white silk to the other two, push the white tube out of the pocket and into the cylinder, Figure 84.

Stealing Dye Tubes

36

I have given you a number of excellent basic methods of loading the dye tube into a cylinder. Now for some accepted methods of getting rid of the tube.

In The Right Pocket * R I C E

-

37 V A N

-

Z A N D T

After the white silks are in the dye tube, transfer the cylinder to the right hands as the left is shown empty. Now take the cylinder into the left, letting the tube drop into the right, Figure 85. Go to the right coat pocket with the right hand for a rubber band, ribbon, or colored silk to tie around the center of the cylinder leaving the tube in the pocket. ( See AL BAKER Method, No. 92.)

Tube and Wand*

38

R I C E V A N Z A N D T If the cylinder must have a rubber band around it before the steal can be made, make the steal, Figure 85, then reach for a wand in the right pocket, leaving the tube therein.

In The Silks *

39

R I C E

- V A N

Z A N D T

After dyeing the silks, take them in the right hand. Bring the cylinder momentarily to the silks and allow the tube to fall into them, Figure 86. Pocket the silks and tube, then show the cylinder empty.

Drop Method *

R I C E

40 -

V A N

Z A N D T

After dyeing the silks, allow the tube to drop from the cylinder and into a black-art well, servante, or hot, Figure 87; behind silks or other objects on the table, Figure 88; into the coat pocket, Figure 89. A bit of misdirection is necessary of course. As the tube leaves the cylinder, the free hand tosses a silk into the air, drops a silk, reaches for a wand, or moves a piece of apparatus.

Palmed *

41 R I C E

-

V A N

Z A N D T

After the silks have been dyed, hand the cylinder, with parts of the silks exposed, to a spectator. As the spectator takes the cylinder, allow the tube to slide into the right palm, Figure 90. Take a wand from the right coat pocket, leaving the tube behind.

In A Jumbler *

R I C E

42 -

V A N

Z A N D T

Line an apague tumbler with cotton. Set the cylinder upright in the tumbler, Figure 75, as the silks are displayed. Remove the cylinder, leaving the tube behind, Figure74. Open the cylinder and show the paper empty.

With A Hook *

R I C E

43 -

V A N

Z A N D T

If the tube has a hook on it, Figure 65, the tube can be hooked to some object and stolen out, Figure 66, after the silks are dyed.

Under A Silk *

R I C E

44 -

V A N

Z A N D T

Fasten a piece of silk or tape under the rivet holding the felt to the plunger, Figure 91. Now sew the center of a dark silk to the tape, Figure 92. The dark silk is the last one pulled from the cylinder. The tube is hidden by the silk, Figure 93.

In A Bottomless Glass * R I C E

-

45 V A N

After the silks are dyed, drop them on a table. Place the bottomless glass on the silks. Now put the cylinder in the glass. The cylinder expands to the walls of the glass, releasing the tube. Now lift the glass, leaving the tube hidden in the silks, Figure 94. Hands having been shown empty, remove the cylinder from the glass and show the paper empty.

Z A N D T

In A Black-Art Well * R I C E

-

46 V A N

Z A N D T

After dyeing the silks, place them in the top of the cylinder, then place both in a bottomless glass, Figure 95. Push the glass forward, allowing the dye tube to drop into the well, Figure 96. Now carry the glass and cylinder to a spectator and invite him to inspect cylinder and silks as you return the bottomless glass.

Crumpled Cylinder * R I C E

47 -

V A N

Z A N D T

As the cylinder was shown empty at the beginning, same performers merely crumple it at the finish, leaving the dye tube inside. Toss the ball of paper (and tube) off stage or onto a table.

Disguised Tubes* R I C E

48 -

V A N

Z A N D T

A number of dye tubes are built into items produced at the end of the effect. After the silks have been dyed, the performer produces a bought of flowers, a baby doll, etc. The dye tube is cleverly hidden or built in the production piece.

For example, I saw an oriental act in which the performer showed a cylinder made from a bamboo mat (instead of the usual piece of paper). He didn’t bother to show the cylinder empty (see No. 16 ADVANCE LOADING, Chapter 14). Instead, he passed a white silk through the cylinder (See No. 20, EMPTY CYLINDER, Chapter 14), then went into his dyeing effect. At the conclusion he unrolled the mat and produced a feather bouquet (containing the dye tube), Figure 97. I will give you a few examples of “built-in” tubes.

Feather Flowers * R I C E

49 A N D

V A N

Z A N D T

A number of single feather flowers and a dye tube are needed, Figure 98. Wire the flowers around the base of the tube, fold the flowers in, then hold them in place with a paper band, Figure 99. After the white silks are in the tube and the colored ones are produced, the cylinder is unrolled, the paper band broken, and the flowers produced, Figure 100.

Baby Doll *

R I C E

50 -

V A N

Z A N D T

A doll’s head, dress, and hands are fastened over a dye tube, Figure 101. The dress is pleated back on the tube and held in place with a paper band, Figure 102. After the silks are dyed the cylinder is opened, the paper band broken and the doll produced, Figure 101.

Humpty Dumpty

51 L E A T

A very popular English dyeing effect using picture silks is sued to tell the story of Humpty Dumpty. At the end Humpty is produced, the dye tube being hidden in his head, Figure 103.

Paper Pocket *

R I C E

52 -

V A N

Z A N D T

A band of paper glued in place, Figure 104, holds the dye tube in place, Figure 105. Holding the paper as in Figure 106, the paper can be shown back and front at the beginning and end of the effect.

Other Tubes

53

Now for a few lesser known tubes. The use of some will be obvious. Others will require some explanation.

Wand Tube *

54 J E A N

H U G A R D

The tube shown in Figure 107, makes it possible to push a wand or white silk thru the tube without disturbing the load, Figure 108.

Wand Dye Tube ** T.

55 J.

C R A W F O R D

The Crawford tube, Figure 109, is designed to allow a wand to pass along its side while in the paper cylinder, Figure 110.

Russell Flag Tube *

B I L L Y

56 R U S S E L L

Effect : Five Flags change into a large American Flag. Preparation : Divide a tube “A” (Figure 111) into 5 parts. Place this into a larger tube “B”, Figure 112. Inside tube slides freely but cannot escape as both ends of “B” are turned in slightly. An opening “C” permits finger control of the inner tube during presentation. Five 12” x 18” flags of different nations are loaded into the inner tube “A” and a 24” x 36” American flag into compartment “B”. Presentation : 1. Obtain loaded tube and paper from servante, Figure 76. 2. Form the cylinder. 3. Produce the small flags, one by one, from end “R”. 4. Push the flags into end “R” of “B”, forcing the large flag into the cylinder. 5. Produce the American flag from end “S”, Figure 112. 6. Allow the tube to slide into a hat or well, Figure 87.

Crystal Dyeing Tube *

S Y D N E Y

57 L E G R A N D E

This tube described in 1920 by Chos Waller, later appeared in Hugard’s SILKEN SORCERY. Effect : A silk passed through a transparent tube changes color. Preparation : Slat a cylinder half its length, Figure 113. Make a dye tube as in Figure 114. Load a red silk into the dye tube, then place the assembled apparatus on the table, Figure 115. Presentation : 1. Pick up the silk and tube in the right hand, Figure 116. 2. Now turn the hand so the fingers are to the audience, hiding the fake, the take the white silk away. 3. Left hand pushes down on the cylinder, the fake sliding up to the middle, Figure 117.

4.

5.

6.

7.

White silk is now pushed down through the top of the cylinder with a wand. The white silk changes to red. Remove the red silk with the left hand, transfer the silk to the right, then take the top of the cylinder in the left hand. Draw the cylinder up, leaving the fake and red silk in the right hand, Figure 118. Pocket the silk and fake.

Transparent Dye Tube *

58

A variation of Legrande’s Crystal Tube. Grants fake has two small projections on it, and the cylinder has two slots, Figure 119. Get the fake to the center as suggested earlier by Waller, then tie a white silk around the cylinder’s center, Figure 120. Silk hides the fake as white silks go in end “A” and come out “B” colored. At the finish the fake is stolen under the white silk as it is slid off the cylinder.

The Transparent Tube *

V E R N O N

This is a clever illusion. While cellophane is transparent, when it is rolled into a cylinder, it becomes opaque. A chrome plated dye tube attached to the cellophane reflects light and is invisible a few feet away. Preparation : Fasten several sheets of cellophane together on all sides with transparent scotch tape, Figure 121. Next decorate both sides of the cellophane with ½” wide red scotch tape, Figure 122. At point “X”, Figure 122, fasten a cellophane pocket, Figure 123. Into this place the chrome plated dye tube, Figure 123. Load silks into tube, roll cylinder and place the cylinder on the table. Presentation : 1. Pick up the cylinder, allowing it to unroll, holding it before your face, Figure 124. 2. Starting at the top, pass the right hand before your face and behind the cellophane, continuing on down to “B-B”. 3. Reverse the sheet and repeat the moves in number 2. 4. Roll the cellophane into a cylinder and do a standard color change.

59 C O O K

Mystery Dye Tube * H.

60 R.

H U L S E

Here is a clever twist for the magician who has the time to make his own tube. This is a disposable dye tube. It is loaded into the cylinder as any other tube. However, at the finish the performer crushes the tube (with silks) and the cylinder, and tosses both away, eliminating any steal. Take a back or front magazine cover and prepare it as in Figure 125. From the tube, Figure 126. Reinforce the ends and seal the sides with pieces of tape, Figure 127. The paper for the cylinder should be a duplicate magazine cover.

Music And Silks **

J A N O S

61 B A R T L

Effect : Silks pushed through a cylinder formed from a piece of sheet music change color; yellow to red; red to blue; blue to yellow. The Secret : The prepared sheet music is self contained, requiring no dye tube.

Preparation : Sew two sheets together as indicated by dotted lines, Figure 128, or rubber cement shaded areas together, Figure 129. With a wand place red silk in “A” and blue in “C”. Presentation : 1. Take sheet music from a musician, display it, then roll it into an oval tube, Figure 130. 2. Insert the yellow silk into the bottom of the cylinder, Figure 131, then force it up into “B” with a Wand, Figure 130. 3. Reach into “A” and remove the red silk, Figure 132. 4. Place the red silk back in “A” with the wand. 5. Remove the blue silk from “C”, Figure 132. 6. Place the blue silk back in “C” with the wand. 7. Reach into top of “B” and remove the original yellow silk. 8. Unroll the sheet music and show both sides.

‘ Selfeon ‘ Dye Tube *

H A R L A N

62 T A R B E L L

There are several ‘self contained’ dye tube versions. This is a Tarbell favorite. Preparation : Obtain a length of mailing tube, Figure 133, and cut it into 2 pieces, Figure 134. Insert a length of 1½” wide ribbon in place, Figure 134. Join the two pieces of tube with gummed paper, Figure 135, sealing the tape in place. Fasten the prepared tube to a sheet of heavy paper, Figure 136, then roll the paper into a cylinder, Figure 137. The necessary colored silks are loaded into the tube.

Presentation : 1. Open the cylinder, display it, Figure 138. 2. Give paper a quarter turn , Figure 139. 3. Roll paper until tube is covered, Figure 140. 4. Show both sides casually as you complete the cylinder. 5. Continue with your favorite dyeing effect.

Tap-A-Color

63

Said to have originated in England, this effect is marketed in America under several trade names. Like SELFCON, the dye tube is fastened to the paper. Preparation : Make a dye tube 2” long and 1¼” in diameter out of cardboard, Figure 135. Prepared a 10” x 10” piece of heavy paper as in Figure 141. Glue the protruding strip “S” around the dye tube, Figure 142. Starting at “X-X”, Figure 142, roll the paper into a cylinder, Figure 137.

Presentation : 1. Hold the cylinder vertically in the right hand. 2. Using the left hand to assist, unroll the cylinder, Figure 143, showing one side of the paper. 3. Now show the back, Figure 144. 4. Holding the paper as in

5.

6.

Figure 145, roll the paper into a cylinder again. Continue with your favorite dyeing effect.

Windsor’s Dye Box *

T H O M A S

64 L.

L O W R Y

This effect swept the country when released in 1946. I predict it will become a standard item in the dyeing of silks. Effect : A white silks becomes colored when pushed through a popcorn box. The Secret : The innocent looking box has a secret pocket in it, Figure 155.

Preparation : Obtain two popcorn boxes 4½” x 7½” x 7” x 2”. Leave them folded flat as shipped from the factory. It takes two boxes to make one gimmicked box. 4.

Cut off the top flap from the front of the first box, Figure 146. 5. All you need of the second box is the front, top, and part of the two sides and the bottom. Cut away the shaded areas, Figure 147. 6. Fold over the sides and bottom of No. 2, Figure 148. 7. Using a good grade all purpose household cement, glue the areas indicated, then paste this panel (of No. 2 box) to the front of box No. 1, Figure 148. 8. Now your box (which has two fronts) looks like Figure 149. 9. Put a weight on the box and let it dry overnight. 10. Next morning take a table knife and force open the seam which runs along the sides of the box and was glued together by the box maker. Now your box is as in Figure 155. 1. Place a piece of 1” wide transparent scotch tape about 3½” long on the open edge of the box and one on the back of the box, Figure 150. These prevent a second piece of tape to be added later from sticking to the box. 2. Now put a small piece of tape across the first two, sealing the open side to the back, Figure 150. 3. Finally shape the box, close the bottom of the box, drop a red silk into the box (not pocket)

the close the top. Presentation : 1. Pick up the box in the left hand, Figure 151 (performer’s view) Figure 152 (audience view). 2. Squeeze the sides of the box, forcing open the pocket, Figure 153. 3. Show a white silk, then apparently drop it into the box, actually into the pocket. 4. Close and fasten the top flops. 5. Turn the box over, shake it, then open it, bottom up, and remove the red silk, Figure 154. 6. Although the silk apparently changed color, the audience is not convinced. 7. Open the top and allow the audience to see through the box. 8. Finally, tear away the small scotch tape tab at the side and show the box inside and out, Figure 155.

There are many uses for the Dye Box. Here are a few.

Magic Soap

65

A soiled white silk dropped into the box emerges nice and clean.

Production

66

The box can be used as production apparatus.

20th Century

67

The two solids (one containing the hidden rainbow) are knotted and placed in the box. The duplicate rainbow is vanished (in the pocket of the box). The three silks, knotted together, are produced from the bottom of the box. See Chapter 17.

Vanish

68

The box can be used to vanish a silk.

Silk Monte

69

By using three boxes, three white silks, and three red silks, you can do a “find the red silk” routine. You have perfect control of the silks, a red in each pocket and a white at the bottom of each box.

Switch

70

The box can be used to exchange one silk for another; for example, a blank silk for a card silk. Windsor has published a book “DYE BOX BOOK” which contains over 50 effects employing his dye box.

Silk Blowing Get *

H A S K E L L

71 S C H W E I D E L

This is the first of several excellent silk blowing effects. Effect: Red, white, and blue silks blown from a paper cylinder are replaced and emerge knotted together, Figure 159. Required : Fold a sheet of heavy black paper, Figure 155, then glue the shaded areas together, Figure 156. Six 12” silks are also needed. Preparation: Place the knotted silks (Figure 159) in No. 1; a white silk in No. 2, red in No. 3, and blue in No. 4. Presentation: 1. Show back and front of paper. 2. Form paper into fairly loose cylinder. 3. Give a short, quick blow through No. 2, forcing the red silk into the air, Figure 159-A. 4. Catch the silk and push it back into its secret pocket (No. 2) with a wand, Figure 158. 5. Repeat with white and blue silks. 6. After the three silks are back in their pockets, blow the three knotted silks into view, Figure 159B. 7. Show the paper or both sides and toss it aside.

Blow Jt *

72 J U S T I N I A N I

Effect : Three white silks, blown one at a time through a paper cylinder, change color. Required : A four compartment dye tube and a paper cylinder Figure 160; 3-15” white and 3-15” solid color silks. Preparation : Load a colored silk in 1,2, and 3. Four is empty. Place the tube behind the white silks, Figure 161. Presentation : 1. Show the cylinder empty, then sit it down over loaded tube. 2. Pick up the white silks, display them, then tuck them in a coat pocket. 3. To prove the cylinder (loaded with tube) empty, push a white silk through compartment No. 4 with a wand. 4. Replace the white silk in No. 4. 5. Place cylinder to lips and blow through No. 1, causing a colored silk to fly into the air. 6. Repeat to color the remaining

7. 8.

two white silks. Allow the tube to drop into a black art well or chair servante as you catch the last silk, Figure 162. Toss empty cylinder into the audience.

Note : This same effect was marketed in 1932 by Donald Holmes and was credited to Harold Lynn.

Silk Blowing

73 A D E

D U V A L

Although this effect was credited to Joseph Ovette in SILK CREATIONS, published in 1931, Duval who has featured it for many years is said to be the originator. Effect : Three white silks, blown one at a time thru a cylinder emerge colored. Required : A length of oval brass tube with one end crossed with wires, Figure 163, or octagon, Figure 164. As air must pass between the tube and the cylinder during the blowing, Figure 165, a round tube would not function. Two cylinders 2” in diameter, formed from sheets of two ply heavy paper 9” x 18”. These cylinders must be perfectly round and the seams air tight, Figure 166. Three pins each made from two needles, are needed, Fig 167. Seven very light weight (about 4 momme) 27” silks

(4white and 3 colored) are required. Finally, a special well, Figure 168, or a trap in your table is needed to take one of the cylinder. Preparation : Load silks and tube into one cylinder as shown in Figure 169, using the “trap fold” for the silks, page 34, Chapter 3, Volume 1. Place cylinders and 3 white silks on the table as shown in Figure 170. Presentation : 1. Pick up empty cylinder “A” in the right hand and show it empty. 2. Step by the side of the table and drop cylinder into the trap, picking up the white silks with the left hand, and exposing cylinder “B”. 3. Show the three white silks; then drape them over the left arm. 4. With the right hand pick up cylinder “B”, white silk end uppermost. Transfer the cylinder to the left hand. 5. Place a white silk in the bottom of the cylinder and tube, blow through the cylinder (see Figure 165), and the white silk flies into the air. Catch the silk in the right hand. To the audience you have shown the cylinder still empty by

blowing a white silk through it. Catch the white silk, then bring it momentarily to the cylinder, and secretly pull out the pin holding the green silk. 7. Drop the pin on the table as you place the white silk over the left arm again. 8. Place another white silk into the cylinder and tube and blow, the green silk flying into the air. 9. Repeat the above action to complete the color change of the remaining two white silks. 10. At the finish take the three colored silks into the right hand and allow the tube to slide form the cylinder into them, Figure 86. 11. Lay the silks and tube aside and tear cylinder apart to show it empty. (For another version, see page 848). 6.

A Silk Diversion

E D W A R D

74 B A G S H A W E

Effect : Performer places a red silk with white polka dots into a glass and covers it with a paper cylinder. The dots are removed by magic and appear on the inside of the cylinder. Required : An 18” red silk with white palka dots; an 18” solid red silk; a mirror glass, page 325, Chapter 8, Volume 1; and a prepared paper cylinder. Preparation : Two sheets of black stiff paper are needed. To one paste white discs the same size as the dots on the silk, Figure 171. Roll the plain black so it will fit loosely over the glass, Figure 172, then hold it in shape with rubber bands. Roll the prepared sheet loosely around the black cylinder just formed, Figure 173, and add a rubber band. Now you have two cylinders that nestle.

Place the plain red silk in the back half of the mirror glass and cover with the double cylinder. Place the polka dot silk in your breast pocket. Presentation : 1. Remove cylinder and call attention to its being black inside and out. Also mention empty (mirror) glass as you sit the cylinder (double) aside. 2. Display the polka dot silk and put it in the front half of the mirror glass. 3. At the same time move the cylinder forward on your table, allowing the inner cylinder to fall into a well, Figure 174. 4. Pick up the glass and cover it with the cylinder, giving the glass a half turn, page 326, Volume 1. 5. Remove the cylinder and then take the solid red silk from the glass. 6. Unroll the black cylinder and show the dots have left the silk and are now on the paper.

Soft Soap *

75 D O C

H A L L O C K

Effect : Performer displays three ink spotted 18” white silks and a box that holds powdered soap such as LUX. The silks are pushed in the top of the box, then removed from the bottom, “washed” and free of ink spots. After some by-play the box is torn apart and shown empty. (In a later “deluxe” version, white silks smeared with lip-stick impressions are used instead of the inked silks.) Required : Three ink spotted 18” white silks; two 18” white silks; one faked white silk, Figure 175, and a soap box prepared as in Figure 176.

Preparation : Fold silk back over tube, Figure 177, press silk around tube, and place in box, Figure 178. Now place two white silks in box and beside fake, Figure 179. Close both ends with scotch tape. Presentation : 1. Show closed box on all sides. 2. Open box, Figure 180. 3. Show ink spotted silk, then, using all four fingers, Figure 181, tuck it into the box and fake. 4. Repeat until all three soiled silks are in the fake. 5. Close the top and fasten it with the tape. 6. Turn the box upside down, shaking it. 7. Open the bottom, remove one white silk, shake it, and lay it aside. 8. Now taking the bead, remove the faked silk, Figure 182, shaking it. Folds will fall down and cover the loaded tube. 9. Lay the second (faked) silk aside. 10. Repeat with the third silk. 11. Audience believes three soiled silks are still in the box. 12. After comedy by-play, tear the box apart and toss it into the audience.

A ‘Catch’ Transposition * E R I C

76 C.

L E W I S

Effect : Three green silks are placed in a red box ; three red in a green one. Silks are commanded to change places and it appears they have as the silks, when removed, match the boxes. However, part of a green silk protrudes from the red box ! Spectators demand that the green silk be removed, and after by-play, the performer does so. However, the green silk is found to be a pair of lady’s green panties! The boxes are then torn apart and found to be empty.

Secret : This is an English version of. No. 75, SOFT SOAP. The boxes are as in Figure 183. As the three red silks are produced from the box, the green panties are pulled into view, unknown (?) to the performer.

Soft Soap Improved * R.

77 C.

B U F F

Buff’s version requires a soap box, slit as in Figure 184, and a tube closed at one end, Figure 185. Effect: Three white silks placed in the top of a box are colored when taken out of the bottom. Required: Prepared box and tube, 3-18” white and 3-18’ colored silks.

Presentation : Place the tube and colored silks in place, Figure 186. Presentation : 1. Pick up box and open the top, Figure 187. 2. Show the white silks and tuck them, one by one, into the box and tube. 3. Close the box and turn it upside down. 4. Open the bottom of the box, produce the silks, one by one, and lay them over the left wrist, Figure 188. 5. Insert the right thumb in the cat-gut loop, steal the tube, then take the silks, Figure 189, and place them aside, Figure 190. 6. Tear the box apart and show it empty.

Paper Sack Soft Soap * R

78 C.

B U F F

Buff suggests a ten pound paper bag to replace the soap box in Effect No. 77. To strengthen the side of the bag containing the slit, glue a piece of a second bag in place, Figure 191. Holding the bag as in Figure 192, present the effect as No. 77. Figure 193 shows the solids being produced.

Soft Soap Passe-Paste * R.

79 C.

B U F F

By using two prepared bags and tubes, 6-18” white, and 618” solid colored silks you can do a passé – passé. Prepare the bags as in Figure 194. Presentation : 1. Holding the bag ‘A’ as in Figure 192, place the three white silks, one by one, in the bag and tube. 2. Twist the mouth of the bag and place it upside down in a glass tumbler, Figure 195.

3. 4. 5. 6.

7.

Repeat with the second bag and 3 colored silks. Now command the silks to pass from one bag to the other. Take bag ‘A’ from the glass and produce three solid colored silks, Figure 193. Steal the tube, Figure 189, and lay it aside with silks, Figure 190. Repeat with bag ‘B’.

Nu Dye Method *

80 B I L L

S P R A G G

And still another ‘Soft Soap’. Effect : A red silk placed in a green box is dyed green, a green silk in a red box is dyed red. Required : Two unprepared soap boxes, one red, one green. Two mechanical single color change silks, Chapter 12. A quantity of red and green gelatin such as Jello. Presentation : 1. Place the red silk in the green box ; green in the red, Figure 196.

2. 3.

4.

Drop a spoonful of green gelatin in the green box; red gelatin in the red box. Close boxes, then shake them, turning them upside down. Open boxes at bottoms, secretly change the color of the silks, then Produce them … green from green box, red from red.

Sympathetic Napkin Rings * J E S S

T H O R N T O N

Effect : Silks placed in an empty cylinder change color to match colored napkin rings passed over the cylinder. Required : Three colored napkin rings and a chrome cylinder, Figure 197. Each napkin ring contains a removable fake, Figure 198. A red, a white, and a blue silk are also needed.

81

Preparation : Prepare the apparatus as shown in Figure 199. Presentation : 3. Show the white ring empty. 4. Remove the white silk from the top of the cylinder and pass the silk thru the white ring. 5. Lay the white silk aside. 6. Pick up the cylinder and pass the white ring up over it, taking away the fake in the ring, Figure 200. 7. Show the cylinder empty and place it upright on the table. 8. Drop the white ring down over the cylinder, leaving the fake in the top of the cylinder again, Figure 201. 9. Place the white silk in the top of the cylinder and fake. 10. Bring up and remove the white ring, Figure 200, stealing out the fake and white silk from the cylinder into the ring. 11. Drop the red ring down over the cylinder, remove the red silk from the top of the cylinder (and fake), and show the silk has changed (?) from white to red. 1. Replace the red silk in the top of the cylinder and fake. 2. By repeating the moves just explained, red silk changes to blue ; blue silk to original white.

The Checker Mystery * L.

L.

82 I R E L A N D

Effect: A red and a white silk placed into a cylinder change into a ‘checkerboard’ silk. Upon lifting the cylinder a stack of checkers is produced. Required : A 12” red and a 12” white silk; an 18” red and white checkerboard silk; a metal tube and checkers, Figure 202; a piece of paper 10” x 13”. Preparation : Load the metal tube as in Figure 203. Figure 204 shows the set-up prior to presentation. A felt hat, Figure 210, is also needed. Presentation : 1. Pick up paper, Figure 205, and show it on both sides, Figure 206 and 207. 2. Roll the paper into a cylinder. 3. Tuck the 12” silks into end “B” (Figure 203) of tube. 4. Appear to push silks up in cylinder with wand. Actually fist finger of right hand does this, Figure 208. 5. As 12” silks go into the tube, the checkers act as a plunger and force the checkerboard silk into view, Figure 208. Also, about 2” of the stock of checkers leave the the tube but remain hidden in the cylinder, Figure 209. 6. Display the checkerboard silk. As you do, grasp checkers at “X”, Figure 210, with two fingers, and allow tube to slide out of cylinder into felt hat. 7. Lift cylinder and show checkers, Figure 211. 8. Secretly break the thread and drop checkers into glass. 9. Unroll the paper cylinder.

Silk Cabby *

83 T O M

S E L L E R S

Effect : After showing an empty cabinet, Figure 212, an 18” white silk pushed through it emerges red, Figure 213. The Secret : The cabinet contains a wooden rectangular tube, Figure 214, which can be slid up and down inside the box at the performer’s will, Figure 215. As the tube rests in the base when the doors are open, Figures 212 and 216, the box can be freely shown empty. Preparation : Load an 18” red silk into compartment “B”, Figure 214, close the doors. Presentation : 1. Take the box in the left hand as shown in Figure 217. The first finger is free to lower or raise the secret wooden tube. 2. Tilt the box to the right, then the left, causing the doors to drop open, Figure 216. 3. Close the box, then using the left first finger, Figure 217, push the wooden tube up in the cabinet so it lines up with the holes in the ends, Figure 215. 4. Push the white silk into one end and chamber “A”, Figure 214, using a wand, Figure 217. Withdraw the red silk from the other end (chamber “B”, Figure 214), Figure 213. 5. Withdraw the red silk, let the tube drop to the bottom of the cabinet, Figure 215, then open the doors and show the cabinet empty, Figure 212. Note : The Cabby can also be used for the vanish or production of silks.

The Imp Box * E D W A R D

84 M A S S E Y

Effect : A white silk pushed through a box becomes red, Figure 218. The Secret : Like the silk Cabby, the Imp Box has a secret chamber. However, it works differently. The box, pictured in Figure 219, has a hinged door. The back panel has a hole through it, Figure 220. A circular load chamber, Figure 221, slides freely in the hole in the back panel, Figure 222. The box is yellow and has red circles painted on both sides of the front door and the ends of the load chamber. Preparation : Place a red silk in the load chamber. Presentation : 1. Show box empty, Figure 219. 2. Close front door and push the load chamber into the box, Figure 223. 3. Push a white silk through the opening and into the load chamber. Now pull the red silk into view. 4. After the change, pull load chamber back out of box, Figure 219, and show inside.

Yo! Ho! Ana A Bottle of Rum * L A R S E N

A N D

85 W R I G H T

This effect, manufactured by Thayer, is explained in the Tarbell Course in Magic. Effect: A white silk pushed through an oriental mat becomes blue, then red, and finally a Jolly Rogers flag. On lifting the mat, a bottle of rum is disclosed. Required : A special bottle, Figure 224, a box to hold the bottle, Figure 225, a mat about 10” x 14”, a jolly Rogers Flag Silk, Figure 226, a red, a white, and a blue silk, and a wand. Preparation: Load the bottle as in Figure 227. Place the bottle in the box, then cover box with white silk and mat, Figure 228. Presentation : 1. Pick up mat, show it on both sides, then replace it on the box, Figure 229, as you take away the silk with the left hand. 2. Drop the silk on a table. 3. Pick up mat again, inserting the right second finger into the neck of the bottle. 4. Bring the bottle up behind the mat, Figure 230,and roll the mat around the bottle and into a cylinder, Figure 231. 5. Push the white silk into the cylinder and mouth of the bottle, Figure 232. 6. Produce the blue silk from the bottom of the cylinder. 7. Push the blue silk into the cylinder, Figure 232. 8. Produce the red silk from the bottom of the cylinder.

9. 10. 11.

12.

Push the red silk into the cylinder, Figure 232. Produce the Jolly Rogers silk, Figure 226, from the bottom of the cylinder. Put the silk aside. Allow the bottle to slip down and out of the cylinder and into the right hand, figure 233.

Color Riddle *

86 G L E N

G R A V A T T

Effect : A red silk pushed through a paper cylinder becomes green. The Secret : To an Al Baker Tube, Figure 30, solder a ‘goose neck’ with a finger clip “A” at one end, Figure 234. Preparation : Load a green silk in the bottom of the tube, Figure 234. Presentation: 1. Take tube, Figure 235, and paper in left hand, Figure 236. 2. With right hand, roll paper into a cylinder, Figure 237. 3. Pass cylinder up through left hand, loading in dye tube, Figure 238, still holding the clip “A” between second and third fingers. 4. Push the red silk down in top of cylinder and into tube, withdrawing the green silk, Figure 239. 5. Pull the cylinder down out of the left hand, leaving the due tube there, Figure 235. 6. Unroll the cylinder, tear up the paper, and place the pieces in the left hand in front of the tube, Figure 240. 7. Lay the paper and tube aside.

The Secret Tube *

L E N

87 J.

S E W E L L

Here is another ‘built in’ dye tube similar to No. 63, TAP – A – COLOR. The details are shown in Figure 241. Effect : A red silk pushed through a cylinder becomes green.

Preparation : Place a green silk in the dye tube. Presentation: 1. Show the paper, Figure 242. 2. Turn the paper over, Figures 243, 244 and 245. 3. Roll the paper around the tube, forming a cylinder. 4. Push the red silk into the cylinder and tube, ejecting the green silk. 5. Unroll the cylinder, and by reversing the moves used earlier, show the paper on both sides.

Silk Drinks *

88 T H E O

D O R E

A nice variation is to combine silk dyeing and liquids. Effect : Three white silks become colored, then change to drinks of corresponding colors, Figure 248. The Secret: The effect depends upon a specia dye tube. Two types are shown in Figures 246 and 247. You also need 3-18” white and 3-18” colored silks. In addition 3 glasses with a drop of concentrated liquor powder in each are needed, Figure 248. The loaded tube is rolled in a paper cylinder prior to presentation. Presentation : 1. Push white silks into bottom of cylinder and tube. 2. Withdraw colored silks from top of cylinder. 3. Push the colored silks into the bottom of the cylinder. 4. Secretly scratch the wax from the hole. 5. Pour the alcohol from the tube into the glasses, making three colored drinks. 5. As you pick up a glass to drink a toast, allow the tube to secretly slide into a hat or black-art well,

Chromatic Conception * J O H N

89 T H O R N T O N

Effect : The colors from three silks leave, dye clear water, then return to the silks again. The Secret : A Phantom Tube (Page 184, Chapter 7, Volume 1) is divided as shown in Figure 249. In addition, a “foo-can” pitcher, Figure 250, double sheet of paper, Figure 251, 3 prepared glasses, Figure 252, 3-12” white and 6-12” colored silks, and a glass water pitcher are needed. Preparation : Place the three white silks in the large load compartment, Figure 249, so you can produce them by one without disturbing the others. Presentation : 11. Show the phantom tube empty. 12. Place a green silk over the faked end, then push it into its compartment, Figure 249,with a wand. 13. Hold the tube over the

green dye, and pour the water through the tube into the glass, Figure 253. 1. Water changes to green liquid as it enters the glass, Figure 253. 2. Remove a white silk from the top of the tube. 3. Show the tube empty. 4. Repeat with the red and the blue silks. 5. Pour all of the colored liquids into the Foo-Can, Figure 250. 6. Form the paper, Figure 251, into a cone, opening “A” uppermost. 7. Push three white silks into compartment “X” through “A”, Figure 251. 9. Crush the cone, the liquid having vanished. 10. Rip the bottom of the cone open and produce the colored silks from compartment “Y”, Figure 251.

Alchemist’s Dream *

J O H N

90 T H O R N T O N

Effect : The colors from four silks leave, dye clear water, then return to the silks again.

Required : In addition to the apparatus shown in Figure 254, four white silks are loaded into compartment “Y”.

Presentation : 2. Pick up and display the foulard. 3. Cover the utility tube (page 330, Volume One) with the foulard, both ends of the tube exposed. 4. Take a red silk, then force it into compartment “X”, Figure 254, with a red liquid. 5. Pour water into tumbler containing the red dye, getting a red liquid. 6. With the wand appear to push the red silk right through the tube. Instead, the wand goes into compartment “Y”, and pushes the first white silk into view. 7. Withdraw the water silk. 8. Repeat with the remaining three colored silks. 9. Pour the colored liquids into the special pitcher, Figure 254. 10. Push the white silks, one by one, back into the original compartment “Y”. 11. Take the special pitcher and pour clear water into the glass pitcher

1. Whip away the foulard, showing the Utility Tube to be empty.

Silks And Spirits

91

R I C H A R D

L.

P I S E R

Effect : A sheet of paper is formed into a cylinder around a glass of milk. Three red silks pushed into the cylinder emerge white. The glass, when removed, contains red wine. The Secret: Figure 255 explains everything. The white silks behind the water give the effect of milk. When the red silks replace the white ones, the water appears to be red wine.

Al Baker’s Routine *

92 A L

B A K E R.

Perhaps the most popular of all routines is Al Bakers, using the tube he designed, Figure 30. Effect: White silks become colored when pushed thru a paper cylinder.

Required: Dye tube, Figure 30, 3-15” white and 2-15” colored silks; a sheet of paper 8” x 10”. Preparation: 1. Load two colored silks into the open end of the tube, Figure 256. 2. Place the tube on the table, Figure 257. 3. Lay the white silks over the tube, Figure 258. 4. Put the paper over the silks, Figure 259.

Presentation : 15. Pick up the paper and show it on both sides. 16. Lay the paper back in place, Figure 260, as you remove the silks, Figure 261. 17. Place the silks in the right coat pocket, Figure 262.

6. Pick up the tube and paper, Figure 263, and form the cylinder, Figure 264 and 265. 7. Holding the tube and cylinder, Figure 266, insert a white silk into their ends. 8. Show the right hand empty. 9. Take the tube in the right hand, Figure 267, and show the left hand empty. 10. Take the tube and cylinder in the left hand again, Figure 266. 11. Remove a second white silk from the coat pocket and place it in the bottom of the tube and cylinder. 12. Repeat steps 6 and 7 above. NOW FOR THE STEAL ! 13. As the left hand is shown empty, step 7, allow the tube to slide part way out of the cylinder, Figure 268

14. Now take the cylinder into the left hand, Figure 269, leaving the tube in the right hand, Figure 270.

1. Go to the right pocket with the right hand to get the last white silk, leaving the tube in the pocket. 2. Tie the last white silk around the cylinder, Fig. 271. 3. Hand the cylinder (now containing two solid colored silks) to a spectator. 4. Have the spectator blow the silks into the air or eject them from the cylinder with a wand. 5. Untie white silk and show paper freely on both sides.

Benny Surprise *

93 J O H N

B R A U N

Effect : Three white silks are dyed then change into a bunny (rabbit) silk. Required : A red, a blue, and 4-18” white silks, a Rice’s Rabbit Silk’ a John Braun dye tube, Figure 31; a 14” square of stiff paper; a wand,

Preparation : Load a red, white, and blue silk, then the Rabbit silk, into the tube, trap-fold, Figure 256. Place tube, wand, paper, and three silks on table, Figure 272. Presentation : 5. Take the white silks at corners “A” in the left hand, count the silks as you place them in the right. 6. Take the paper at “X” in the left hand. Take the paper away as the right hand drops the silks over the tube, Figure 273. 7. Note position of corners “A”, Figure 9. With the cylinder in the left hand, take the silks and tube in the right, Figure 275. NOW FOR A BEAUTIFUL MOVE ! 10. Shave the tube and part of the silks into the bottom of the cylinder, Figure 276, remarking, “Some magician’s place all three silks into the cylinder at one time, However, I prefer to dye my silks one at a time.” 11. Withdraw the white silks from the cylinder, leaving the dye tube loaded within. 12. With the wand push the white silk into the cylinder; have the children say the magic wards “Hocus Pocus”, and force the red silk out of the top of the cylinder.

the magic word said. Out comes a second silk, but still white. 1. Continue with the third white silk, dyeing it blue ala “Hocus Pocus.” 2. Insert the three as one into the cylinder and tube and produce the Bunny Silk. 3. While displaying the silk allow the tube to slip into a hat, Figure 210, or into a black-art well. 4. Unroll the empty cylinder.

Mismade Flag

94

This effect is attributed to several magicians, so the actual inventor cannot be named. Effect : Three silks change into an American Flag after a ‘mistake’ (?) has been corrected, Figure 279. Required : A red, a white, and a blue 18” silk; a mismade flag; a 16” x 24” American Flag , a John Braun dye tube, Figure 31 ; a piece of stiff paper and a wand. Preparation : Load the mismade flag and perfect flag into the dye tube, trap fold, Figure 256. Place the silks over the tube, Figure 258, then the paper, Figure 259.

Presentation : 1. Show silks and paper, Figures 260-263, then form a cylinder around the cylinder, Figures 264-265. 2. Tuck the three silks part way into the cylinder, Figure 277. 3. Reach for the wand and 4. Push the red and white silk into the tube with the wand. 5. Tap the cylinder and the mismade flag (minus the blue field) emerges, Figure 278. 6. Discover the blue silk on the floor. 7. Place mismade flag and blue silk in the cylinder and the tube. 8. Tap the cylinder and produce the perfect American Flag, Figure 279. 9. While displaying the flag allow the tube to slip into a hat, Figure 210. Note: Silk King Studios markets a Junior Mismade Flag of a smaller size which can be used with an Al Baker dye tube.

R d G

Mi

d Fl

This effect is basically the same as No. 94. However, a Red Cross silk, Figure 280, is used instead of a Mismade Flag, Figure 278. Step 5, Effect No. 94, you produce the Red Cross silk (instead of the Mismade Flag), expecting to find a perfect American Flag. Now, starting with step No. 6, Effect No. 94, finish the effect.

95

Deluxe Mismade Flag *

H A R O L D

96 R.

R I C E

Effect No. 94 (or 95) can be combined with a standard dyeing of the silks to make a deluxe effect. In addition to the mismade (or the red cross) and the regular flag, load a red, a white, and a blue 18” silk into the dye tube. Presentation : 1. Push a white silk into the cylinder, say the “magic words” and the silk emerges red. 2. Repeat with the second silk, forget to say the “magic words”, and you get a silk still white. 3. Now dye a third white silk blue, using the “magic words”. 4. With a red, white, and a blue silk, present effect No. 94, MISMADE FLAG (or effect No. 95, RED CROSS MISMADE FLAG.)

Mismade Rainbor *

C A R Y L

97 F L E M I N G

Caryl Fleming gave me this effect for my exclusive use in 1939. Effect : In blending 12” solid color red, yellow, and green silk into an 18” ‘rainbow” silk, the performer accidentally (?) drops the red silk. The 18” ‘rainbow’ silk is produced, but minus the red part of the design, Figure 281. The red silk is discovered on the floor, then placed in the paper cylinder with the ‘mismade’ rainbow ! The finished rain bow silk now emerges from the other end of the

The Secret : The working is the same as No. 94, but uses a mismade and a perfect rainbow, Figures 281 and 282, instead of a mismade and perfect Flag, Figure 278 & 279.

Sno-White and The Seven Dwarfs * T H E L M A

98

R I C E

The clever magician can create timely effects employing a dye tube and some of the principles given earlier. For example, the following was worked out when Disney’s movie Sno-White was sweeping the country. Effect : A story about Sno-White, hidden by the Dwarfs from the wicked Queen, thena sucker finish ! Required ; An Al Baker tube, sheet of stiff paper, a wand, and silks as shown in Figure 283. Preparation : Load the “Gone” and “red-white” silks into the tube, Figure 284.

Presentation : (The Al Baker routine, No. 92, is used.) 4. Sno-White (white silk) is taken into the woods to be killed. 5. She escapes and enters the home of Dwarfs ( cylinder and dye tube). 6. The Queen, green with envy (green silk), learns of Sno-Whites freedom and enters the woods to find her. 7. Push the green silk into the cylinder and dye tube. 8. Sno-White cries out for the dwarfs. 9. Steal the tube, ala Al Baker, and go to the right coat pocket to get the Dwarfs streamer. 10. Leave the dye tube in the coat pocket and bring out the Dwarfs streamer. 11. A corner of the white silk (red-white) is brought into view at the to of the cylinder and the corner of the green (really GONE silk) at the bottom, Figure 285. 12. The Dwarfs see (?) Sno-White and the Queen, and, joining hands, encircle them. (Tie streamer around center of cylinder.) 13. Then they summon the handsome prince in his scarlet (red) cloak. 14. He is invisible, so you can’t see him. 15. He rushes to the cylinder to kill the Queen and save Sno-White. 16. Tuck white and green corners, Figure 285, back into the cylinder. 17. With the Queen dead, the prince becomes visible, and emerges joined with Sno-White. 18. Withdraw the red-white silk and display it, Figure 286. 19. This also brings out a corner of the GONE silk as the corners of the two silks were twisted together earlier, Figure 284. 20. State that the Queen ( green) is “G-O-N-E”! 21. Audience notes green corner and cries out.

1. Reach in opposite of cylinder and get second green corner. 2. Holding diagonal green corner, Figure 287, give the silk a circular motion until cylinder unrolls and drops to the floor. 3. Display silk, Figure 288. Queen actually has gone ! Note : Sno-White is but one of dozens of dye tube effects that can be built around current events or topics of interest. A number

Half-Way Dyeing * C.

99 S T E F F E N E S E N

Although Steffensen uses this idea as a complete effect (using an Ideal Color-Change tube, Chapter 12) , I suggest using it to conclude a standard dyeing effect. Let us assume you are dyeing white silks various solid colors. Then you will need a red-white silk, Figure 289. The special silk, the last to leave the dye tube, should have been loaded to emerge red part first, Figure 290. During the regular dyeing performer explains that the silks change color “just” half way” thru the tube. After pushing the last white silk into the cylinder, steal the dye tube. Now open the cylinder and show it contains a half dyed silk, Figure 291.

Convincing Dyeing * E.

M.

100 R O B E R T S,

J R.,

D D S

Not a trick, but a subtle wrinkle that can be incorporated in silk dyeing. The last silk to emerge from the cylinder is shown in Figure 292. The effect is that the last silk pushed thru the cylinder does not dye. (Actually you pushed a white silk into the cylinder and dye tube. The blue-white silk emerges, the white corner showing at the top of the cylinder, Figure 293. Now steal the tube.) Push the white tip back down into the top of the cylinder; roll the tip between the thumb and first finger, forming a small ball. At the same time shake the cylinder to force the blue silk up and into view. Withdraw the blue silk, Figure 294, which apparently is now dyed as desired.

Double Dyed *

101 K O L M A

Effect: A red silk in a cylinder held by a spectator changes places with a white silk in a cylinder held by a second spectator. Required : Two Al Baker Dye Tubes (Figure 30) , 3-18” white and 3-18” red silks ; two pieces of stiff paper. Preparation : Load a white silk in one tube; a red in the other. Place the papers over the tubes, Figure 295. Presentation: 1. Roll paper around dye tube containing red silk. 2. Push a white silk into cylinder and tube. 3. Steal the tube, then reach on the table for a second white silk, leaving the tube behind. 4. Wrap the white silk around the cylinder which is then given to a spectator to hold. 5. Pick up two red silks and place them part way in the right coat pocket. 6. Roll the second paper around the dye tube (white silk). 7. Push a red silk into the cylinder and dye tube. 8. Steal the tube ala Al Baker, reach into coat pocket for a second red silk, and leave dye tube behind. 9. Wrap red silk around cylinder and give to spectator to hold. 10. Command the silks to change places. 11. Have spectators remove outside silks (of identifying l ) d ll l d f d lk h h d

Sy-Se Silk Routine *

W.

102 J.

S Y K E S

Effect : Two red and two greens silks change places; a third red and green silk vanish ; then all six silks are found tied together in alternating red - green fashion. Required : Two Al Baker dye tubes (Figure 30) ; six 12” red and six 12” green silks; a vanisher ; two sheets of stiff paper, and two stands to hold the cylinders, Figure 296. Half of a dress snap is sewed to the corner of a red silk, the other half to the corner of a green silk, Figure297. Preparation : Tie a red silk between two green and load the three into a dye tube; treat two red and a green in the same fashion, and load these into the second tube. The faked green and red (Figure 297) are at the ends for a reason better understood later. The remaining six silks are on the table. Presentation: 1. Display the 3 red silks, then place them in the left coat pocket. 2. Repeat with the 3 green silks, placing them in the right coat pocket. 3. Load a loaded green-red-green tube into a cylinder. 4. Push two green silks into the cylinder and tube.

1. Steal the tube in the right hand (ala Al Baker) and remove the remaining green silk from the pocket, leaving the tube behind. 2. Place the cylinder in a holder and drape the green silk over it to indicate the color, Figure 298. 3. Repeat with the remaining (red – green – red) tube, step 3 thru 6 above. This time the tube is stolen with the left hand. 4. Cylinders are now as in Figure 299. 5. Command the silks to change places, then pull the corners into view to prove the transposition, Figure 300. 6. Push the two cylinders together, Figure 301. 7. Remove the identifying silks and vanish them (Chapter 8, Volume 1). 8. Pull the silks from the cylinders to find the two

Fan and Silks

103 A.

C.

T H O M P S O N

This is the usual silk dyeing but with a different vanish for the dye tube. The Secret : Attach a cloth “black art well” to the back of a fan, Figure 303. Presentation : 1. Push the white silks, one by one, into the cylinder and tube. 2. Pick up the fan with the right hand and fan the cylinder held in the left. 3. Transfer the fan to the left and, Figure 304, and allow the tube to slide from the cylinder into the well on the back of the fan. 4. Show the right hand empty, take the fan and lay it aside. 5. Produce the colored silks by tapping the cylinder against the right finger.

Redhill Silk Dyeing * F.

h

N.

104 R O T H E N

B E R G

I saw Redhill do his silk dyeing in New York City and was d ith hi i i t i l d hi ti h

Effect : Performer tucks two white silks into a cylinder, then blows thru the cylinder. One silk emerges colored…one still white, Figure 306. The undyed white, when pushed thru the performer’s hand, emerges colored. Required : Three white and two colored 18” silks ; an Al Baker dye tube, Figure 30; an Ideal tube, Figure 2, Chapter 13; a sheet of stiff paper ; a fan. Preparation : Load a red and a white silk in the Baker tube, then roll the tube into a cylinder. Load a green silk in the Ideal tube, and place the tube in the left vest pocket. Place the fan in the left coat pocket. Presentation ; Redhill doesn’t show the cylinder empty.l He merely picks up the cylinder, andf licking his finger, Figure 305, says “an empty tube.”

1. Push the white silks, one at a time, into the bottom of the cylinder and tube. 2. Transfer the cylinder to the right hand, getting the tube in the left ala Al Baker. 3. Reach for the fan with the left hand, leaving the tube in the coat pocket. 4. Fan imaginary color into the cylinder. 5. Blow the silks into the air, Figure 306. 6. Show the cylinder

1. green (as explained in Chapter 13). Note : Redhll credits Ade Duval with the idea of one silk remaining white.

Great Silk Blowing Aot

D A V E N

105 P O R T

This act combines several effects and ideas explained earlier in this chapter. Effect : A white silk blown through a cylinder emerges colored, Figure 307. This is repeated several times. A quantity of small white silks blown through a cylinder at one time emerge colored, Figure 308. One white silk failed to dye, so, to complete the act, performer pushes this silk through his hand. Silk emerges colored. Required : A Justiniani tube, Figure 160, loaded as in Effect No. 72; an Al Bkaer tube, Figure 30, loaded with 5 colored and a white 12” silk. An Ideal color change tube, Figure 2, Chapter 13, loaded with a 12” red silk. Two sheets of paper ; a wand. Presentation : Part One : 6. Present Effect No. 72…Blow-it, Figure 307. Part Two : 7.Load the Al Baker tube into a second sheet of paper.

1. Tube 6-12” silks into the cylinder and tube. 2. Steal the tube from the cylinder. 3. Blow the five colored and one 12” white silk into the air, Figure 308. Part Three: 4. Discover the one 12” silk white. 5. Obtain the Ideal tube and dye the white silk red.

Evolution Of a Rabbit *

C A R L Y L E

This effect appeared in Volume 3 of the Tarbell course. Effect : Three white 18” silks are dyed red, white and blue. Then a fourth 18” silk, Figure 309, is introduced. The performer, as in No. 94, Mismade Flag, accidentally (?) drops the rabbit silk on the floor while pushing the red, white, and blue silks into the cylinder. The result is a picture of a silk with a top hat, Figure 310. Discovering the rabbit silk, Figure 309, an the floor, the performer pushes it (the hot silk, Figure 310) through the cylinder, and a Rabbit In Hat silk, Figure 311, emerges. Required : A red and a blue 18” silk, 418” white silks; a sheet of

104

stiff paper 12” x 14”;18” picture silks Figure 309 and 310; a 36” Rabbit In Hot silk, Figure 311; a Braun Dye tube, Figure 31.

Presentation : This method employed has already been explained earlier in this chapter in Effect No. 94 and 96, so it won’t be repeated here. Note :

Carlyle completes the effect by producing a rabbit from a top hat, using the rabbit silk as a foulard. For details see Vol. 3 of Tarbell course.

A Romance In Silk * L.

107 L.

I R E L A N D

Complete routines using dyeing apparatus can be arranged. Ireland’s routine is an example.

Effect : Performer produces two silks, Mr. Brown and Miss Green. After selecting an apartment, they are married, leave the church, jump into a taxi, and disappear. We find them later back in their apartment / Mrs. Brown’s mother, Mrs. Green appears (as mother – in law do), takes an airplane, vanishes in the clouds, and we find her tied between the Browns in their apartment. To escape mother-inlaw, the Browns vacate, moving to a home in the suburbs. And when we visit them again they are found with a family of their own ! Required : Figure 312 shows two tables (A and B) set for the effect. Paper covering the dye tube (table B) has the front of a church drawn on one side, and the back on the other. In addition to the apparatus pictured, an Ireland

Preparation : Study Figure 132 carefully. The secret compartment, Figure 327, of the hose contains the 3-3” silks tied between 2-18” brown silks. Two 18” brown silks are in the Al baker dye tube; a green and a browns ilk are under the edge of the tray. In the goblet inside of the cylinder are two brown and a green silk tied and rolled into a ball. A green silk is loaded into the “Come and Go” gimmick, Figure 313. Place a wedding ring in your lower right vest packet, place the rice fake in the right coat pocket, and attach the cloth pull up the left sleeve.

Presentation : 1. Move tray, Figure 312, palming green and brown silks, Figure 315. 2. Release roll of silks, Figure 316, then shake into view. 3. Present Mr. Brown and Miss Green (silks produced). 4. They become engaged (knot the silks together) and are laid aside temporarily. 5. Explain that Mr. Brown and Miss Green engaged you to locate an apartment for them. 6. Lift the cylinder, Figure 312, palming the three hidden silks which were resting in the glass, Figure 317. 7. Pickup the cylinder and show the glass (the apartment) empty, Figure 318. 8. Put the cylinder back, secretly dropping the three palmed silks back into the glass. 9. State that the couple like the apartment and decide to rent it. 10. Now for the marriage, Pick up the sheet of paper and loaded dye tube, Figure 312. Show paper front and back (calling attention to front and back having pictures of the front and back of church), Figure 319 and 320, then roll the paper into a cylinder.

11. Pick up the two tied silks previously laid aside, and push them into the church (cylinder and dye tube).

12. Reach into the right coat packet to get the ring and secretly palm the tube filled with rice. At the same time allow the dye tube to slip into the left packet, Figure 321. Now find the ring in the right vest pocket instead of the coat pocket. 13. Drop the ring into the cylinder and shake out the silks, displaying the two brown silks (Mr. And Mrs. Brown) tied together. Toss the empty church (paper cylinder) aside. 14. Break the paper on the end of the gimmick and toss rice over the newlyweds. 15. Secretly drop rice fake into right coat pocket. 16. The happy couple jumped into a taxi (changing bag) and disappeared. Show the bag empty and place it on the table “B”, Figure 312. 17. At the same time steal the “Come-Go” gimmick, Figure 313, into the right hand, Figure 322. 18. Holding the fake, Figure 323, press the center, Figure 324, forcing the green silk into view, Figure 325. 19. Thus Mrs. Green, the mother-in-law, comes into the story. 20. Now Mrs. Green boards a plane and vanishes. To do this, get the pull into position, Figure 325, then vanish the “Come-Go” fake and silk in it, Figure 326. 21. But as might be expected, Mrs. Green is found between Mr. And Mrs. Brown. Pick up the cylinder, Figure 312, remove the three silks from the glass, and display the green silk tied between the two brawns. 22. So we leave the unhappy couple and the unwelcome visitor for the time being. With cylinder placed back over the glass again, roll the three silks into a small ball, then drop the ball into the cylinder and top of glass, Figure 312. 23. Finally, the couple decide to do something about it and

mother-in-law are gone. 25. Hold the cylinder over the changing bag now on table “B”, Figure 312, and allow the 3 silks to secretly fall into the changing bag. Show the cylinder empty. 26. Open the house and find Mr. and Mrs. with their three little Browns !

Pusha Da Push * P R O F.

J A C K

108 M I L L E R

Here is the effect dozens of performers sought and which my good friend Jack Miller gave me as an exclusive for this volume ! Effect And Patter : The effect can be best explained by presenting the patter first. Professor Miller, assuming the roll of a jolly Italian, says : My frans, I tink I maka wan treck You betcha my life, I foola you queeck I rolla da pape, now watcha me close (1. Roll paper.) I fall all you peoples in from ‘ of you nose (2. Pull out green silk from top) I taka da green, I pusha da push (3. Push green in bottom) I cleans da pipe, I cleana da mush (4. Pull green from top, wipe face) Now watcha me close, I maka heem hide (5. Put green in upper corner of trouser pocket) Hesa no inna poc… hesa jump up inside (6. Show pocket empty and take duplicate green from bottom of cylinder) Dosa green hank, hesa no green no more (7. Push green back in bottom of cylinder0 I foola you peoples, but don’t you get sore (8. Pull red out from top of cylinder.) De green hesa here, inside my pants (9. Produce green from pocket) I foola you all when I getta da chance ! (10. Place green silk over left arm)

I pusha da push desa red uppa dere ( 11. Push red silk in bottom of cylinder) I grabba da whitea wan fruma de air (12. Grab imaginary white silk from the air) I pusha da white, I pusha da blue (13. Push imaginary white and real green in bottom of cylinder ) You don’ watcha close, den I foola you. Pastafasula ! Now whatsa mat ? Maybe you donna believe disa wop You tink I don’ gotta Red, White, and Blue… Justa minutes an I show heem to you! Whots a mot ! (14. Produce the flag ) Required : An Al Baker dye tube, Figure 30, covered with a piece of brown paper glued around its outside. A 12” red silk; 2-12” green silks ; a 12” x 18” silk flag. A stiff piece of wrapping paper 8” x 8.” Preparation : Load the flag inside the tube, starts last. Then add silks, Figure 331-A. Place the paper on the table, then tube on top of it, Fig. 331-B. Presentation : Pick up the paper and tube, Figure 332. Holding the paper in the left hand, bend the tube back against the wrist, Figure 333. Display the paper. Now, with tube behind right wrist, turn the paper over and show back to audience,

Figure 334. Next, bring the paper and tube into Figure 335 position. (From here on numbers correspond to those in the patter. 1. Roll the paper around the tube. 2. Produce the green silk from the top of the cylinder, Figure 336. 3. Push the green silk into the bottom of the cylinder, Figure 337. 4. Pull the second green silk from the top of the cylinder, Figure 336. 5. Push the green silk into the upper corner of the trousers pocket, Figure 338. 6. Show the pocket empty, Figure 339,and produce the green silk from the bottom of the cylinder, Figure 340. 7. Push the green silk into the bottom of the cylinder again, Figure 337. 8. Pull the red silk from the top of the cylinder, Figure 336. 9. Produce the green silk from the trouser pocket, Figure 341. 10. Drape the silk over the left arm. 11. Push the red silk into the bottom of the cylinder, Figure 337. 12. Pretend to produce the white silk from the air. 13. Push the imaginary white silk and the real green into h b f h l d F 33 As you produce the flag in the left hand, open the cylinder so as to get the dye tube into Figure 342 position. After the flag is removed, get the paper and tube into the Fig. 333 position. Drop the right hand with paper and tube to the right side and take your bow.

Blow Dye *

109 A D E

D U V A L

Starting on page 791 I gave you Duval’s SILK BLOWING. This is his latest method as marketed by Louis Tannen. Effect : After proving a paper cylinder empty by blowing a white silk thru it, three white silks, blown one at a time thru the cylinder, emerge colored. Required : A Willmann sliding cup dye tube with a hook at one end and a thick felt washer at the other, Figure 343; a wand with grooves 3” from either end, Figure 344; and a cylinder 2” in diameter and 15” long, formed from a piece of two ply cardboard, Figure 166. Seven 18” silks (4 white and 3 colored) are also needed. Preparation : Into end “X” of the tube (Figure 343) load one by one three colored then one white silk. “Trap Fold” each silk, Page 34, Chater3, Volume 1, before placing them in the tube. Place the apparatus on your table as shown in FIGURE 345, center of the white silk tucked over the end of the hook, Figure 346.

Presentation : 1. Take the cylinder in your left hand, a white silk (1) in your right. 2. Place the silk back on the table and take the wand in your right hand. 3. To prove the cylinder empty, drop it over wand which is rotated. Now, withdraw your wand and place it on your table. 4. Taking the silk and tube in your right hand as shown in Figure 347, pick them up, Figure 348. 5. Bring the cylinder up behind the silk, Figure 349, until the hook catches on the edge of the paper cylinder, Figure 350, gripping the tube thru the cylinder with the left hand. 6. Without hesitating, continue to tuck the white silk into cylinder and the cup portion of the dye tube. 7. Now take the wand near its top in your right hand, Figure 351. Note thumb position. 8. Push the wand into the cylinder (and tube) until the thumb touches the hook on the metal tube, Figure 352. Th 3” f d i h b i j h

9. Remove wand, put cylinder to your mouth, and give a stout blow. The white silk flies from the end of the cylinder and into the air. It appears you have blown a white silk thru the empty (?) cylinder. 10. Catch the silk with your right hand as it falls, then tuck it into the tube end of the cylinder, using the wand, Figures 351 and 352. 11. This time a colored silk is secretly ejected into the cylinder. 12. Blow out the silk, catch it with your right hand, and place it on the table. 13. Repeat with another white silk. 14. Conclude with the last white silk, this time forcing, the wand deep into the tube to be certain the last colored silk is completely ejected. 15. Blow the last colored silk into the air. Catch it in your right hand, then, at the same time, bring the cylinder into Figure 354 position. 16. Drape the center of the silk over the tube end of the cylinder and display it, rotating the cylinder, Figure 355. 17. Nip hook thru silk and lift tube and silk out of cylinder, Figure 356. 18. Place the silk and hidden tube on the table with the other silks.

REEL MAGIC Introduction :

1

The possibilities afforded with the introduction of the reel into silk magic are almost unlimited. Petrie – lewis Manufacturing Company is among the leading manufacturers of reels. Of the various P and L reels shown in Figure 1, the Utility Reel is recommended for most of the effects to follow.

Rolling a Silk *

H A R O L D

2 R.

R I C E

I find sp few magicians know the correct method of rolling a silk, rope fashion. The effects in this chapter and several to follow require proper handling, so I will pause here to give this necessary instruction. Allowing the silk to sag as in Figure 2, many magicians twirl both arms in a circular fashion, Figure 3, as though skipping rope. This awkward approach is unsatisfactory Instead, hold the silk taut and at an angle, Figure 4. Holding the left hand still and the silk taut at all times, twirl the right end of the silk, Figure 5. The silk rolls rapidly into a tight rope-like streamer, Figure 6.

The Serpent Silk *

3 A L B E N I C E

This effect, marketed by U. F. Grant in the 30’s at $10, was the topic of discussion in every magic circle. It is still a hit today. Effect : A 24” silk, when knotted, unties itself. Required : A Pand L reel attached to a 24” silk of diagonal pattern, Figure 7. Presentation : 1. Hold silk with reel clipped between 2nd and 3rd fingers, Figure 8. 2. Take end “B” and twirl this end of the silk until tightly rolled around itself, ropelike fashion, Figure 9. (Note that about I” of the thread is pulled from the reel.) 3. Form a loop around the left wrist, Figure 10. 4. Take “B” in the right hand, “A” in the left, Figure 11. 5. Withdraw the left wrist, pulling “A” thru the loop, forming a loose knot, Figure 12. 6. Display the knot, Figure 13. Right thumb presses thread against silk to prevent the reel from drawing in the thread. 7. Release the pressure on the thread until end “A” moves up to the knot, Figure 14. 8. Apply pressure on the thread again. 9. Release the pressure, knot untying, Figure 15. 10. When corner “A” reaches the reel, Figure 15, release

Rice’s Serpent Streamer * H A R O L D

4 R.

R I C E

Harold Sterling and Mike Kanter suggested making a narrow silk streamer dyed like a snake. This streamer, Figure 17, is used for knot flourishes and Albenice’s Serpent Silk. Unlike the 24” square, Figure 7, Rice’s streamer needn’t be twisted before the knot is tied. Weighing considerably less, the streamer never weakens the reel through constant use.

Reel Magic

5

In 1941 Louis Tannen published REEL MAGIC, a collection of Albenice’s effects. Mr. Tannen has given me his permission to include the silks portion of the book in this chapter. Reel enthusiasts will find other outstanding effects in REEEL MAGIC.

Visible Self-Tying Silks **

A L B E N I C E

Effect : A 24” silk knots itself. Required : Real and silk, Figure 7. Presentation : 1. Hold reel and silk as in Figure 18. 2. Take corner “A” in the left hand and pull the silk

6

the right thumb and second finger, holding the thread as illustrated, Figure 19. 3. Reach between the thread and silk, Figure 20, with the left hand, and pull end “B” through, Figure 21. 4. Slightly release the pressure on the thread at “X”, Figure 21, at the same time turning your right hand downwards, and the silk will knot itself, Figure 22.

The Naughty Knot *

7 A L B E N I C E

Effect : Another version of Albenice’s SERPENT SILK Required : A reel attached to a 24” silk, Figure 7. Presentation 1. 2. 3.

: Tie the silk, Figure 8 through 12. Silk is now held in a horizontal position, Figure 23. As it is necessary to exchange ends of the silk, take both in the right hand, Figure 24, as you show the left hand empty. 4. Then take end “B” in the left hand, Figure 25. 5. Release the thread and end “B”. 6. End “A” unties the knot and flies back into the right

Visible “40th Century” Silks *

8

A L B E N I C E

(Also marketed as “Visible 20th Century Silks’) Effect : A red silk vanishes visibly, and in the same instant, reappears between two yellow silks previously shown unprepared, Figure 35. Required : Two reels, two 18” red and two 18” yellow silks, and a special vanisher, made from a strip of flesh colored elastic about 42” long, Figure 27. Preparation : Attach two diagonal corners of a red silk to the reels, Figure 28. Remove the coat. Attach the pull as illustrated, Figure 29. Leaving the shirt sleeve rolled up, put the coat on again. Accordian pleat the the red silk, Figure 30, then place it under the left armpit, Figure 31. Also place the reels in the positions shown.. Finally, take the two yellow and the remaining red silk in the left hand.

Presentation : 1. Display the red silk and place it over the right shoulder. 2. Display a yellow silk and place it in the breast pocket. 3. Finally display second yellow silk, Figure 32.

5. At the same time get loop “A” of the pull into Figure 33 position. 6. Take the center of the red silk thru the loop, dropping the loop over the silk, Figure 34. 7. Drop the right hand and silk to your right side. 8. Now release visible red silk. 9. At the same time, raise and extend both arms, shoulder height. 10. The red silk is pulled up the right sleeve, and the second red appears between the two yellow, Figure 35.

Penetro *

Effect : A silk penetrates a metal ring, Figure 40. Required : An 18” silk, a 6” metal ring and a Utility Reel.

Preparation : Attach a corner of the silk to the reel, Figure 7. Presentation : 1. With silk and reel as in Figure 36, display the silk. 2. Place the ring in front of the silk and in the right hand, Figure 37. 3. Reach through the ring with the left hand, take “ ” f h lk

9

through the ring. Then place it in the right hand again, Figure 39. 4. Take the ring in the left hand and move it up and down the silk five or six inches two or three times, Figure 38. (This draws the thread in and out of the reel.) 5. Stop about 5” below the right hand, release corner “A”, at the same time moving the ring to the left. Corner “A” is pulled back into the right hand again b th l

The Penetrable Silk *

10 S P A L D I N G

Effect : A silk penetrates various objects at the performer’s will, Figures 46,50,53,67 and 75. Required : A reel attached to a 24” silk, Figure 7, and a walking stick. Presentation : PART 1 : UPWARD PENETRATION 1. Hold the silk and reel as in Figure 41. 2. Take corner “A” into the left hand, Figure 42. 3. Have the assistant place the walking stick in place, Figure 43. 4. Now pass corner “A” down under the walking stick, then place it in the right hand, Figure 44. 5. Assume Figure 45 position. 6. Release corner “A”,

PART 2 : DOWNWARD PENETRATION . 1. Hold the silk and reel as in Figure 41. 2. Take corner “A” into the left hand, Figure 42, and have the walking stick put in place by assistant, Figure 47. 3. Place corner “A” in the right hand, Figure 48. 4. Assume Figure 49 position. 5. Lowering both arms, release corner “A”. 6 Silk t t (?) th lki ti k Fi 50

PART 3 : UPWARD – ONE HAND. This effect is the same as Number 1, but only one hand is used during the penetration. 1. Execute the first five steps of No. 1, Figures 41 thru 45. 2. With the hands in Figure 51 position, bring corner “B” between the first and second fingers of the right hand, Figure 52.

4. several inches, releasing the pressure on the reel and corner “A”. 5. Raise the right arm immediately, silk having penetrated (?) the cane, Figure 53. PART 4 : SILK ONTO CANE. A silk becomes looped around a cane. 1. Taking the silk as in Figure 41, assume Figure 42 position. 2. Now execute Figures 47, 48 and 49. 3. Next, place corner “B” in the right hand, assuming Figure 54. 4. Toss the loop held by the left hand in toward the right hand. At the same time release the pressure on h l d “ ”

PART 5: UPWARD PENETRATION . (Alternate Method) 1. Hold the silk and reel as in Figure 41. 2. Toss the silk over the right hand, Figure 56. 3. Taking corner “A” in the left hand, separate the left and right hands, Figure 57. 4. Continue until Figure 58 i i i h d

5. Now continue, switching right hand fingers to the Figure 59 position. 6. After displaying the silk, Figure 59, drop corner “A”, Figure 60. 7. Assistant puts the cone in place, Figure 61. 8. Place corner “A” in the right hand, Figure 62. 9. Take corner “B” in the left hand. Separating the hands, assume Figure 45 position. 10. Drop the right hand on inch or two, release corner “A” and pressure on the reel, then raise both hands. 11. The silk has penetrated (?) the cane, Figure 46.

PART 6: UPWARD – ONE HAND (Alternate Method). 1. With the silk as in Figure 41, carry out steps 1 thru 8 of Part 5 just explained. 2. Drop the right hand an inch or two, releasing the pressure on the reel. Then raise the right arm, displaying the silk free of the cane, Figure 53. PART 7 : UPWARD THRU HOOP. In addition to the reel and silk, a lightweight 8½” hoop, Figure 63, is needed. 1. With reel and silk in Figure 41 position, place the hoop over the left wrist, Figure 63. 2. Execute Figures 56 thru 59. Silk and hoop are now in Figure 64 position. 3. Raise the left arm, then lower it again after the hoop has passed down to the center of the silk, Figure 65. 4. Now transfer corner “A” to the right hand, Figure 66. 5. Drop the right hand an inch or two, release corner “A”, and pressure on the reel, then raise the right hand. 6. Silk has penetrated (?) the hoop, Figure 67.

PART 8: DOWNWARD PENETRATION (Alternate Method) 1. Assume Figure 41 position. 2. Toss the silk over the first finger, Figure 56. 3. At the same time take corner “A” in the left hand, then separate the hands, Figure 57. 4. Now slip four fingers of the left hand between the silk and thread as you continue to pull the silk thru the right hand. 5. When Figure 69 position is reached, clip corner “B” firmly between the right thumb and first finger of the right hand. 6. Have the assistant insert the cane between the silk and thread, Figure 70, as you bring the silk into Figure 71 vertical position. 7. Change fingers to Figure 72 position. 8. Bring corner “A” up in front of the cane and into Figure 73 position. 9. Take “B” in the left hand and separate the hands, Figure 74. 10. Drop the right hand an inch or two, releasing the

PART 9: SIX ONTO CANE (Alternate Method) 1. Execute steps 1 thru 8 of Part 8 just explained. Silk is now as in Figure 73 position. 2. Now take the center of the silk forward in the left hand, Figure 54. 3. Toss the loop in toward the right hand. At the same time release the pressure on the reel and corner “A”. 4. The silk is now looped around the cone, Figure 55.

Spalding Routine *

11 S P A L D I N G

Spalding finds the following routine effective. Presentation : 1. No. 10, Part 7 – UPWARD THRU A LOOP. 2. No. 10, Part 1 – UPWARD PENETRATION.

3. No. 10, Part 9 – SILK ONTO CARE. 4. No. 10, Part 6 – UPWARD – ONE HAND. Other routines can be arranged by studying the nine parts of No. 10.

Smart Color Change *

N A T

12 L O U I S

Effect : The green corner of a silk becomes red, Figure 80. Required : A 24” silk with corners colored as in Figure 76. A utility reel. Preparation : Attach the thread of the reel to red corner “A”, Figure 77. Presentation : 1. Hold the reel as in Figure 8. 2. Take the red corner “A” in the left hand, drawing it to the left while the right thumb and first finger slide along the hem until the green corner “B” is in the right hand, Figure 77. 3. Drop red corner “A”, Figure 78. 4. Stroke the silk several times, Figure 79. 5 R l h

Rice’s Rabi-Duck *

L O U I S

13 T A N N E N

This is Tonnen’s version of presenting Rabi-Duck with a reel. Effect : A picture of a duck changes to that of a rabbit. Required : A special 18” silk which pictures a duck, Figure 81. When the silk is turned over the duck becomes a rabbit, Figure 82. Preparation : Attach the thread of the utility reel to corner “D” of a silk, Figure 82. Presentation : 1. Hold silk and reel as in Figure 83. 2. Take “D” in left hand, Figure 84. 3. Drop “D”, take “A” in left hand, Figure 85. 4. Display the ‘duck’, Figure 81. 5. Release corner “B” and

Good Night *

C L A T Z Effect: Performer closes by displaying a silk which reads “ THANK YOU”. Suddenly the silk reads “GOOD NIGHT”. Required : An 18” THANK YOU Silk: an 18” GOOD NIGHT silk; a Utility Reel. Preparation : Lay the Good Night silk face down on the floor, Figure 87. Place the Thank You silk, face up , on top o fit, Figure 88. Sew the two together along their four hems. Now attach the thread of the reel to corner “D”, Figure 89. Presentation : 1. Hold silk as in Figure 83. 2. Take “D” in left hand, Figure 84. 3. Drop “D” and take “A” in the left hand, Figure 90. 4. Display the “THANK YOU” side. 5. Release corner “B” and

14

Zebra Silk *

15 T O M

D E T H L E F S E N

Effect : The horizontal stripes in a silk, Figure 92, suddenly become vertical, Figure 93. The Secret : This effect employs the same principle used in No. 13, RICE’S RABI-DUCK. Presentation : Present as illustrated in Figure 83 thru 86.

Color Change Foulard ** F.

B.

M A R T I N E A U

Effect : A red silk with a white border, Figure 94, becomes green & white, Figure 95. Required : A special double 18” silk, red an one side with 2” white borders, green on the other side, with similar white borders. To one corner attach the end of the thread to a Utility Reel, Figure 96. Presentation : Using the RABI-DUCK principle, present as illustrated in Figure 83 thru 86.

16

Impossible Floating Handkerchief * H E N R Y

17

B O H L E N

Effect : A knotted silk remains suspended in mid-air. Required : An 18” silk, a wooden hoop, a spring clip, and utility reel. Preparation : Tie the clip to the end of the thread of the reel. Then tie an addition 8” of thread to the clip, Figure 97. Place this apparatus in your lower right vest packet. Presentation : 1. Pick up the silk and tie a large loose knot in one corner. 2. Steal the reel and white displaying the silk, fasten the clip to the back of the knot. 3. Now separate the hands, Figure 98. 4. Reach to the left and get the hoop, pulling more thread out of the reel, Figure 99. 5. Toss the hoop over the right arm, Figure 100. 6. Take the weight “W” in the right hand and drop the silk from the left, silk suspended in mid-air, Figure 101. 7. Take the hoop in the left hand, and in one rapid motion, pass it down over the silk and to the left, Figure 102. Always keep the hoop in a horizontal position. 8. Retrace the path of the hoop, at the same time allowing the thread to go back into the reel slowly until you reach Figure 103 position. 9. Now drop thread end “W”, Figure 104, and hoop is free to pass for examination. 10. Take the silk above the knot with the left hand, release the spring clip from the knot, and pocket the reel. 11. Toss silk into the audience for examination.

Ring On Silk *

18 H A N S

E

T R I X E R.

Effect : A borrowed ring threads itself on a silk handkerchief. Required ; An 18” white silk, a Utility reel threaded with transparent nylon thread. Preparation: Fasten the end of the thread to a corner of the silk, Figure 105. Presentation : 1. Borrow a wedding ring. 2. Explain you are going to thread the ring on the silk, not as now demonstrated (thread the ring to the center of the silk, Figure 106) , but magically. 3. Push the ring to corner “A” of the silk, Figure 107. 4. Transfer the ring and corner “A” to the left hand, at the same time running the right hand down to corner “B”, Figure 108. 5. Bring corner “B” up with

center folds of the silk, then ask a spectator to hold it, Figure 110. 7. Ask the spectator to drop the ring. 8. Release the pressure on the reel, and corner “A” will be rapidly drawn through the ring and into the right hand as you drop corner “B”. 9. Silk and ring are now as shown in Figure 111. 10. Allow the spectator to remove the ring from the silk.

A “Reel” Trick *

19 E D W I N

T A B O R

Effect : A 3” metal ring moves along a silk, stops at command, then penetrates the silk ! Preparation : Fasten the end of the thread of a Utility reel to a corner of an 18” silk, Figure 105. Presentation : 1. Hold silk and reel as in Figure 41. 2. Take corner “A” in left hand, Figure 42. 3 G th ilk t it t Fi

4. Drop the ring over end “A”, then transfer silk to Figure 113 horizontal position. 5. Allow thread to enter the reel slowly, pulling the ring to the right along the silk until spectator cries “stop”, Figure 114. 6. Explain ring will now penetrate the silk. 7. Release pressure on the reel and end “A” is pulled th h th i hi h d t th fl Fi 115

Lamp Chimney Vanish

N A T E

20 L E I P Z I G

On page 305, Chapter 8, Volume 1, under VANISHES, I gave you Kennard’s Chimney Vanish. Leipzia used a special heavy duty or “lighting pull” reel to obtain the same effect. See the set-up in Figure 116, then refer to Volume 1 for details.

The Floating Silk *

21 M A Z D A H

A number of floating silk routines are possible with a Pocket Reel, Figure 1. The thread runs from the reel in performers pocket, Figure 118, to a table, Figure 119. As the performer steps to the table the reel takes up the slack thread, Figure 122, unless it is clipped between the thumb and finger, Figure 123.

Required : A Pocket Reel, Figure 1, an 18’ silk, a wand, a wooden hoop, and a black pin. Preparation : Arrange silk, pin and hoop on your table as in Figure 117. Place the reel and wand in pockets as in Figure 118. Presentation : 1. Get the button on the end of the reel, Figure 1, in the right 2. Reach for the silk, secretly holing the button under pin, Figure 119. 3. Silk in right hand, step several yards to the right of the table. 4. Tie the silk around the thread in a blow knot, tight enough to keep the silk from slipping when the thread is tipped at an angle. 5. Hold the silk in your left hand, and get the wand in your right, Figure 120. 6. Hook the thread over the left thumb, then raise the left

8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

Snatch the silk from the air with the left hand. Slide the silk along the thread to a new position. Step away from the silk which floats alone, Figure 122. Transfer the wand to the left hand, silk still floating. Grip the thread in the right hand, and move forward, silk falling to the floor, Figure 123. 13. Release the grip on the thread and silk rises to the left hand and wand, Figure 124. 14. Take the silk in the right hand as the left places the wand on the table. 15. Take hoop in the left and cause the silk to float again, Figure 125. 16. Pass the hoop over the silk, hoop now held in both hands, Figure 126. 17. Take the hoop in close to the body, Figure 127. 18. Now reverse the action, replacing the hoop on the table with your left hand as you snatch the silk in your right. 19. Slide the silk along the thread with the right hand until you reach the button. Remove the button from the pin. 20. Take the wand from the table with the left hand. 21. Silk and wand are now as in Figure 128.

27. Transfer the silk to the left hand, holding the wand, then grip the thread with the right hand, Figure 129. 28. Float the silk suspended under the right hand, Figure 130. 29. Snatch the silk in the right hand. 30. Place the wand on the table, at the same time taking the hoop 26. Take the silk in the left hand, thread passing thru the hoop, Figure 131. Note the slack in the thread. 22. Toss the silk to the floor, right fingers gripping the thread, Figure 132. 23. Release the thread, silk floating up through hoop into right hand. 24. Toss the hoop into the audience. 25. Untie the silk, and button on the end of thread files back

Serpent Silk * R.

22 D.

S P R A K E R,

Effect : A serpent (silk) jumps from a basket, thru a hoop, and into the right hand. Silk vanishes and reap-ears in the basket. Required: Two 18” duplicate silks, a reel, a hoop, a basket, and a changing bag (Page 334, Figure 182, Chapter 8, Volume 1). Preparation : Roll one of the silks and pin it to the inside of the basket, Figure 133. Place the second silk, reel attached, Figure 105, in the basket, Figure 133. Presentation ; 1. Pick up the hoop in the left hand, show it, then place it over the right arm. 2. Reach into the basket with the right hand, palm reel, and take corner of silk in finger tips, Figure 134. 3. Transfer the silk to the left hand, Figure 135, then drop the silk back into the basket. 4. Take the hoop in the left hand, Figure 136, and command the silk to rise, Figure 137.

J R.

bag empty, Page 335, Figures 186-190, Chapter 8, Volume 1. 6. Reach into the basket, get the duplicate silk then display it. Show basket to be empty and unprepared.

Kobra *

S E N O R M A L D O Effect : After a spectator ties a knot in the corner of a 36” square, the silk stands erect, much like the deadly kobra ! Required : A reel steel tape measure, with a flat metal base attached, Figure 138, and a 36” pattern silk. Place the reel in the right hip pocket. Presentation : 1. Have a spectator tie a knot near one corner of the silk at “A”. Figure 139. 2. Take corner “A” in the left hand and stroke the silk with your right. 3. Attempt to stand the silk upright on the floor, but silks falls helplessly. 4. Stoop to pick up the silk with the left hand, stealing reel in

23

5. Again stroke the silk, secretly engaging the hook end of the steel tape into the knot. 6. Run the right hand down the silk about 12”, as though stroking the silk, actually pulling about a foot of the tape from the reel, Figure 141. 7. Holding the silk at knot “A”, sit the silk on the floor and it remains upright for about 12” as you make mysterious passes over it, Figure 142. 8. Pick up silk at corner “A”, Figure 139, and stroke the silk again, Figure 141, pulling tape reel down another 12” to 15.” 9. Cause silk to stand erect on floor again, Figure 142. 10. Now take tip of knot in left hand and slowly push the erect silk down to the floor, the tape recoiling itself inside of the case. 11. Pick up the silk, withdraw about 10” of tape, Figure 141, then set the silk on the right hand, Figure 143. 12. Squash the silk and tape and secretly disengage the reel. Toss the knotted silk into audience as the palmed reel is pocketed.

Note : Le Verne Spaulding suggests starting with the reel in a black art well instead of the pocket. After the silk is dropped over reel, it and the reel are moved to another table or to the floor, and the routine presented as explained. At the finish the reel is dropped back into

Ad Infinitum Plus *

R O B E R T

24 H A R B I N

Effect : Each time a red silk is taken from one box and placed in a second it mysteriously returns to the first box. Required : Two identical boxes without tops or bottoms, Figure 145, are fastened to a prepared hollow tray, Figure 146. Figure 147 gives a sectional view of the apparatus, and Figure 148 a top view of the tray. A 12” red silk and a reel are also needed.

Preparation : To the end of the thread of the reel attach a corner of the silk. Place the silk inside of the tray, then close slides. Presentation : 1. Display the apparatus, Figure 149, showing the boxes empty. 2. Reach into the boxes and secretly open the slides. 3. Produce the red silk from the first box, display the silk, then drop it into the second box, Figure 150. 4. Unknown to the audience, the silk passes inside of the tray and back under the first box. 5. Repeat, again producing a silk from the first box and dropping it into the second, Figure 150. 6. This business goes on “ad infinitum”. 7. At the finish, close the slides and show the box empty

REEL-LESS MAGIC . . . Introduction

1

A number of the effects to follow could be operated with a reel as explained in Chapter15. However, a reel is not needed. Thus … REEL-LESS MAGIC. (I recommend using black “OO” bonded nylon thread in these effects. It is fine, strong and doesn’t knot like silk and cotton threads.) Self Unknotting Hank

2 A L

B A K E R

Effect : A knot tied in a silk unites itself. Required : An 18” silk with a 27” thread and a small black bead attached, Figure 1. Presentation : 1. Pick up the silk and shake it several times until thread & silk are in Figure 2 position. 2. Take the silk as in Figure 3 position; tie a knot. Figure 25, end “A” passing thru the loop, Figure 4.

3. 4. 5.

6.

Take the bead end “C” in the left hand, Figure 5, then assume Figure 6 position. Drop corner “A”, Figure 6. Take corner “B” in the right hand, retaining the bead “C” in the left hand. Drop the left hand (still holding “C”) to the left side. Move the right hand upwards, lowering the left at the same time, Figure 7, and the knot unties.

Knot that is Not *

3 J O E

B E R G

Effect : A knot visibly dissolves. Required : A 12” silk with an 18” thread and pin attached, Figure 8. Presentation : Fasten the thread to the belt loop and place the silk in the pocket, Figure 9.

Presentation : 1. Holding the silk in Figure 8 position, tie a single knot off center at point “C’. Properly tied, the knot is as in Figure 10, but tighter. (See Figure 25) 2. Now raise the left hand and lower the right as you turn to the right. 3. At the same time release corner “A” and grab the thread at “X” between the right thumb and first finger, Figure 11. 4. Continue to raise the left hand, moving the right fingers up the taut thread to meet end “A” which is now coming thru the loop, Figure 12. 5. The knot dissolve, Figure 8.

Spirit Knot *

S T E W A R T

4 J U D A H

This effect works in combination with AL Baker’s SELF UNKNOTTING SILK. Effect : An 18” silk visibly ties itself into a knot. Required : Attach a thread and a pin to a silk, Figure 13. Preparation : Arrange the silk and thread as shown in Figure 9. Presentation : 1. Take the silk in the right hand. 2. Pull the silk thru the left hand several times, twirl silk rope fashion, then assume Figure 14 position. 3. Appearing to touch corners “A” and “B” together, pass corner “B” around the thread, Figure 15. 4. Drop corner “A”, holding silk and thread in Figure 16 position. 5. Hook the thread with the right thumb at “X”. 6. Raise the left hand, at the same time moving the right hand to the right, snapping right fingers. 7. A knot is formed in the silk, Figure 17.

Latest Knotted Silk

J O S E P H

5 O V E T T E

Effect : A silk on a tray knots itself. Required : An 18” silk, about 27” of black thread, and a sheet of glass. Preparation : Tie a loose knot in a silk, then attach a thread to the diagonal ends, Figure 18. Place the silk on the glass as in Figure 19, thread passing underneath. Now untie the knot, laying the crossed thread carefully in place, Figure 20. Presentation : 1. Show silk on the glass, Fig. 20. 2. Place a wand under the glass and on the thread at “X”, Figure 20. 3. Strike sharply on the thread with the wand, forcing the thread to tie a knot in the silk, Figure 21.

Knotty Silk *

6 H A R O L D

R I C E

Effect : A silk knots itself ; then unties. Required : An 18” silk prepared as in Fig. 13. Arrange silk as in Figure 9.

Presentation: 1. Withdraw the silk and display it, Figure 14. 2. Pass the left hand corner “B” around the thread, Figure 15. 3. Hold the silk as in Figure 22 position. 4. Take a new hold on corner “B”, then drop corner “A”, Figure 23. 5. Strike downward on the thread at point “X”, Figure 23, with the right hand. 6. Silk knots itself, Figure 24. 7. Untie the knot, then display the silk again, Figure 8. 8. Tie a knot in the silk as in Figure 25. 9. Holding the silk as in Figure 26, strike the thread sharply at “X”, and the knot will untie.

Millen’s Knotty Silk

P R O F .

7 J A C K

M I L L E R

Effect : A knot dissolves, then reappears in the silk. Required : An 18” silk and 20” of black thread. Preparation : Prepare silk and attach it to your body as in Figure 27. Place silk in your right trouser pocket. Presentation : 1. Display silk, Figure 28. 2. Taking silk in Figure 29 position, tie a knot, Figure 30. 3. Pull ends of silk until a large knot is formed, Figure 31. 4. Bring end “A” to the knot, Figure 32. 5. Move both hands and the silk to the right, causing end “A” to be pulled thru the knot, out again, and back to the right hand, Figure 33. This is done rapidly and smoothly and spectators observe nothing. 6. A fake knot is now in the silk, Figure 33. 7. Pull end “A” further to the right, Figure 34. 8. Blow on the knot, separate the hands, and the knot will disappear, Figure 35.

9.

10.

Now hold the silk as in Figure 36. Next bring corner “B” around the thread, Fig. 39. To do so, bring silk up to thread, Figure 37, pass corner “B” over the thread and between the fingers with the thumb, Figure 38, then carry

11. 12. 13.

14.

corner “B” to the left, forming a loop, Figure 39. Raise the left hand, loop in silk straightening out, Fig. 40. Take both “A” and “B” in the left hand and the thread in the right, Figure 41. Drop corner “A”, at the same time pulling upward on end “B”, Figure 42, the right hand sliding along the thread until it reaches corner “A”. A genuine knot is formed in the silk for examination if desired.

Knotting and Unknotting Sites * G.

W.

8

H U N T E R

Effect : Performer holds a silk in each hand. In one silk he ties a knot… Upon command the knot leaves one silk and passes to the second. Required : Two 18” silks with a thread attached to each. Preparation : Attach about 48” of thread to each silk, the exact length varying with the performers height. To the free end of the thread attach a small lead weight, Figure 43. Place the threads on the table, threads as in Figure 44.

Presentation : 1. Take the first silk in the left hand, Figure 2, holding it as in Figure 8, then tie a single knot, Figures 25 & 26. 2. With the right hand pick up the second silk from the table,

3.

4.

Figure 45, weight dropping to the floor, Fig. 46. With a silk in each hand, step on the lead weights, Figure 47. Raise both hands slowly, and the change takes place, Figure 48.

Reel-Less Magic *

T O M M Y

Effect: A knotted silk unties itself; then becomes knotted again. Required : A 24” silk with thread attached, Figure 49. Presentation : PART ONE : 1. Display silk, Figure 50. 2. Drop “C” and take “B” in the left hand, Figure 51. 3. Take ends “A” and “B” in the Figure 52 position. 4. Separate the hands, tying

9 D O W D

9.

a loose knot in the silk. Drop end “A”, Figure 53. Insert the left first finger under the thread at point “X”, Figure 53, then move the left hand away, thread pulling “A” up thru knot and into right thumb and first finger as corner “B” is released, Figure 54.

PART TWO : 5. Take silk and drop it over the right hand, Figure 55. 6. Calling attention to the silk, secretly pass the left hand down the thread to point “X”, Figure 56. 7. Carry “X” up into the right hand, Figure 57. 8. Carry thread thru fingers and over thumb of right hand, Figure 58.

10. 11.

12.

Now move right hand out from body, thread bringing corner “B” up into the right hand, Figure 59. Drop the thread from the left hand, Figure 59, clipping “B” tightly between the right fingers. At the same time allow the silk loop “Y”, Figure 60, to drop off the right hand. Silk now contains a knot, Figure 53.

Variation : In Chapter 20, “NAUGHTY” SILKS, I will explain my Another One Hand Knot. Holding the silk in the right hand position, Figure 55, clip end “B” between the second and third fingers of the right hand at the position held by left hand in Figure 55. Toss silk into the air to tie a knot, Chapter 20. Now take the knotted silk in Figure 53 position, then perform Part One, the untying knot.

Flask Silk Apparition * C A R L O S

10 H.

Effect : A silk appears at the tip of a borrowed fountain pen, Figure 65.

C O L O M B I

Required : Fold the silk , Envelope Fold (Page 36, Chapter3, Volume 1). Fasten the pin to the belt loop. Then place the silk under the left arm, Figure 62, in the breast pocket, Figure 63, or in a paper tube pinned inside the coat, Figure 64. Presentation : 1. Borrow a fountain pen, taking it in the right hand. 2. Pass then pen to the right once or twice. 3. Engage the clip of the pen in the thread at “X”, then move the pen sharply to the right, pulling the silk into view, Figure 65.

Snake-N-Vase

H A R O L D

11 R.

R I C E

This effect was inspired by an idea by Robert Harbin. * Effect : A silk resembling a snake causes an oriental vase to float mysteriously, Figure 71. Required : A Rice’s Serpent Streamer, Figure 17, Chapter 15, and a small light weight vase with a pin hole in its bottom. A thread. Preparation : Prepare silk and vase as in Figure 66. Presentation : 1. Display silk in left hand, vase in right. 2. Secretly slip the loop over the button of the coat, Figure 71. 3. Hold the vase over the silk, Figure 67, then command the snake to enter the vase, Figure 68 (raise wase). 4. Tell the silk to float, Figure 69, as you take away the left hand. 5. Reverse the silk and vase, Figure 70. 6. Command the vase to float, Figure 71. 7. Tell the silk to enter the vase, Figure 72. 8. Now swing silk and suspended vase to right and left, Figure 73. 9. Disengage the thread loop and place silk and vase on the table.

Triple Ring-Silk Penetration *

H E N R Y B O H L E N. Effect : Three hoops penetrate an 18” silk, one at a time, Figure 74. Required : Three hoops of graduated sizes. An 18” silk, 30” of thread, and a celluloid ring to fit over the thumb. Preparation : Attach a corner of the silk to one end of the thread and the celluloid ring to the other. Presentation : 1. Take the silk and hoops as in Figure 75. 2. Display the silk, then take corner “B” in left hand, Figure 76. 3. Take the first (smallest) hoop in the right hand, Figure 77. 4. Take the hoop from the left arm, then down over and off the silk, Figure 78.

12

5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

10.

11.

Now bring point “X” of thread over the left thumb Figure 79. Finally, release corner “A” and the first hoop. At the same time move the right hand sharply to the right. Corner “A” passes thru the hoop and back to the left thumb, Figure 80. Now transfer corner “A” to Figure 78 position. Pass the second hoop down over the silk and first hoop, taking it in Figure 78 position. As this hoop in larger than the first, it will easily pass over the first. Now repeat the moves used to get the first hoop on silk. Again take Figure 78 position and repeat to get the third (largest) hoop on the silk, Figure 81.

To Remove Rings : 1. Display the hoops on the silk, Figure 82. 2. Allow the hoops to slide on to the left arm, Figure 83. 3. Now allow the two smaller hoops to fall back on the

4. 5. 6. 7.

8.

9.

the silk again, Figure 84. Next change corners of the silk, Figure 85. Now allow the larger (third) hoop to slide back onto the silk, Figure 86. Place corner “B” in the left hand, Figure 87. Take the largest (third) ring in the right hand and raise it slightly, hooking point “X” of the thread (Figure 87) over the left thumb, Figure 88. Drop corner “A” of the silk, and pull the large (third) hoop away, Figure 89. Repeat the eight steps above to remove rings two and one.

Devil’s Own Knife-Cut Ribbon *

H E N R Y B O H L E N Effect : A length of ribbon cut at its center restores itself. Required : An 18” length of ribbon, 18” of thread, and a table knife. Preparation : Prepare as in Figure 90. Place everything in the right coat pocket. Presentation : 1. Display the ribbon, Figure 91, knife remaining in pocket. 2. Take ribbon in left hand, Figure 92 and 93. 3. Take the knife in your right hand and secretly slip the thread over the left thumb, Figure 94. 4. Insert the blade of the knife in the loop of ribbon, Figure 95. 5. Press down on the ribbon with the knife, pulling visible ends under the thumb, Figure 96.

13

7.

Raise and lower the knife several times. 8. Bring the knife down sharply, releasing the ends of the ribbon. 9. The thread rapidly pulls center X up to the thumb, completely reversing the ribbon, Figure 97. 10. Pocket the knife, then wrap the ribbon around the left fingers. 6. Open the ribbon out and show it fully restored, Figure 91.

Master Silk Thru Ropes *

H E A V Y B O H L E N Effect : A silk is caused to penetrate a rope several times. Require : An 18” or 24” silk with thread attached, Figure 98. A 10’ soft rope. Presentation : (1) UPWARD PENETRATION : 1. Have spectator hold rope taut. 2. Hold silk beneath rope, Figure 99. 3. Bring hands together ABOVE rope momentarily, engaging the left thumb under the thread at “X”, Figure 99, then separate hands again, Figure 100. 4. Make several upward movements

14

with both hands. Then release corner “A” as you separate the hands sharply, silk penetrating (?) rope, Figure 101. (2) DOWNWARD PENETRATION : This is just the reverse of the Upward Penetration. Silk is above the rope, Figure 102. Corners “A” and “B” are brought together BELOW the rope momentarily. The left thumb engages the silk at “X”, Figure 102, then the hands assume Figure 103 position. As hands are separated, corner “A” is released and silk penetrates the rope, Figure 104.

(3) ONE HAND UPWARD PENETRATION : 1. Take silk in Figure 99 position. 2. Bring thread around rope, Figure 100. 3. Place corner “B” in left hand, Figure 105. 4. Engage the first finger of the left hand under the thread at “X” Figure 105. Then release corner “A”, and drop the right hand as you raise the left hand sharply. 5. Silk penetrates (?) rope, Figure 106. (4) ONE HAND SILK ONTO ROPE : 1. Hold the silk in front of the rope, Figure 107. 2. Lower left hand momentarily, secretly engaging the left thumb in the thread loop at “X”, Figure 107. 3. Raise the left hand to Figure 108 position. 4. Raise the left hand, releasing corner “A”, and silk

penetrates (?) the rope, Figure 109.

The Penetrative Silk *

H A R L A N

15 T A R B E L L

Tarbell gives his version in Volume 4 of Tarbell Course of Magic.

Part One : VERTICAL PENETRATION : Hold the silk under the back of a chair as shown in Figure 110. Bring corners ‘A” and “B” up above the chair, inserting the left thumb under the thread at “X”, Figure 111. Release “B” and separate the hands suddenly. Silk penetrates (?) the back of the chair, Figure 112.

Part Two : HORIZONTAL PENETRATION : Hold the silk behind a pole in Figure 113. Bring corners “A” and “B’ to the front, Figure 114, inserting the right thumb under the thread at “X’. Separate the hands suddenly, releasing “A”, and silk penetrates the pole, Figure 115.

Now bring corners “A” and “B” to the back of the pole, Figure 116. Note thread over right thumb. Quickly separate the hands, releasing “A”, and the silk will be behind the pole, Figure 113.

Penetrating Silk *

P E R C Y

16 A B B O T T

Effect : A silk penetrates a fan in a box, Figure 125. Required : A box with slits to hold a fan, Figure 117. An 18” silk with thread attached, Figure 118. Preparation: Attach the thread loop to to a vest button, then pocket the silk, Figure 119.

Presentation : 1. Display box and fan. Remove front panel. 2. Insert the fan in the slots, Figure 120. 3. Display the silk, Figure 121, then release corner held in the left hand. 4. Place the silk behind the fan, Figure 122. 5. Bring the silk around the fan, Figure 123. 6. Replace the front panel on the box. 7. Hold the box on the left hand, Figure 124. 8. Lower the box and the left hand. At the same time, release corner “A” of the silk, and raise the right hand. 9. Silk penetrates (?) the fan, Figure 125.

The Dancing Handkerchief

P R O F E S S O R

17 H O F F M A N N

This effect was suggested by a very old trick known as the “ Dancing Sailor.” PARLOR VERSION : An 18” solid color silk, a bent pin (“S” shaped) Figure 126, and a 16” length of thread are needed. The thread is attached (hooked) to the trouser legs just below the knees. Tie a knot in a corner of the silk, secretly inserting the pin point in the knot, Figure 127. Seated on a chair, place the pin over the thread, Figure 128. Beating time to accompanying music with your hands upon your knees, secretly move your legs to cause the silk to dance in a weird fashion.

STAGE VERSION : A thread running from one side of the stage to the other rests on the floor. An assistant is in each wing. An 18” silk rests on the performer’s table in the center of the stage. As the performer steps behind the table, the assistants raise the thread to the proper height. Meanwhile the performer ties small single knots in two diagonal corners of the silk, Figure 129. Next he ties a large double knot in another corner, the thread passing through the knot, Figure 130. The remaining corner is

tucked into the large knot, Figure 131, forming a simple puppet. By giving the thread slack, then making it tout, moving it up stage, then back, the silk puppet is made to dance on the floor, leap to the table, Figure 132.

The Dancing Hank *

M I K E

18 K A N T E R

Effect : An 18” silk, endowed with life, dances about as desired. Required : An 18” silk; a box 12” x 24” x 6” filled with saudust ; a an empty cigar box ; length of black thread ; two 3’ lengths of black elastic; a large glass jug with prepared cork, Figure 133. Two assistants are required. Preparation : Run the thread across the floor of the stage. The 3’ lengths of elastic attached to each end of the thread are in the wings. Box of sawdust and cigar box are on the stage. A chair and a table are about a foot behind the center of

center of the thread. An assistant stands in each wing.

Presentation : 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

12. 13. 14.

Stand about 18” behind the thread. Show the empty cigar box, then place it an the chair. Assistants secretly raise the thread chest high in front of you. Tie a knot in the silk, the thread passing thru the knot, Figure 134. As assistant slacken the thread, drop the silk in the cigar box and close the lid, Figure 135. Step in front of the thread and patter about the mysterious silk. Lid opens a little, closes, opens further head peeping out, Figure 136. Lid falls back, head standing erect, Figure 137. Puppet jumps clear of box and falls limp . . dead . . .on the floor, Figure 138. Head rises slightly, then drops weakly to the floor. Head rises again, higher, nods, Figure 139, then falls to floor. Silk slowly rises, continuing until standing at full height, Figure 140.

1. 2.

Silk sways, then dances to music, Figure 141. Silk falls dead, Figure 138, when music stops.

8. 9. 10. 11.

15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28.

As you reach to pick up the silk it comes to life and jumps away, Figure 142. Attempt to jump on silk but it moves away. Throw objects at the silk, missing it as it jumps each time. Make a sudden grab and catch the silk which for some reason doesn’t move ! Remove cork from glass jug. Deposit silk inside, then replace cork, Figure 143. Suddenly silk takes life and dances inside jug, Figure 144. Remove cork. Puppet jumps out of jug and falls to floor, Figure 144. Pick up box of sawdust. Creep up and dump the box upside down over silk, Figure 145. Lift box carefully, and dead puppet is found buried under sawdust, Figure 146. Magic ! Puppert’s head slowly rises from the sawdust, Figure 147, drops, then emerges completely from its grave, Figure 148. Approach coaxingly, and puppet jumps right up into your hand, Figure 149. Hold silk as in Figure 150. One assistant cuts his thread and the other draws his thread which eventually pulls thru the knot and off stage. Making the head (knot) wiggle violently by moving the thumb up and down, Figure 151, carry the live (?) puppet down into the audience and hand it to a spectator.

Note: (Assistant) By holding the elastic in one hand and “plucking” the thread with the other, the assistants can create very weird effects not obtained with thread only. See Figure 152.

The Flying Carpet *

M A R V I N

19 R O Y

Effect : Performer floats an 18” silk. Required : A “key” linking ring, 18’ orange silk, tray; thread as shown in Figure 153.

Preparation : Arrange the tray as in Figure 154. Presentation : 1. Assistant brings in the tray, right thumb resting on button, Figure 155. 2. Take the pin and the ring, hooking the pin to the vest and dropping the ring over your head, Figure 156. 3. Take the silk in your right hand. 4. Step about three feet to the right of your assistant and tie the silk around the thread. 5. Attempt to float the silk which falls to the floor, Figure 157. 6. Pick up the silk, then step to the right until thread is taut. 7. Silk held at arms length now floats, Figure 158. 8. Take the ring in the left hand. 9. Pass the ring over the silk, Figure 159. 10. Grasp the silk in the right hand. 11. Throw the silk to the floor, your assistant releasing the button at the same time, Figure 160. 12. Take the thread at “X”, Figure 160, in the right hand. 13. Pull sharply on the thread, Figure 161, silk jumping up to the ring. 14. Reach up and grab the silk in the right hand as it passes thru the ring, Figure 162. 15. Untie knot and pass silk for examination.

The Animated Silk *

R.

20 C.

B U F F

Effect : Two silks are held in the left hand. One is transferred to the right hand, and the second visibly passes to the right hand to join the first silk, Figure 174. Required : A red and a green silk. The red one is faked, Figure 170. Preparation : From a red celluloid or cardboard cut the fake shown in Figure 163. Sew the fake to the red silk with red thread, Figure 164. Knot one end of a 27” length of black waxed thread. Put a needle on the other end. Starting under the silk, force the needle thru the fake and silk at point “A”, Figure 165. Pass the needle down thru “B’ and back up thru “C”, Figure 166. Remove the needle and tie a loop in the free end of the thread, Figure 167. Now gather the silk along line ‘X-X’, Figure 168, press it next to the fake at ‘Y-Y”, Figure 169, and sew it firmly to the fake. Finally, pull on the thread at “Z”, Figure 169, pulling the thread thru the fake and the loop “L’ up against the fake, Figure 170. Presentation : 1. Hold silks in left hand, Figure 171, loop “L” over left thumb. 2. Take the green silk into the right hand, right thumb going into large loop, Figure 172. 3. Take the green silk and right hand to the right, Figure 173. 4. Released the red silk, and move the right hand to the right. 5. The silk visibly passes to the right hand, Figure 174.

Self-Contained Rising Hank *

S I D F L E I S C H M A N

A new principle with unlimited possibilities ! Effect : During silk production performer produces a blue silk. The silk rises from one hand to the other with no movement of the hands ! Required : Two blue 18” silks sewed as shown in Figure 175; 17” length of black thread ; a 2¼ oz. Swivel lead fishing sinker. Preparation : Fasten one end of the thread to the double silk at point “X”, Figure 175. To the other end attach the lead sinker. Drop the sinker in the tube pocket, then tie a knot in the corner of the silk, Figure 176. Presentation : 1. Take the silk in the left hand above the knot. 2. Slip the left thumb under the thread, Figure 177. 3. Pull the silk down with the right hand, weight rising in its tube, Figure 178. NOW FOR AN IMPORTANT OBSERVATION ! The friction of the

21

4.

5.

thread against the ball of the thumb holds the weight at the top of its tube, Figure 178. However, the moment you turn your hand, so thread runs across left thumb nail, Figure 179, the weight drops and the silk rises. With the silk in Figure 178 position, turn the left hand thumb up, releasing the silk at the same time. Silk rises to the left hand, Figure 179.

The Aerobatic Silk

22 H A S K E L L

Effect : A silk is put thru a clever routine by the performer. Required : A 12” white silk; a black thread several inches longer than you are tall. Preparation : Tie one end of the thread around the center of the silk, Figure 180. Now tie a loose knot in the silk, Figure 181. Tie the other end of the thread to the top button of the vest. Place the silk in your right pocket, Figure 182. (Note : Haskell points out that once you get your hands into the various positions in a natural manner, you have mastered the routine.) Presentation : 1. Take the knotted silk from the pocket and display it. 2. Toss the silk to the floor about 3” in front of you, Figure 183.

3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

13. 14. 15. 16. 17.

Raise the right hand, elbow height, Figure 184, thumb over the thread, Figure 185. Raise the left hand, catching the thread over thumb, Figure 186. Also, at the same time, take a step forward. Raise the left hand up and out as you drop the right hand. The silk rises to the left hand, Figure 187. Toss the silk to the floor, Figure 183. Get your hands in Figure 186 position once more. Take a step forward, bend forward, lowering the left hand slightly, Figure 188, thread still is Figure 186 position. Command the silk to rise, but it doesn’t. Reach down with the right hand to pick up the silk. At the same time raise the left hand slightly, and the silk jumps into the left hand, Figure 189. Stand erect. Facing the audience, toss the silk to your extreme left, Figure 190. Turn to the left, getting the thread and hands in Figure 191 position. Walk to the left and behind the silk, Figure 192. Continue past the silk.

18. 19. 20.

21. 22. 23.

Still holding the thread as in Figure 191, lower the right hand to your side. Then raise the left to your head to stroke your hair. Silk crawls up your right leg and into your right hand, Figure 193. Face front, note silk in your right hand, and register surprise. Then throw the silk to the floor about 3 feet in front of your. Keep the thread hooked over the left thumb. Assume Figure 194 position with thread and hands. Without moving the left hand, raise the right hand sharply, silk rising to the right hand, Figure 195. Without stopping, lower the right hand, slapping the silk back down to the floor, Figure 196.

24. 25. 26.

27. 28. 29. 30. 31.

32. 33. 34.

35. 36. 37. 38.

Repeat steps 21 thru 23 several times. If the thread slips off of the left thumb, re-engage the thread, Figure 194. Assume Figure 194 position. Bend at your waist, reaching down to pick up silk with your right hand. Move your left hand to the left, and silk jumps 12” into the right, Figure 197. Stand erect and face the audience. Toss the silk to your right, Figure 198. While getting your right hand into Figure 199 position, motion to the silk with your left hand several times to jump to your left side. Now get the left hand into Figure 199 positions. Move the left hand to the left, right hand to the right. At the same time swing slightly to the right and attempt to step on the silk with the right foot. As the silk jumps to the left, free the left thumb of the thread, Figure 200. Standing as Figure 200, bring the hands together to assume Figure 201 position. Now swing to the left on your left foot, raise the right foot as though to step on the silk. At the same time move the left hand to the left, the right hand to the right. As the silk jumps to the right, free the right thumb of the thread, Figure 202. Turn to the right, thread still over left thumb, and walk to the silk. Stand behind the silk, left side to audience, Figure 203. Get the hands in Figure 204 position. Drop the left hand as you raise your right to scratch your head in amazement. Silk moves up body to left hand and head, Figure 205.

39. Face the audience, then toss the silk to the floor four feet in front of you, Figure 206. 40. Assume Figure 201 position. 41. Shoot the right arm out in front of you and the silk jumps into the right hand, Figure 207. 42. Free the left hand, Figure 208. 43. Holding the silk in the right hand, stroke the silk several times with

44.

45.

46. 47. 48. 49.

50.

51.

52.

53.

the left, then assume Figure 209 position. Without disturbing the position of the thread in the right hand, place the silk in the left. Note loop of thread now formed around the left hand, Figure 210. Now, palms to audience, separating hands slowly, silk will move from left to right, Figure 211. (Silk straddles the taut thread running between the hands.) Replace the silk in the left hand again, Figure 210, then repeat the traveling effect again. Again place the silk in the left hand, Figure 210. Close the left hand loosely around the silk, tucking all of the silk inside. Turn to the left, dropping your right hand and extending your left slightly. This, unknown (?) to you, takes the silk into the right hand, Figure 212. Open the left hand and find the silk gone. Discover the silk now in your right hand. If desired, repeat this last effect, steps 47 –50. Now for the finish. Walk near a wing of the stage. Toss the silk ahead of you, and on the floor, Figure 183. Get the thread in Figure 201 position. Move the right arm out in front of you, and raise and lower the left hand as the silk jumps up and down and moves off stage just ahead of you as you chase after it, Figure 213.

The Million Dollar Gimmick * S I D

F L E I S C H M A N

Here is a most ingenious gimmick for floating a silk. Preparation : Obtain a steel corset stay ⅜” wide and about 10” long. Form a dull point on each and then drill a hole in one end, Figure 214. Attach a strong elastic to the stay, then wrap the entire fake with adhesive tape. Figure 215. Inside of the right sleeve sew a large safety pin. Place the fake in place, Figure 216, and then pin the end of the elastic to the back of the vest between the shoulder blades. Presentation : 1. Tie a loose knot in an 18” silk. 2. Secretly place the right thumb under the knot, Figure 217. 3. Stroke the silk a few times with the left hand, Figure 218. 4. Then secretly raise the right thumb, causing the knot to jump upward an inch or two, Figure 219. 5. Pull the knot down into Figure 217 position, then cause it to rise again. 6. Now transfer the silk to the left hand, lowering the right to allow the tip of the fake to fall into the right hand. 7. With the tip of the fake between the

23

8.

9.

8. 9. 10. 11.

12.

thumb and second finger, take the silk in the right hand again, Figure 220. Take knot and tip of fake in the left hand, them draw the silk thru the right hand, Figure 221. Holding the silk horizontally with both hands, Figure 221, twirl the silk around the fake, Figure 222. Release the knot held in the left hand and the silk remains rigid, Figure 223. Take the knot in the left hand again, Figure 222, then raise the silk to a vertical position and release the knot, Figure 224. Now by applying and releasing pressure at the base of the fake, cause the silk to take snake-like life, Figure 225. Ask a spectator to hold the knot. As he does, release the fake which flys up the sleeve, Figure 216, leaving the lifeless silk in his hand !

The Tripod Gimmick * S I D

24 F L E I S H M A N

A gimmick worthy of the time required to construct it. Preparation : From 36 pound test and very fine stiff leader wire obtained at a sporting goods store, construct the gimmick shown in Figure 226. Point the fake with either Black Japan or Eastman Kodak’s “Kodalac”. Required : A 12” silk, a hoop, and the fake. Place all on a table. Presentation : 1. Place the hoop over the right arm, then place the fake over the right thumb as you take the silk in your left hand. 2. Working under subdued lights, tie a loose knot in one corner of the silk. 3. Get the tip of the fake into the knot, then tighten the knot. 4. Hold the silk as in Figure 227. 5. Release the knot and the silk floats, Figure 228. 6. Drop the silk into the left hand. 7. With the right hand behind the left, cause the knot to rise a few inches, then drop, Figure 229. 8. Repeat, knot jumping higher each time. 9. Finally silk jumps high above your head where both hands catch it, Figure 230.

10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18.

Hold the knot in your left hand, Figure 227, then cause the silk to float, Figure 228. Float the silk down to rest on the left palm, Figure 231. Remove the left hand and the silk floats again, Figure 228. Remove the hoop from the right arm and pass it down over the silk, Figure 232. Now float the silk between the hands, Figure 233. Pass the hoop up over the silk, Figure 232, and back on right arm. Finally take the knot in the left hand and remove the silk from the tip of the fake. Toss the silk into the audience. As you drop the hoop from your right arm to the table, dispose of the gimmick.

Hop A Long Hank *

B E R T

25 E A S L E Y

Effect : The performer and his assistant put a 12” silk thru a dizzy comedy routine, the silk favoring the assistant to the performer. Required : A thread fastened to a 12” silk. Figure 234. Place the silk in your breast coat pocket. Presentation : 1. Remove the silk from your pocket, knot the silk, Figure 235, then toss the silk to the floor, Figure 236. 2. Showing hands empty, engage the thread as shown in Figure 237. 3. Command the silk to rise. It doesn’t obey. 4. Reach down with the right hand to pick up the contrary silk. 5. At the same time move the left hand to the left, causing the silk to hop to the left, Figure 238. 6. Now turn to the left to pick up the silk, getting the thread in the Figure 239 position.

7.

Reach down to pick up the silk which now hops to the right, Figure 240. Right thumb is disengaged as the silk leaves the floor.

8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21.

22.

Repeat several times, silk hopping left to right, right to left. Summon the assistant who is told to stand guard over the silk, right hand extended. Secretly engage the thread over the assistants palm, Figure 241. Walk away and the silk rises to the assistants hand, Figure 242. Annoyed, take the silk in your right hand, thread passing around assistant’s thumb, Figure 243. Engage point “X” of the thread (Figure 243) over your thumb, Figure 244. Walk to the left, and the silk leaves your hand and glides thru the air and into the assistant’s outstretched hand, Figure 245. Take the silk from assistant, keeping thread in Figure 244 position. Dismiss the assistant who walks to the right. Assistant leaves, silk follows, traveling back to assistant’s right hand ! Quite irritated, recall the assistant and take the silk in your right hand. Toss the silk to the floor, Figure 236, then get the thread in Figure 237, position. Now both performer and assistant reach for the silk. As you reach with your right hand, silk leaps to your left, Figure 246. Finally captured, place the silk in your left breast pocket and bow to the audience.

My Untying Silk Routine * J O E

26 H O M C H E C K

Effect : Homcheck’s version appears in print for the first time. A knot tied in a silk visibly unties it self. Preparation : Attach a 25” length of thread and a pin to an 18” silk, Figure 8. Place the silk in your pocket and attach the pin to your belt loop, FIGURE 9. Presentation : 1. After displaying the silk, Figure 8, twirl it until it is tightly rolled around itself, then tie a very LOOSE. (Figure 10) knot in it, Figures 25-26. 2. Engage the right thumb under the thread at “X”, Figure26, then transfer the silk to the right hand, Figure 247. 3. Now slowly move your right hand straight out from the body, causing “A” to visibly move up thru the loose knot and into the crotch of the right thumb, Figure 248. 4. At the instant “A” comes up into the right hand, release “B”, Figure 249. Note : Homcheck opens the routine by stealing the rolled silk from a body clip, Page 123, Vol. 1. After the knot unties, he vanishes the silk in a pull, Page 229, Vol. 1. The body clip, and a pull, as well as the pin attached to the thread on the silk are all attached to the LEFT side of the body rather than the right as explained above. The reverse set-up allows him to get his pull in his left hand while the knot in the silk held in the right hand unties, Figure 247.

TWENTIETH CENTURY SILKS...

Introduction

1

Although there are now dozens of variations of this wonderful effect, the original method involved switching a set of two silks knotted together for a duplicate set with a third tied between them. According to John Mulholland’s records, it was not until about 1900 that the idea of a self contained outfit was introduced. Frank Ducrot (T. Francis Fritz) is credited with the idea of using a prepared silk.

Basic Effect

2

As you will discover later in this chapter, the effect is basically the same. The performer ties two silks together, Figure 1. the silks are laid aside as tucked into a glass, Figure 2. Next a rainbow silk (or a flag) is shown, rolled between the hands, Figure 3, and vanished. The vanished silk (or flag) is found tied securely between the first two silks, Figure 4.

Early Method

3

Required Two 18” solid red, two 18” sold blue, two 12” x 18” flags, and a mirror glass (Page 325, Chapter 8, Volume 1) , or a changing bag (Page 334, Chapter 8, Volume 1). Preparation : Tie one of the flags between a red an blue silk, Figure 5. Place the silks in the back of the mirror glass, Figure 6. Presentation : 1. Show the red and blue silks and tie them together, Figure 1. 2. Tuck them in the front of the mirror glass, Figure 7. 3. Cover the glass with a linen hank, giving the glass a half turn as you do (Figures 154 and 155, Page 326, Volume 1), bringing the two silks and flag to the front, Figure 8. 4. Set the covered glass on a table. 5. Vanish the remaining flag, Figure 3. (Master Vanish, Page 290, Chapter 8, Volume 1). 6. Remove hank covering the glass and pull the silks and flag from the glass, Figure 5.

Ducrot Improvement

4

Feeling a “switch” was not effective, Ducrot conceived the idea of hiding the reappearing silk, Figure 4, inside of one of the silks. Actually four silks are used, two of which are duplicates. For example, a light and a dark color silk, and two duplicate rainbows are used. One of the duplicates must have at least one corner the same color as that of the dark colored silk, Figure 9. The dark silk is usually prepared since it hides the duplicate silk which appears after the vanish. Its actual construction has varied. At times it is a double silk, Figure 10. Sometimes it has a pocket attached, Figures 11 and 12. But the most popular is a silk folded on the diagonal and sewed as shown in Figure 13. Now for a more detailed explanation.

Rainbow 20th Century *

H A R O L D

5 R.

Effect : A rainbow silk vanishes, then reappears between two silks previously knotted together. Required : Two solid colored silks, one prepared as in Figure 13. Two duplicate rainbows, Figure 9, having a corner colored to match the prepared silk. Preparation : Tie a matching corner of the rainbow to the prepared silk, Figure 14. Reaching thru opening “B”, pull the rainbow down inside, Figure 15, leaving merely corner “Y” exposed, Figure 16. the corner is the same NOTE : color as the prepared silk, and the two silks appear to be but one. Presentation : 1. Display the ordinary solid and the prepared solid. 2. Knot corner “Y” of the hidden rainbow to a corner of the ordinary solid, Figure 17. 3. Place the knotted silks around your neck, knot at back, Figure 18. 4. Display the duplicate rainbow, then prepare to vanish it,

R I C E

5.

6. 7. 8.

9.

With the silk palmed in the right, take hold of the extreme bottom corner of the prepared silk as shown in Figure 19. At the same time call attention to the closed left which supposedly contains the duplicate rainbow. Open the empty left hand as you toss it upward as though throwing the silk into the air. Silk has vanished. Grasp the extreme bottom corner of the unprepared silk with the left hand, Figure 20. With an upward and forward motion, toss the silks so the knotted center clears the back of the head. At the same time extend arms, and the rainbow appears, Figure 21. Take the silks in the right hand (which still palms the vanished rainbow), and lay them aside, leaving the palmed rainbow with them.

Valuable Aid*

H A R O L D

6 R.

R I C E

For the effect just explained, and in some to follow, here is a tip many will appreciate. Although there is little changer of the hidden rainbow coming into view prematurely, accidents can happen. When knotting corner “Y” to the ordinary solid, Figure 17, as a precaution, I use the following :

1. 2.

3. 4. 5.

Cross the corners then tie the first half of the knot, Figure 22. With the right thumb, work point “X” (Figure 22) to the top of the knot, Figure 23. Point “X” is pinched in the knot. Now proceed with the effect. When the silks are pulled in opposite directions, Figure 21, the small bight “X” is pulled free of the knot and everything is free.

Mysteriously Joined Hanks F R A N K

7 K E N N A R D

Silks with wide hemstitched borders, Figure 24, have selfcontained pockets. Kennard uses this method. Required : Four 18” silks, Figure 25, and a Kennard Vanisher. Preparation : Join a red silk to the yellow, Figure 26. With an unsharpened pencil force the red silk down in the

border of the yellow silk, Figure 27, leaving corner “A” (Figure 26) exposed.

Presentation : 1. Tie yellow silk (actually corner “A” of the silk hidden in the border) to the green silk. 2. Place the silks in a tumbler. 3. Vanish the remaining red silk as explained on page 304, Volume 1. 4. Remove the silks from the tumbler; pulling the duplicate red from the secret border as you do. 5. Display the three silks knotted together, Figure 28.

Varied Themes

8

The possibilities of using the 20th century principle are almost unlimited. Each new event in history is a plot for a new presentation. In addition to flags, various picture silks available at most dealers can be substituted for the center or rainbow silk. Other themes can be worked out by using various pattern, picture, or solid colored silks for the end silks. Here is an example of how the 20 th century can be adapted to a current story. During World War II Holden Magic Shops produced Bert Douglas’s VICTORY 20TH CENTURY. Here two great nations, England and United States, are joined in victory, Figure 29. Another

story, Waller’s THE JOLLY ROGER, was marketed by Thayer, Figure 30.

The Traveling Salesman * B E R T

9 D O U G L A S

Effect : Margie Brown weds Jimmy Green, and as the knot is tied, they become Mr. and Mrs. Green. A Traveling Salesman vanished, and is found in bed between (tied) the Greens’! Required : Special 18” silks shown in Figure 31.

Preparation : Place the green tipped yellow silk in the green bag, Figure 32, after knotting corners “A” and “B” together, Figure 31.

Presentation : 1. Tie the green tip of the color change silk to the green tip of the hidden yellow silk, uniting Miss Brown and Mr. Green, Figure 33. 2. Make the color change, and you now have Mr. and Mrs. Green, Figure 34. 3. Place the silks in a glass tumbler. (They have gone to bed.) 4. Introduce the Traveling Salesman (solid yellow silk). 5. Vanish the yellow silk ( Chapter 8, Volume 1. ) 6. Remove silks from glass, and find the yellow silk tied between the greens, Figure 35.

Brassiere – 20th Century This spicy version is currently popular. Effect : Two knotted silks are held as illustrated, Figure 36, by a lady spectator. A third silk is vanished and commanded to reappear between the two silks. However, when the performer pulls on the silks a lady’s brassiere appears, Figure 37.

10

Required : Prepared silks as shown in Figure 38. Preparation : Knot corners ‘A, B’, Figure 38, then place the bra inside the bag silk, purple corner “C” protruding, Figure 39. Presentation : 1. Knot corner “C” to corner “D” of the red silk, Figure 38. 2. Have a lady assistant hold corners “C-D”, Figure 36. 3. Vanish the yellow silk, Chapter 8, Volume 1. 4. Step behind the lady assistant. 5. Take corner “X” in one hand, “Y” in the other, Figure 40. 6. Ask the lady assistant to release the silks on the count of three. 7. Count three, then pull, Figure 37. Note : (If desired the yellow silk can be reproduced elsewhere.)

Brassiere Variation * J.

J.

L A N G S T O N ,

11 J

R.

In some situations it may be more desirable to use a male assistant. In such cases, tuck the knot “C-D” in his breast pocket, Figure 41. Step behind him, take the free ends and separate arms in opposite directions, displaying the bra, Figure 42.

Silken Switch *

12 K o l m a r

Effect : Performer displays a red silk tied between two yellow silks, Figure 43, then lays them aside. A green silk pushed thru the performer’s hand changes to red, Figure 19, Chapter 13. The red silk is pocketed and the string of three silks taken at corner “B”, Figure 43, and shakes them. The center red silk becomes green, Figure 44. Required : A 12” Tarbell red to green single color change, Figure 9, Chapter 12. Two 12” yellow silks, and a 12” red and 12” green silk. An Ideal Color Change tube, Figure 2, Chapter 13. Preparation : Cut away the small brass ring in the color change and sew in a slightly larger and very heavy steel ring, Figure 45. Knot the silks together, Figure 43. Place the red silk in the ideal Color Change tube. Presentation : 1. Holding corner “A”, Figure 43, display the three knotted silks, then lay them aside. 2. Show the green silk, then change it to red as explained in Chapter12. 3. Vanish red silk, Chapter 8, Volume 1. 4. Pick up the string of silks by corner “B”, Figure 43, shake them, and the center silk changes to green, Figure 44.

Surprise 20th Century *

J O H N

13 B R A U N

Tarbell suggests the idea in Volume 3 of his famous course, and Grant markets it as the CLIMAX 20TH CENTURY. In his version, Braun eliminates the prepared bag silk, using a Keith Clark principle instead. Effect : Two purple silks are knotted together and layed aside. A red silk is shown, vanished, then commanded to reappear, tied between the two knotted purple silks. However, a green silk appears instead, Figure 52. Required : A 24” red and 2-24” purple solids; a 24” Tarbell red to green single color change, tips dyed special, Figure 46. Preparation : Tie end “A” of the color change (Figure 46) to a corner of a solid purple, Figure 47. Hold it as in Figure 48. Now place “8” on top of “X”, Figure 49. Now roll the purple silk loosely around the color change silk, Figure 50. Presentation : 1. Pick up the two purple silks and knot corner “B” to “L”, Figure 51.

2. 3. 4. 5.

6.

Lay joined silks aside. Show the red silk, then vanish it (Chapter 8, Volume 1). Taking corner “N”, Figure 51, shake the silks disclosing the green silk tied between the two purples, Figure 52. Note the center silk is green instead of red. Take corner “Y” (Figure 52) in the left hand and pass the right over the center silk, making the change to red, Figure 53.

Visible 20th Century *

H E N

14 F E T S C H

Here is a novel method of presenting No.5, RAINBOW 20TH CENTURY. After tieing the two solids, Figure 17, place the silks in a glass, Figure 54. Place the rainbow to be vanished over a Joseph Gun (Figure 89, Page 313, Chapter 8, Volume 1). Take the gun in your right hand, the glass in your left. Note position of the left thumb, Figure 55. On the count of three fire the gun and tip the glass forward. Silk vanishes & reappears tied between the two silks, Figure 56.

Fly-A-Way Cone *

U.

15 F.

G R A N T

Instead of a Joseph Gun, Grant’s cone can be used for the visible vanish in Fetsch’s VISIBLE 20TH CENTURY. The cone, shown in Figure 57, has two secret pockets. A fake, Figure 58, is inside of pocket “B”, Figure 59, bead protruding, A thread prevents your pulling the fake all the way out of the cone. Presentation : 1. Display both sides of the paper. 2. Form the paper into a cone, Figure 60. 3. Drop the silk (same color as that attached to fake) into pocket “A”, Figure 60. 4. Now, allowing the come to go flat, transfer it to the right hand, Figure 61. 5. Reach in the cone (pocket “B”) and pull the fake silk up into view, Figure 62. Apply pressure against the metal plate to prevent its falling back down inside its pocket. 6. Command the silk to vanish, releasing the pressure. The weight drops, pulling the fake silk down out of view, Figure 61.

Repeat 20th Century *

P E R C Y

16 A B B O T T

Now for a few versions wherein the trick is repeated one or more times. Effect : A vanished silk reappears tied between two silks, Figure 28. A second silk is vanished, and it joins the other three, Figure 66. The Secret: Abbott’s method uses Kennard’s principle of hiding a silk in a wide border. Required : Six wide hemstitched borders silks as shown in Figure 63. The two yellow center silks (Nos. 1 and 6) have an open hem, Figure 24.

Preparation : Knot No. 1 to No. 2; No. 5 to No. 6, Figure 64. Insert No. 2 in the border of No. 1; No. 5 in the border of No. 6. Now insert a common pin thru each of the concealed silks and border, Figure 65.

Presentation : 1. Join silks (and 2) and 6 (and 5) Figure 26, then lay them aside, secretly removing the pin from silks 1 and 2. 2. Show silk No. 3, then vanish it (Chapter 8, Volume 1). 3. Jerk the silks sharply from the table causing the silk (No. 2) in the border to appear between the other two, Figure 28. 4. Lay the silks aside again, secretly removing second pin. 5. Show silk No. 4, then vanish it (Chapter 8, Volume 1). 6. Again jerk the silks sharply from the table, and the four are now tied together, Figure 66.

Repeat Rainbow 20 th Century *

H A R O L D R. Effect : A vanished rainbow silk reappears tied between two silks, Figure 21. A second rainbow silk is vanished, and it joins the other three, Figure 69.

Required : Two bag silks, Figure 13, and four rainbows, Figure 67. Preparation : Tie silk No. 1 to the red bag, Figure 14. Tie silk No. 4 to the blue bag, Figure 14. Place the rainbows inside their bags, Figure 16. Finally insert pins thru the bags to

17 R I C E

prevent the rainbows from escaping prematurely, Figure 68. Presentation : The presentation is obvious. The corners of the silks inside the two bags are knotted together. Rainbow silks 2 and 3 are vanished, one at a time (or both at once if desired), and they reappear tied between the two bag silks, Figure 69. Of course the pins are secretly removed just before the rainbows reappear.

Assistant 20th Century *

H A R O L D

18 R.

R I C E

Effect : Performer hands a red and blue silk to his assistant, Figure 70. A vanished rainbow silk reappears tied between the silks, as does a second. A third and fourth reappear at one time, Figure 71. Required : Two silks made into bags as shown in Figure 72; eight rainbow silks (2 each of 4 patterns), the corners of two having dress snaps attached, Figure 73. The corner of one of these silks is red, the corner of the other, blue. Preparation : Prepare the silks as in Figure 74. Now turn the bag silk inside out, Figure 75, the rainbows going inside, Figure 76.

Presentation : 1. Show the two solid color bag silks, then hand them to your assistant who holds them to your assistant who holds them as in Figure 70. 2. Display a rainbow, then vanish it, Chapter 8, Volume 1. During this action the assistant snaps the two corners together, Figure 77. 3. Gripping the blue silk at the ring so the rainbows inside can’t come out, the assistant pulls the first rainbow from inside of the red silk, Figure 78. As the second rainbow inside of the red silk is the same length as the red bag, it can’t come out, Figure 79.

4.

5.

6.

Now the assistant takes the silks in Figure 80 position as you prepare to a vanish a second rainbow. Vanish the second silk, assistant pulling to the right on the ring, the red silk turning inside out and the second rainbow reappearing, Figure 81. Vanish the two remaining rainbows, Chapter 8, Volume 1, then take the blue silk from the assistant and move rapidly to the left, the two rainbows reappearing as the blue silk is turned inside out, Figure 71.

Solid Color Transposition * H A R O L D

19 R.

R I C E

Effect: Two knotted solid color silks vanish, then reappear between two others knotted and given to a spectator to hold earlier, Figure 86.

Required : A purple silk bag, Figure 10 or 13; a special purple tipped silk, Figure 82; a yellow, a green, and two red silks. All are 18” x 18”. Preparation : Assemble the silks as shown in Figure 83, then place two inside of the bag, Figure 84. Presentation : 1. Ask a spectator to tie a corner of the (unprepared) red and green silks together with a square knot. 2. Take the purple bag and the unprepared yellow to demonstrate. Now, tie a square knot, using the VALUABLE AID KNOT, Figure 22, which makes it possible to hand the silks to a spectator. 3. State your spectator assistant isn’t tieing his knot properly, then exchange silks with him. 4. 5. 6.

7.

Have the assistant hold the prepared silks as in Figure 85. Knot the spectator’s silks, then vanish them, Chapter 8, Volume 1. Grasping the purple silk at “X”, Figure 85, pull sharply with the assistant still holding the yellow corner. This releases the “Valuable Aid Knot” and the hidden silks. The vanished silks reappear between the yellow and purple silks, Figure 86.

Triple Repeat 20th Century * G E O R G E This effect appears in print for the first time, and was given to me for my exclusive use in this encyclopedia. To me it is worth more than the price of this entire volume ! Effect : Three vanished rainbow silks reappear, one at a time, tied between two solids, Figure 105.

Required : Two prepared 18” silks, Figure 87, and two of each of the 18” pattern silks shown in Figure 88. Preparation : Join the silks to the bags as shown in Figure 89. Place the yellow rainbow in the bag and bring knots “A” and “B” together, Figure 90. Now tuck the knots down inside of the opening and slip a small rubber band over them, Figure 91. Next, place the red rainbow in the green bag, Figure 92, Finally, place the blue rainbow in the red bag, push knot “C” inside, Figure 93, and add a small band as shown in Figure 94. Note ! All knots should be made as small as possible. The rubber bands should be about ½,” Figure 95. Double them once or twice to reduce their diameters, Figure 96, then roll or twist

20 B A R N A

then so they are twisted, rape like fashion, Figure 97.

Presentation ; 1. Display the prepared green and red bags, then knot the protruding corners of hidden rainbows. 2. Hold the silks as in Figure 98, wrap the silks around the left hand about three times, Figure 99, then lay them aside. 3. Show, then vanish, the duplicate red rainbow, Chapter 8, Volume 1. 4. Take the red bag corner “X”, and allow the silks to unroll. The hidden rainbow falls into view without any effort on the part of the performer, Figure 100. 5. Lay the silks aside. Introduce the duplicate yellow rainbow

6. 7. 8. 9.

10. 11.

12.

then vanish it, Chapter 8, Volume I. Pick up the silks, holding them as shown in Figure 101. Separate the arms. This causes the rubber band (Figures 91 and 92) to fly off a second rainbow comes into view, Figure 102. To display the silks hold them as in Figure 103. As you patter, stroke the tip of the red bag, secretly rolling the rubber band down off of the red bag onto the visible red rainbow, Figure 104. Lay the silks aside. Display the duplicate blue rainbow, then vanish it , Chapter 8, Volume 1. Pick up the silks at the tip of the red bag, and the blue rainbow will fall into view, Figure 105.

Surprise Vanish *

G E O R G E

21 B A R N A

Here is an idea that may be included in Barna’s TRIPLE REPEAT 20th. CENTURY. After knotting the bags. Figure 98, roll them, Figure 99, then lay them aside. Now for the Surprise Vanish : 1. Produce the duplicate red rainbow. 2. Roll the silk and pretend to return it in the left hand although it is actually palmed in the right, Figures 3,4,5 & 6, Page 291, Volume 1.

3. 4.

5. 6.

7. 8.

9.

With the left hand make a tossing motion toward the two rolled silks recently knotted and laid aside. Take corner “X” in the right hand, allowing the red rainbow to fall into view, Figure 101. This hand still contains the palmed rainbow. Grasp the rainbow at its center with the left hand, then lay it over the right fist, Figure 106. Tuck the rainbow inside of the right fist with the left hand, then pull the palmed rainbow into view, Figure 107, creating the illusion that the vanished rainbow which reappeared tied between the silks has now been magically removed from the string. Gather the rainbow into a ball by crumpling it with the left hand. Place the silk in the left pocket (actually in top of pocket) ala “top-if-pocket” dodge, Figure 360 Page 515 Volume 1. Now pull the silks away from the right hand, finding the rainbow back between the solids again Figure 108

Repeat Self-Jieing 20th Century * U.

F.

G R A N T

Effect : A vanished rainbow ties itself between two solids ; then a second vanished rainbow joins the first, Figure 113. Required ; Six 18” silks as shown in Figure 109, and a prepared paper cone, Figure 135, page 322, Volume I. Preparation : Join the silks by sewing as in Figure 110, then place the rainbows in the bags, Figure 111. Presentation : 1. Display the silk bags, holding one in each hand. 2. Bring the silks together in the right hand, secretly bringing snaps together. 3. At the same time, use free left hand to obtain a chair. 4. Lay (do not roll) the silks on the seat of the chair. 5. Vanish the red tipped rainbow in the cone, Page 322, Volume 1. 6. Grasping the blue bag at the snap, raise the silks to show the vanished rainbow has tied (?) itself between the solids, Figure 112. 7. Lay the silks on the chair again. 8. Vanish the blue tipped rainbow in cone.

22

9.

Grasping the blue bag at corner “X”, Figure 112, raise the silks and show both rainbows tied between the solids, Figure 113.

Turn of the Century *

L E N

23 B E L C H E R

Here is a delightfully different version! Effect : A vanished silk appears at the end of the chain of two silks instead of between them, Figure 116. Then, in a flash, it appears in its proper place, Figure 117. Required : In addition to an 18” yellow and an 18” red, the prepared 18” silks shown in Figure 114 are needed. Presentation : 1. Holding the blue bag as in Figure 115, tie the red silk to the tip “B”. 2. Bunch the silks and place then in a glass tumbler, end “A” of the blue bag at the top. 3. Vanish the yellow silk, Chapter 8, Volume 1. 4. Take end “A” and pull sharply, yellow silk No. 1 coming into view, Figure 116.

5.

6.

Register surprise, take corner “X”, Figure 116, of the red silk, in the right hand, then release, corner “A” as you swing the chain of silks down with a snapping action. The yellow (No. 1) vanishes from the end and reappears (yellow No. 2) between the red d h bl ilk Fi 117

Reverse Presentation

24

In effects explained thus far, a vanished silk re appears between two silks knotted together previously. Now for the effect in some reverse versions !

20th Century In Reverse *

R O B E R T

25 H A R B I N

Effect : Three silks knotted together are displayed as in Figure 121,when suddenly the center silk comes free of the other two, Figure 122. Required : Two 18” silks prepared as in Figure 118, and an 18” yellow silk. Presentation : 1. Show the two silks, Figure 119, then tie the yellow between them, using the UPSET SQUARE KNOT, Figure 120. (See Chapter18 for details of this knot.) 2. Holding the silks as in Figure 121, move the head upwards and

the hands downwards and outwards, causing the yellow silk to pull free and the prepared silks to join, Figure 122. 5. Figure 123 shows the position of the two prepared silks at the finish.

Reverse English *

B A L D W I N

26 F.

D A L Y

Effect : A rainbow vanishes, Figure 127, from a string of silks held by an assistant, Figure 126, then reappears at the other end of the string of silks, Figure 129. Required : Two duplicate 18” rainbows, a solid 18” orange, and a purple

purple bag, Figure 13. A Palmo Ball, Chapter 13. Preparation : Tie the silks as in Figure 124. (Note : the first rainbow is tied with the Upset Square Knot, Figure 120, which is fully explained in Figure 2-7, Chapter 18.) Now place the second rainbow in the bag, Figure 125. Presentation : 4. Assistant holds silks as in Figure 126. 5. With Palmo ball palmed, show hands empty, then get the ball in the left hand, Chapter 13. 6. Approach assistant, tuck rainbow into left fist (and ball), secretly slip silk free of orange silk, steal ball in the right hand, Chapter 13, and retain orange corner in the left hand, Figure 127. 7. Noticing the assistant’s left hand is in your way, slide his hand along the orange silk about 6” to the right, using your right hand, Figure 128. At the same time secretly slip the palmed ball into the assistant’s left hand. 8. Now open your left hand, dropping the orange corner, and

1.

2.

State silk is floating invisibly in the air, then move about the stage, grabbing from time to time at the invisible silk. Step to the assistant’s right, grasp the protruding corner “B” (Figure 125) and pull the rainbow into view, Figure 129.

9

Assistant waves string of silks in the air as performer takes his bows, Figure 130.

Cylinders And Silks

F R E D E R I C K

Effect : A white silk between red and blue silks in a covered cylinder vanishes and reappears between a red and blue in a second covered cylinder, Figure 141. Required : In addition to the apparatus shown in Figure 131, 6-12” silks (2 each in red, white and blue) are needed. Preparation : Roll a white silk (Chapter 3,

27 M O N T A G U E

Volume 1), then hold it in place inside of cover No. 2, with a pin, Figure 132. Presentation ; 1. Display cylinders and covers, holding them as in Figure 133. 2. Into cylinder No. 1 tuck three silks, Figure 134. 3. Into cylinder No. 2 tuck a red and a blue, leaving the center open, Figure 135. (Note : the red is forced well to the front of the cylinder.) 4. Place cover No. 1 over cylinder No. 1, Figure 136. 5. Now place cover No. 2 over cylinder No. 2, fingers which palm white silk fixed to the pin pressing the red silk to the front to allow the white silk to fall behind it and into the center space of the cylinder, Figure 137. 6. Pick up assembly No. 1 (Figure 136), pull red and blue silks into view, Figure 138, then tuck them back inside. 7. Take the assembly away with the left hand, palming th hit silk i th i ht h d Fi 139

9.

10.

Lift the cover of the assembly No. 2 slowly, disclosing the white silk in the center, Figure 140. Now lift the cover of the assembly No. 1 to show the white silk missing, Figure 141.

Silken Flight

F R E D E R I C K

28 M O N T A G U E

Here is another version of the 20 . Century. th

Effect : A white silk tied between orange and green silks and sealed in a glass cylinder, Figure 144, vanishes and reappears between a red and blue silk in a box, Figure 149. Required : In addition to the apparatus in Figure 142, 8-18” silks (2 each red, white and blue, and an orange and a green ), tissue paper, rubber bands, and a borrowed linen hank are needed.

Preparation : Tie a red, a white, and a blue silk in a chain and deposit them in compartment “B” of the box, Figure 143. Presentation : 1. Tie the remaining white silk between the orange and green silks, using two Upset Square Knots, Figure 120. 2. Place silks in the cylinder, Figure 144, then put tissue and bonds in place, Figure 145. 3. Knot the red and blue silks together, drop them into compartment “A”, Figure 143, then press the flap to allow part of the silks in compartment “B”, to come into view, Figure 146. 4. Toss the borrowed hank over the cylinder, Figure 147. 5. Command the white silk to leave the cylinder and pass into the box. 6. Pull the linen hank and the hidden white silk away, Figure 148, showing the white silk has escaped the cylinder. 7. Pull the string of silks from the box, Figure 149.

Fly-Silk *

29 A R N O L D

D E S E I V E R

Here is a slightly different version of Montague’s SILKEN FLIGHT. The center silk, Figure 144, vanishes and reappears at the end of a pistol. A pistol with a metal cylinder fastened to its handle contains a silk attached to an elastic, Figure 150. Presentation ; 1. Cover glass cylinder (Figure 145) as in Figure 151. 2. Transfer covered cylinder to the left hand, secretly stealing and palming the center white silk in the right hand under cover of the linen hank. 3. Pickup the gun, secretly dropping the palmed white silk on your table. 4. Fire at the covered cylinder, trigger finger pushing elastic from under the trigger, Figure 152. 5. Lay the gun aside, then remove the hank to show the white silk has vanished, Figure 148.

20th Century In Reverse * G L E N N

30 G R A V A T T

Effect : Three silks knotted together are placed in a glass, Figure 154, sealed in a can, Figure 155, and covered with a bandana, Figure 156. When the glass is removed the center silk has vanished, Figure 158. Required : A prepared drinking glass, a prepared can, Figure 153; and a red, a white, and a blue 18” silk. Presentation : 1. Tie the white silk between the red and blue silks using the Upset Square Knot, Figure 120. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Place the silks in the glass, white protruding thru hole, Figure 154. Place the glass in the can and put the lid in place, Figure 155. Cover the can with the bandana, Figure 158. Withdraw the bandana, pulling the white silk with it, Figure 157. Remove the glass from the con and display the two silks, Figure 158.

Silk In Chancery *

L E N

31 B E L C H E R

Effect ; A yellow silk, tied between a red and a green, vanishes then reappears, tied to a blue. Required : Tie the yellows to the blue, Figure 160, then roll the yellow (Chapter 3, Volume 1) into the blue, and hold it in place with a pin, Figure 161. Place the fake, Figure 159, over the edge of the glass. Presentation : 1. Display the yellow attached to the blue, Figure 162, then remove the yellow. Place the blue back on the table. 2. Tie the yellow silk to the red and green with the Upset Square Knot, Figure 120. 3. Holding the glass containing the fake in your left hand, tuck the red into the glass with i ht N tl li

the yellow into the glass and fake. Finally, push the green into the glass. 4. As you set the glass on the table with your left hand, steal out the fake and yellow silk in your right, Figure 163. 5. As you reach for the blue (and yellow) silk, leave the fake on the tube. 6. Display the blue, then place it in the empty tumbler, secretly withdrawing the pin, Figure 164. 7. Remove the red and green silks, showing the yellow gone.

Chancery Impromptu * D E N N I S

H.

32 V I C K E R Y

Effect : A yellow silk, tied between a red and a green, vanishes then reappears, tied to a blue silk. Required : Two 12” yellow, a red, a green, and a blue 12” silk, and an Ideal Color Change tube, (Figure 2, Chapter 13) are needed.

Preparation : Tie a yellow to the blue, Figure 166, then roll the yellow into the blue, Figure 167. Wrap a thin thread around the ball once, Figure 169. Presentation : 3. Taking the blue silk in the right hand, place it in the left, knot in palm, Figure 169. 4. Display the balance of the silks one at a time; place them in the left hand, Figure 170. 5. Take the prepared blue in the right hand, palming the yellow knot. 6. Ball the blue silk one-handed, secretly slipping off the thread. The rolled yellow should be securely wrapped within the balled blue. This move sounds difficult but is very easy. 7. Place the balled blue (containing yellow) in the palm of a spectator, then ask him to close his and around the silk, forming a fist. 8. Now tie the duplicate yellow between the red and green silks with Upset Square Knots, Figure 120. 7. Display the chain of silks with your left as you steal the Ideal Color Change tube from your right pocket. 1. Transfer the tube to your left hand (Chapter 13) as you take the silks in your right. 2. Now tuck the red silk into your left fist beside the tube, Figure 171.

10. 11. 12. 13. 14.

15.

Secretly slip the first knot, the tuck the yellow silk into the tube. Slip the second knot, then tuck the green silk on the other side of the tube, Figure 172. Steal the tube in the right hand, then immediately pull a corner of the red and green silks into view, Figure 173. Put the right hand in your pocket to obtain “Woofle Dust “, leaving the tube behind. Open the left hand, showing the yellow silk has vanished. Whip the blue silk from the spectator’s hand and show the yellow attached, Figure 165.

Switch Reverse *

H A R O L D

33 R.

R I C E

By using a changing bag (Figure 182, Page 334, Volume 1), a switch can be made. Red , white and blue silks are knotted together, and dropped into the bag, Figure 174. The handle is turned, and then corners of the duplicate red and blue pulled into view, Figure 175. A duplicate white silk is found in some unsuspected

place, then the red and blue pulled from the bag, showing the white has vanished, Figure 176.

Century-Twentieth * Here is another changing bag method. Effect : A blue silk, tied between two reds, vanishes. Required : A changing bag (Figures 182, Page 334, Volume 1), two 18” red and one 18” blue silk. Preparation: Knot the reds to gether, Figure 177. Presentation : 1. Display the silks, Figure 178. 2. Tie the blue silk between the reds, Figure 179,using the Upset Square Knot, Figure 120. 3. Drop part of the silks into the Changing Bag,

34

4.

5.

secretly releasing the blue silk, Figure 180. Grasp one of the corners “B” and display the red silks knotted, blue silk missing, Figure 181. Turn the handle of the bag, then show the blue silk has vanished.

Unprepared Silks

35

A number of clever variation using unprepared silks have been developed over the post twenty years. Because of limited space, I will be brief in instances where the details have been given earlier, or are obvious to the reader.

Carlyle’s Rainbow 20th Century * L Y L E

F.

36

L A U G H L I N

This effect appeared in Volume 4 of the famous Tarbell course. Effect : A vanished rainbow reappears between two ordinary solid colored silks, Figure 192. Required : Four 18” silks.. a blue, a green, and two duplicate rainbows, Figure 182; a small rubber band. Preparation : Tie a rainbow to the blue, Figure 183. Fold the rainbow as

in Figures 184 and 185, then roll it, Figure 186. Place the rolled rainbow on the blue, Figure 187. Now roll the rainbow inside of half of the blue, Figure 188, and place the rubber band on the silks, Figure 189. Presentation : 1. Display the solids, Figure 190. 2. Secretly slip off the rubber band (Figure 189), then knot tip “C” to the green silk, Figure 191. Place the silks in a glass tumbler, green silk at the top. 3. Vanish duplicate rainbow, Chapter 8, Volume 1. 4. Grasp a corner of the green silk, snap the silks into the air, and display the string of three, Figure 192.

Carleley’s Solids 20th Century

37

This version is prepared and presented exactly as in No. 36, but a solid white and a solid white with a blue corner, Figure 193, are used instead of the rainbows, Figure 182.

Baker’s 20th Century

38 A L

B A K E R

Magicians have seen Al Baker do his version of this famous effect many times. Effect : A white silk vanishes, then reappears, tied between two silks knotted together earlier by a spectator. Required : An AL’Baker Dye Tube, Figure 30, Chapter 14 ; Seven 18” silks (2 each, red, white and blue ; one orange ); A sheet of stiff paper. Preparation : Tie a white silk between a red and a blue. Load the white (center) silk into the tube, Figure 194, then the red and blue together. Presentation ; Baker usually used a small boy and girl to assist him. As this routine makes use of No. 87 AL BAKER’S ROUTINE, Chapter 14, refer to it as you study this effect.

5. 6. 7.

8.

1. 2. 3.

4.

Give the boy the red and blue silks, and the girl the white one. Place the arrange silk in your right pocket. As the boy ties the red and blue silks together Figure 191, load the Baker Tube into the paper cylinder, Chapter 14. Tuck the boy’s knotted silks into the bottom of the cylinder. If the tube was properly loaded, its blue and red (but not the white) will be ejected and appear at the top of the cylinder, Figure 195. Steal the tube in the right hand. Leave the tube as you take the orange silk from your right coat pocket, Chap 14. Tie the orange silk around the paper cylinder, Chap 14. Take the girl’s white silk, then vanish it. Chapter 8, Volume 1. Have the boy and girl pull the three silks from the cylinder, Figure 196. Unroll the empty paper cylinder.

Douglas 20th Century *

B E R T

39 D O U G L A S

Effect : The performer places in his mouth the knot of two silks tied together, Figure 202. Then a rainbow silk is vanished. The silks are withdrawn from the mouth, Figure 203, and the rainbow appears tied between them, Figure 204. Stroking the silks, the performer produces a billiard ball, Figure 205, which he vanishes. Finally the ball reappears in the performer’s mouth, Figure 206. Required ; Two 12” duplicate rainbows, Figure 197, two 1½” hollow billiard balls, and an 18 green and an 18” blue silk.

Preparation: Tie the corner of a rainbow to the blue silk, Figure 197, then tuck the rainbow into one of the balls, the blue corner protruding, Figure 198. Place the green silk over the prepared ball and the second ball under the duplicate rainbow. Presentation: 1. Pick up the blue silk in your right hand, Figure 199, and the green in your left, Figure 200. 2. Tie the silk together, Figure 201, then place part of the silk (and the ball) in your mouth, Figure 202. 3. Pick up the second ball and rainbow, keeping the ball palmed in your right hand as the silk is freely shown. Work the rainbow into the ball, Figures 5-9, Page 363, Volume 1. 4. Pretend to pass the silk (ball) into the left hand, dropping the right hand (containing the palmed ball) to you right side. 5. Strike the top of your head with your left palm, then lift your hand and show it empty. It appears the silk passed thru your head. 6. Taking the silks as in Figure 203,slowly pull the rainbow into view, then display it, Figure 204. 7. Holding the silks as in Figure 205, stroke them with the right hand, producing the palmed ball, Figure 205. 8. Lay the silks over the left shoulder. 9. Take the ball in your right fingers, then execute the FRENCH DROP, Figures 13-16, Page 293, Volume 1. 10. With the ball palmed in your right hand, strike the top of your head with your left. 11. Open your empty left hand. 12. Open your mouth and disclose the ball, Figure 206. 13. Remove the ball with your left hand. 14. Take the silks from your shoulder with your right hand. 15. Lay the silks and palmed ball (in your right hand) aside as you display the ball in your left hand. Note: Some performers use solid color silks (with the center one prepared as in Figure 193) and ping-pong balls (with holes cut in them) instead of the hollow billiard balls.

Spalding’s 20th Century*

S P A L D I N G

I am most grateful to Spalding for releasing this exclusive to me. Effect : Performer changes a cigarette to an 18” silk. Then the silk becomes two ! A spectator ties the silks together as the performer rolls a piece of paper into a cylinder. The spectator places the silks in the cylinder. Next the performer introduces a third silk, then vanishes it. Finally, the spectator tops the cylinder and vanished silk reappears, tied between the two silks knotted together by the spectator. Required : Six 18’ silks (2 red, 2 yellow, 2 green) ; an Al Baker dye tube; a sheet of stiff paper ; a finger tip. Preparation : Tie a red , yellow, and green silk together and place them in the Baker tube, FIGURE 194. Place the tube on the table, paper over it. Put the thumb tip on the left thumb. Accordion pleat the red silk and place it in the left sleeve, Page 373. Place accordion pleated green silk in right sleeve and yellow in coat pocket, Figure 207. Presentation : 1. Borrow a cigarette, light it,

40

4. 5.

6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

11.

2.

3.

then change it to red silk, SPALDING’S CIGARETTE TO SILK, Page 373, Chapter 9, Volume 1. Holding the red silk in the right hand, Figure 208, pull it down through the right palm, Figure 209. Holding corner “B” of the red silk with the right hand as in Figure 209, steal corner “C” of the sleeved green silk, Figure 210, with the first two fingers of the left hand. Close the right fist as the green is added to red, Figure 211. Extend your arms in opposite directions, bringing the green silk behind the red, Figure 212. Holding the two silks as one, Figure 212, but parallel to the floor, drop corner “B”, then “C”, disclosing you have two silks, Figure 213. Hand the two silks to a spectator; requesting him to tie two corners together, Figure 191. As he does, form the paper into a cylinder with the due tube inside (No. 28, Holden Method, Chapter 14) but further up inside than ordinarily handled in this method, Figure 214. Ask the spectator to crumple his silks, then to tuck them up into the end of the cylinder, Figure 215.

Now allow the dye tube to drop down in the cylinder as you push the silks up and into the tube, Figure 216. Show the right hand empty, then transfer the cylinder to

2. 3. 4. 5.

6.

the right hand as you show your left hand empty. Hand the cylinder to the spectator. As he takes it away, the dye tube drops into your right hand, Figure 217. Take the yellow silk from your right pocket, Figure 207, leaving the dye tube in your pocket. Vanish the yellow silk, Chapter 8, Volume 1. Ask the spectator to blow thru the cylinder. The vanished yellow appears tied between the spectator’s silks, Figure 218.

A “Switch” 20th Century *

S T E W A R T

41 J U D A H.

Effect: A vanished silk reappears between two knotted together earlier, Figure 224. Required : Six 12” silks ( 2 each, red, yellow and blue) and a goblet. Preparation : Tie a red, a yellow, and a blue in a string, Figure 224. Roll the silks into a ball, the red silk on the outside. Place the silk behind

some object and beside the goblet, Figure 219. Place the yellow silk in your right coat pocket. Presentation : 1. Tie a red one a blue silk together, roll them, red to the outside, then place them in full view, Figure 220. 2. Standing to the right of your table, reach for the goblet with your right hand. 3. As you pass the three silks, palm them, then pick up the goblet, Figure 221. 4. Show the goblet, then transfer it to the left hand. 5. Pick up the two silks in your right hand, Figure 222. 6. Appear to drop the two silks into the goblet. Instead, deposit the three, Figure 223. 7. Place the goblet (containing three silks) on the table and reach in your right coat pocket for the remaining yellow silk, secretly leaving the palmed ball of two silks behind. 8. Vanish the yellow silk, Chapter 8, Volume 1. 9. Remove the three silks, Figure 224.

Hat And Silks Combination * H A R L A N

42 T A R B E L L

Effect : A vanished silk reappears between two single silks dropped into a hat earlier. The three silks are untied and vanished. They reappear in the hot. Required : Six 12” silks (2 each, green, red, and blue) , and a felt hat. Preparation : Prepare 3 silks as in Figure 225. Starting with corner “A’, accordion pleat the silks, Figure 226. Wind corner “B” around the bundle, then hold it in place with a piece of tape, Figure 227. Drop the silks into a felt hat, Figure 228. Place the remaining 3 silks on your table.

Presentation : 1. Pick up the hat with your left hand, stealing the silks in your right, Figure 229. 2. Take the hat in your right hand, brim hiding the silks. 3. Release the brim held in your left hand, then turn to your right, showing the inside of the hat to the audience, Figure 230. 4. Reverse these moves, getting the silks back into the hot, Figure 229. 5. Set the hat on the table, Figure 228.

6. 7. 8. 9.

10.

11. 12.

13.

Pick up the green silk in your left hand, the blue in your right. Drop the silks in the hat, one at a time. Reach in the hat, remove the tape from the bundle , Figure 228, and loosen the silks. Take the remaining red silk in your left hand, roll it into a ball, and pretend to hold it in your left fist, actually palming it in your right, Figures 3-6, Chapter 8, Volume 1. Keeping the left fist closed, reach into the hat with the right, leaving the palmed red in the hot. Take corner “B” (Figure 227) in your right hand. Whip the silks from the hat and into view, Figure 224, as you open the left hand to show it empty. Untie the silks, then vanish them in a Tarbell Cone, Figures 121-133, Chapter 8, Volume 1. After showing the hands empty, reach into the hat, produce the three single silks one at a time, and finally show the hat empty.

New Silk Cabby *

H A S K E L

43 S C H W E I D E L

In Chapter 14 explained Sellers’ Silk Cabby, Effect No. 83. By replacing the original fake (Chapter 14, Figure 214) with one of a different style, Figure 231, the cabby may be used for the 20th century.

Effect : Vanished silks reappear tied between silks in a box, Figure 235. Required : A silk cabby (Chapter 14, Figure 212) equipped with a Haskel fake. Figure 231; 12 -12” solid color silks (2 each green purple, yellow, blue, red and orange ) and 4-12” white. Preparation : Knot 8 silks into a string, Figure 232. Tuck the silks into compartment “B”, a white silk at each end.

Presentation : 1. Show the empty cabby, Chapter 14, Figure 212,then close doors. 2. Tie two white silks together, then insert them in a hole at one end of the cabinet, and into small compartment “A”, Figure 231. 3. Reach thru the hole at the other end of the cabby and

4. 5. 6.

7.

pull on end of the duplicate white from compartment “B” into view. Now pull end of remaining white duplicate into view. Set the cabby on a table, Figure 233. Vanish a green silk, Chapter 8, Volume 1. Pull the green silk into view, Figure 234. Continue, vanishing another silk, then having it reappear tied to those pulled from the cabby, until all the silks have vanished and reappeared, Figure 235. Show the cabby empty, Chapter 14, Figure 212.

Fantasy In Silks *

O L A F

44 C O R S E N

Here is another cabby version of the 20th century. Effect : A vanished blue silk reappears tied to another blue silk in a cabby. The two blues are placed back in the cabby, and a vanished red silk reappears, tied between them. Required : A silk cabby with Figure 231 fake ; Five blue and two red 12” silks. Preparation : Prepare two blues as in Figures 23-239, and two blues and a red as in Figures 240-244. Place the ball of three (Figure 244) behind some object on table.

Presentation : 1. Show the cabby empty (for details, see Effect No. 83, Ch. 14). 2. Pick up the two blue silks as one, Figure 239, and place them in the cabby, corners “A-C” thru the holes, Figure 245. 3. Close the doors. 4. Vanish the unprepared remaining blue silk, Chapter 8, Volume 1. 5. Pull “A” and “C”, open the doors to show two blue silks joined, Figure 246, then remove the silks. 6. Set the cabby on table and in front of the ball of three silks, Figure 244. 7. Close the front door, push the ball of silks inside, then close the back door. 8. Pick up the cabby, raising the secret compartment, and tuck the blue silks into the cabby and compartment. 9. Lower the compartment, then ready thru the holes in the ends of the cabby and pull corners “A-D” (Figure 244) thru the holes, Figure 247. This forces the pin out of the ball of silks. 10. Vanish the red silk, Chapter 8, Volume 1.

Cream of the Jest *

P E T E R

45 W A R L O C K

Warlock presented this masterpiece for David Devant in 1922.

Effect : A strip of tissue and a silk change place between two knotted silks, Figure 261. Required : Six 18” silks (two each, red, yellow and green) ; a box of safety matches; a goblet and a tumbler two round table mats a; cigarette box; two rubber bands ; a chair servante ; black tissue paper ; and black flash paper.

Preparation : 1. Thru holes in a strip of tissue, Figure 249, tie two silks, Figure 250. 2. Prepare the tissue-flash paper strip, Figure 251. 3. Coil-fold a yellow silk, Volume 1, Chapter 3, page 35. 4. The silk is to be produced from the match box later. Load the silk in the box as explained in the favorite method you select, Chapter 5, page 96-100, in Volume 1. 5. Place the loaded match box and folded tissue – flash paper

6. 7.

Arrange the apparatus on the table as in Figure 252, hinge edge of the box to the audience. The three remaining silks and goblet are on the chair with a servante, Figure 253.

Presentation: 1. Standing between the table on your left and the chair on your right, take the three silks and knot them together, Figure 240, roll them into a ball, and place a rubber band around them. 2. With the silk ball in your left hand, pick up the two mats and hidden ball in your right. 3. Appear to transfer the silk ball in your left hand into your right as you pass the mats from your right into your left and in front of the silk, Figure 254. 4. Instead, merely palm the ball in your left as it takes the mats,

5.

6. 7.

8.

9.

10. 11.

and bring the second ball into view in your right, Figure 255. Now move to the chair and drop the silks into the goblet as you drop the palmed silks behind the mats into the servante, Figure 256. Place a mat on top of the glass, then one under base, Figure 257. Return to the table and open the cigarette box. Remove the strip of tissue-flash paper, show it , fold it, Figure 258, then drop it upright into the tumbler on the table. Remove the matchbox from the cigarette box with your right hand. Remove a match; close the box, forcing the silk into your right hand, Chapter 5, Volume 1. Take the paper in your right hand and light the end with a match, Figure 259. Palmed silk is in correct position for production. Tissue will burn slowly. When flame reaches the flash paper, shake the yellow silk into view, Figure 260. Lay the silks aside. Take the ball of silks from the goblet, remove the rubber band, and show the tissue paper tied between the two silks, Figure 261.

Visible 20th. Century Frame *

L O Y D

Effect: A white silk vanishes and reappears tied between a red and a blue silk, Figure 265. Required: A frame with a weighted false bottom, Figure 262, with two half silks attached; a red, a blue, and two white 18” silks; a Joseph silk gun.

46

Preparation : Thread the ends of three knotted silks thru the holes, Figure 265. Now move the fake bottom up to the top where it is held in place with a catch. The white and parts of the red and blue silks are hidden from view, and the fake ends, Figure 262, now appear, Figure 263. Presentation: 1. Calling attention to the red and blue silks, Figure 263, show the frame on both sides. 2. Set the frame on a table, then knot the false silks together, Figure 264. 3. Produce the remaining white silk, Ch. 4 or 5, Volume 1. 4. Vanish the white silk in a Joseph gun, page 313, Volume 1. 5. As the gun is fired, release the catch, allowing the false bottom of the frame to fall, and the vanished white silk visibly appears, tied between the red and blue, Figure 265.

Grant’s 20th Century * U.

47 F.

G R A N T

Effect : A silk various, then reappears tied between two other silks, Figure 273. Required : Four 24” solid red silks. Preparation : Knot three of the silks at “B” as in Figure 266. Tie a small knot in corner “C” of the fourth silk, Figure 267.

Presentation : 1. Pick up the silks in the right hand, Figure 268. 2. Take “C” in the left hand, Figure 269, and count “one”. 3. Place “C” under the right thumb as you take “AAA” in the left hand, Figure 270. 4. Carry the three silks away as two, and count “two”, Figure 271. 5. Then add the last silk, and count “three”, Figure 272. 6. Now reverse the action. Take the single silk “C” into the right hand and count “one”, Figure 271. In taking a second silk, leave “C” in the left hand and take “AAA” in the right, Figure 269. 7. Lay “AAA” aside, then vanish the single silk, Chapter 8, Volume 1.

Pace’s 20th. Century Silks L.

A.

48 P A C E

Effect : A vanished rainbow reappears tied between two solid colored silks fastened to a fishing pole, Figure 283. Required : A 5’ casting rod, and four 24” silks (a red, a blue, and two duplicate rainbows with blue borders). Preparation : With a square knot tie the blue silk to the rainbow, about 1½” of corners “C-C” protruding, Figure 274. Place the rainbow on top of the blue, Figure 275, then fold corners “A-A” to the center, Figure 276. Continue folding until the rainbow is in a narrow strip, Figure 277. Now lay tip “B” about 2½” to the right of the knot, Figure 278. Next, tie a FAIRLY LOOSE single knot around the rainbow with corners “C-C”, Figure 279. Finally, fold the blue silk and hold it together with magician’s wax at points “X”, Figure 280.

Presentation : 1. Tie corner “B” (Figure 280) to a corner of the red silk, Figure 281. 2. Tie red corner “D” to the end of casting rod, Figure 282. 3. Have a spectator hold the rod while you vanish the duplicate rainbow silk, Chapter 8, Volume 1. 4. Take the rod, snap it sharply over the heads of the spectators, and the knot “C-C” (Figure 279) unties, allowing the rainbow to fall into view, Figure 283 !

Twenty-First Century Silks * L O R N E

D E

Effect : A vanished rainbow (or flag) reappears, tied between two solid colored silks. Required : Four 18” silks (a red, a blue, and two duplicate rainbows with a blue corner). Preparation : Tie a folded rainbow to the blue silk, Figure 284. Fold the rainbow over the knot, Figure 285. Now, bring corner “C” of the blue silk over the rainbow, Figure 286.

49 B L O I S

Finally, roll the blue silk loosely around the rainbow, Figure 287. Presentation : 1. Show the red and (prepared) blue silks and knot them together, Figure 281. 2. Tuck the silks into a drinking goes held by a spectator. 3. Vanish the duplicate rainbow, Chapter 8, Volume 1. 4. Produce the three silks from the glass, Figure 273. Twenty-Second Century Silks * M A J O R J O H N

50 C.

G O O D R U M

Here is a subtle variation of the De Blois method. Effect : A vanished rainbow appears tied between two (previously Required : Four 18” silks (a red, a blue, and two duplicate rainbows with a blue corner) and a small rubber band. Preparation : Prepare two silks as shown in Figures 284-287. Encircle the right thumb and the first finger with the rubber band, Figure 288. Presentation ; 1. Take the red silk in the left hand and the prepared blue in the right. 2. Transfer the red to the right hand, Figure 289. 3. Drop the silks to a chair, allowing

4. 5.

6.

7.

the rubber band to slip off the fingers on to the silks, Figure 290. Pick up the duplicate rainbow and tie a knot in each of two diagonally opposite corners, Figure 291. Vanish the silk, Chapter 8, Volume 1. Cause the vanished silk, and its two knots, to reappear between the two silks on the chair as you display them, Figure 273.

Improved 20th Century Silks *

M A N A G E R

Effect : A vanished flag reappears tied between two silks protruding from an envelope, Figure 298. Required : A red and a blue 18” silk; two 12” x 18” American flags; an envelope. Preparation : Tie a flag to the red silk, Figure 292. Fold the flag as in Figure 293. Presentation : 1. Take the prepared red silk (and flag) in your left hand, Figure 294. 2. Knot the blue silk to the red (flag) corner.

51

3. 4.

5. 6.

Ask a spectator to examine the envelope, then to push a hole thru its center with a pencil, Figure 295. Put the knotted silks in the envelope, Figure 296, then pull two diagonal corners thru the holes, Figure 297. Seal the envelope, then hand it to a spectator, asking him to hold the two silk corners between his hands. Show the duplicate flag, then vanish it, Chapter 8, Volume 1.

My 20th Century Routine* J.

E L D E R

52 B L A C K L E D G E

Blackledge has been performing this excellent version over 20 years! Effect : Two vanished rainbows reappear tied between two silks in a sealed envelope, Figure 307. Required : Two vanished rainbows reappear tied between two silks in a sealed envelope, Figure 307. Preparation : Tie two of the rainbows and the green together, Figure 299. Lay the two rainbows on the green, Figure 300. Fold the rainbows in

narrow strips, Figure 301, then bring the second rainbow back to the left, green corner “A” extended, Figure 302. Now roll the green a silk around the rainbows, Figure 303. Finally, fold the green silk once, Figure 304. Now roll the unprepared red to resemble Figure 303, then fold it as in Figure 304. Place both silks in the inside pocket of your coat. Attach the pull to your right side, Figure 46, Page 300, Chapter 8, Volume 1. Place the two remaining rainbows in your breast coat pocket.

Presentation : 1. 2.

3. 4. 5.

6. 7.

8. 9.

Show the envelope empty, then lay it aside. Remove the red and green silks from your inside pocket with your left hand. Hold the silks at their top corners, allowing the silks to unfold. Take the green silk in your left hand, keeping the small rainbows hidden within the folds. Tie the red corners to “A” of the green (rainbow, Figure 303). Crumple the two silks and place them in the empty envelope, free corner of the red resting in a corner of the envelope, Figure 305. Seat the envelope and lay it aside. Take the two rainbows from your breast coat pocket in your left hand.

Tie the two rainbows together. Holding the two silks in your left hand, steal the pull

in your right. 10. Take the two silks at their knot in your right hand, Figure 306. 11. As you patter, work the silks into the pull with your right hand. 12. Close the right fist and allow the pull to go under coat. 13. Open your empty right hand as you toss the silks “invisibly” into the envelope.

Unprepared 20th Century

N E L S O N

53 H A H N E

Effect : A vanished red silk reappears tied between a blue and a green. Required : Four 18” silks (a blue, a green, and two red). Preparation ; Tie a red silk securely between a blue and a green, Figure 273. Roll the red silk into a ball around the tip of the left forefinger, then tuck

the last corner of the silk into the center of this ball, Figure 308. Take the blue and green silk at corners “X-X”, and lay the silks on a table, the rolled silk hidden from view. Presentation : 1. Pick up the blue and green silks at “X-X” (red hidden from view). 2. Tie a fake knot, Figures 309311, with corners “X-X”. 3. Lay the silks over the left palm. As you do, free the fake knot with a finger of the right hand, Figure 312. 4. Show right hand empty. 5. Now drape the silks over the left arm, rolled red hidden, Figure 313. 6. Display the red silk to be vanished, then lay it aside. 7. Roll the green and blue (with rolled red between) and ask a spectator to hold them. 8. Vanish the duplicate red, Ch. 8, Volume 1.

Silks Of Mephisto *

A F T E R

54 L E E

G R E Y

(I have taken certain liberties which I feel improve the original method.) Effect : A vanished white silk reappears tied between a red and a blue silk, Figure 324. Required : A red and a blue 18” silk ; two 12” white silks; a small bead. Preparation ; Tie a small bead in a knot very close to corner “A” of a white silk, Figure 314. Now tie white corner “B” to blue corner “C” with a square knot, Figure 315. Fold the white silk into a narrow strip, them place it on the blue silk, Figure 316. Now roll the blue silk around the white, Figure 317. Roll the red silk to resemble the blue. Place the two silks on the table. Finally, tuck the remaining white silk in your coat breast pocket. Presentation : 1. Take the red silk in one hand, the blue in your other, and tie a loose square knot, Figure 318. 2. Pull the blue corner “D” to the left, upsetting the square knot, Figure 319. 3. Now slide the loose upset knot as near corner “D” of the blue silk as possible, Figure 320. 4. Drape the red silk over your right hand, Figure 321, place your right hand thumb on the loose upset knot “X”, and pull the white knot “A” up about 1” with your left hand, Figure 322. 5. Remove the white silk from your breast pocket with your left hand as you tuck the upset knot in your pocket with

6. 7. 8.

your right, Figure 323. Vanish the white silk, Chapter 8, Volume 1. Leaving the silks in their Figure 323 position, take the red silk at “h’ in one hand and the blue at ”E” in the other, and separate the hands sharply. 9. The white appears between the red and the blue, Figure 324. Note : If blue corner “D” (Figure 322) doesn’t slip out of the upset k t “X” it ti d t ti ht t t N 1 (Fi 318 d 319)

Roped In *

55 W I L L A R D

S.

S M I T H

Effect : A vanished white silk reappears, tied on a rope between two other silks, Figure 336. Required : Four 12” silks (two white, a red, and a blue) : a prepared rope 3½’ long, Figure 326. Preparation : Replace the core removed from half the length of the rope with a piece of round rubber elastic, Figure 325. Stretch the elastic, knot both ends of the rope, then clip the elastic close to end “A”, Figure 326. Elastic is taut. Knot a white silk around the elastic at “B”, Figure 327. Fold the white silk, accordion fashion, Figure 328, roll it into a ball, then tie it loosely with a weak thread, Figure 329. Place rope and silks over the back of a chair, Figure 330. Presentation : 3. Show the three silks, then toss the duplicate white over your left shoulder, keeping the other two silks in your 2. Pick up the rope at its center, palming rolled silk in right hand. 1. Give a silk to each of two spectators. 2. Take “elastic” end “A” (Figure 327) of the rope in your left hand.

5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

13. 14.

15.

Have a spectator tie his silk at point “X”, Figure 331. Turn to the second spectator, dropping end “A” and taking “C” in your left hand. Have assistant tie his silk to rope at “Y”, Figure 332. Drape rope over the back of the chair, Figure 333. Take duplicate white silk and vanish it, Ch. 8, Vol. 1. Step behind chair, pick up rope again, rolled silk in your right hand, “elastic “end “A” in your left. Keeping rope taut, raise the left hand so rope is vertical. The two silks hang down, hiding the rope from view. Still holding the rolled silk, reach down and take end “C” of the rope in your right hand, stretching elastic as you do, Figure 334. Now bring the rope to a horizontal position, Figure 335. Rope taut, release the palmed silk. It will fly to the center of the rope, the sudden snap throwing of the thread, Figure 336. Center silk may appear behind the rope. If so, give rope a half turn with the fingers.

Silk Epic *

56 H E N

F E T S C H

This is Fetsch’s famous prize winning effect ! Effect : A single yellow silk becomes tied between a previously knotted red and green silk, Figure 345. Required : Six 12” silks (2 each…red, yellow, and green). Preparation : Knot four of the silks, Figure 336, then accordion pleat three of them, Figure 337, and wrap end “A” around the bundle, Figure 338. Place the bundle in the right coat pocket, the yellow silk in the inner match or coin pocket, Figure 339. Tuck the remaining red and green silks in the left coat pocket. Presentation ; 1. Remove the red silk, displaying it on both sides, then repeat with the green. 2. Knot the two silks, and hold them in your left hand, Figure 340. 3. Reach in your right coat pocket, palm the bundle “X” of silks, displaying the yellow, Figure 341. 4. Take the red and green silks at knot “B’ (Figure 341) in the right hand, Figure 342. 5. Taking the bottom corners of the three silks with the left hand, the right (containing bundle “X”) winds the silks (in a circular motion) into a small ball in the left hand. The left secret bundle “X” in the left hand, Figure 343. 6. Snap the left hand downward sharply, allowing bundle “X” to unroll, Figure 344.

Go-Between Silk *

M I L BO U R N E

57 C H R I S T O P H E R

Effect : A vanished rainbow reappears tied between two red silks, Figure 345 Required : Two 18” red silks and two 18” duplicate rainbow silks with a corner matching the silks. Preparation : Knot a rainbow to a red silk, Figure 346. Roll the rainbow, Figure 347, then wind all but about 2” of end “A” tightly around the red silk, Figure 348. Finally tuck all but an inch of corner “A” into the folds, Figure 349. (use a rubber band to hold the rainbow if you prefer). Presentation : 1. Take the two red silks and the duplicate rainbow in your left hand. 2. Take the rainbow in your right hand, display it, then toss it over your right shoulder, Figure 350. 3. Take the unprepared red silk at “C” in your right hand and tie “C” to “A”. 4. Right hand covering the knot and the rolled rainbow, place the silks across the bend of your left elbow, Figure 351. 5. Take the rainbow form your shoulder with your right hand,

6. 7. 8.

9.

bring your hands together, and roll the silk between them, palming the rolled silk in your right hand as you pretend to have it in your left. (Figures 3-7, Page 291, Chapter 8, Volume 1) Point to closed left fist with the index finger of your closed right hand. Place corner “X” in left hand, Figure 352 Take corner “X” in your right hand and pull the red silk thru the left fist, continuing until the rainbow (Figure 353) and most of the second red silk pass thru the left fist. It appears the rainbow (which supposedly was in the left hand) becomes tied between the two reds as they pass thru the left hand. Display the silks, Figure 345.

Tri-Tie *

58 H E N

F E T S C H

Effect : All but three silks held by the performer drop to the floor. The remaining silks are knotted together and match the colors in a flag imprinted on a card selected by a spectator. Required : Fourteen 12” silks (2 each of 7 colors, including red, white, and blue). One silk is special, Figure 354. A quantity of flag cards.

The Secret : Few people know the flags of 18 nations are colored red, white, and blue. Thus, regardless of which card a spectator freely selects, its flag will be red, white, and blue ! However, if you prefer to include flags with other colors, you must force a red, white, and blue flag card. Preparation : Place a rubber band around the pocket of flag cards. Knot three of the silks as in Figure 355. Place the white and blue silks on the red, Figure 356, then roll the red silk, Figure 357. Presentation : 1. Without removing the rubber band, call attention to the pocket of cards, explaining each has a different flag imprinted thereon. 2. Toss the packet to a spectator. 3. Pick up the silks one by one, holding them in the left hand, Figure 358. 4. Tell the spectator to remove a card from his packet (with out removing the rubber band) and return the balance to you. 5. Ask the spectator to name the flag and its color. 6. When the colors are named, drop all of the silks but the prepared red corner, and the three seem to join in color harmony, Figure 359.

A Good 20th. Century Effect V E R R A L L

W A S S

Effect : A vanished silk reappears, tied between two other silks dropped into a hat earlier. Required: Four 12” silks (two white, a red, and a blue); a vanishing hank wand (Figure 96, Page 315, Volume 1); a fake which clips over the wand, Figure 360. A sheet of newspaper. Preparation : Tie a white silk between a red and a blue, Figure 266. Roll, the fold the center white silk, and place it in the metal fake, Figure 361. Clip the fake to the center of the wand, draping the silk as in Figure 362. Drop the white silk over the center of the wand, Figure 363. Presentation : 4. Borrow a hat. 5. Display the silks on the wand, remove the center white silk, and

59

1.

2.

3. 6.

7.

place it in your breast pocket. Slide the silks and fake down the wand and into the hat, palming the fake, Figure 364, in the right hand. Transfer the wand to your right hand, then lay wand and fake aside. Place the red and a blue corner of the silks in view, Figure 365. Form the newspaper into a cone, then vanish the duplicate white silk with the handkerchief wand, Page 315, Volume 1. Produce the three silks from hat, Figure 273.

Rice’s 20th. Century * H A R O L D

60 R.

R I C E

I have used this clean cut version with success. Effect: A vanished wide border silk reappears tied between two others of different colors, Figure 28. Required : Four wide border 18” silks, Figure. 366. Preparation : Tie a yellow silk to the green, Figure 367. Roll the yellow silk, turn back corner “B” of the green silk, Figure 368, and replace it with “A” of the yellow, Figure 369. Starting at the knot “C”, roll the green silk around the yellow. Use a paper clip to hold everything in place, Figure 370.

Presentation : The presentation is the same as given in this chapter for No. 36, Carlyle’s 20th Century.

The Flying Silk * E.

B R I A N

61 M A C

C A R T H Y

Effect : A knot, then an orange silk vanish. The orange silk is found knotted to a previously shown single green silk. Required : Three 27” silks (2 orange and a green). Preparation : About 2” from a corner of the orange silk tie a corner of the green silk with a very small knot, Figure 371. Holding the green silk as in Figure 372, wrap corner “A” around the left thumb, Figure 373. Now wrap about half of the orange silk tightly around the thumb. Continue, winding all but 1” of the silk at right angles, Figure 374. Finally, holding the orange ball tightly, gently pull on the green silk until the knot

emerges, Figure 376. Add the second orange silk, Figure 377, then place the silks on the table, Figure 378. Presentation : 1. Pick up the silks in your left hand, Figure 377, as you show your right hand empty. 2. Place the silks in your right hand, Figure 379, and then show your left hand empty. 3. Take the orange corner “X” in your left hand, and throw the silks over your left shoulder. 4. Take the orange ball in your left hand, Figure 380, slide the right hand along an edge of the green silk, and display the silk on both sides, Figure 381. 5. Roll the green silk into a loose ball (around the orange silk), then lay it in a table. As you do, pull on the greens ilk to remove the center of the orange silk. 6. Tie a “VANISHING” knot, Chapter 13, Figures 128-131, in the orange silk. Toss the (fake) knot invisibly to the green silk on the table. 7. As invisible knot is “thrown” , steal the pull and vanish the orange silk. (Chapter 8, Volume 1). 8. Jerk the green silk from the table smartly, showing orange silk tied to it, Figure 382.

A New Presentation * M I L B O U R N E

62 C H R I S T O P H E R

Effect : Performer presents the standard 20 the century, but with invisible silks. Then, at the finish, the silks materialize, Figure 192. Required : Three 12” silks (red, blue and rainbow). Preparation : Tie the rainbow between the solids, Figure 192. Roll the chain of silks into a ball, then tuck the end under the fold, Figure 383. If an opening effect, conceal the silks well under the right armpit, Figure 384. (If used later in your program, conceal the silk in a clip along the edge of your coat, Page 124, Volume 1). Presentation :

1. Pretend to produce a red silk, then a blue. 2. Tie the invisible (imaginary) silks together, then deposit them in an invisible glass. 3. Pull two corners of the invisible silks over the edge of the glass starting…” in Fuller view “ ! 4. Pretend to produce the invisible rainbow, then vanish it. 5. As you do, turn to the right, raise your right arm slightly, allowing the silk ball to fall into the cupped right hand, Figure 385. 6. Get corner “A” (Figure 383) between right thumb and first finger. 7. Reach into invisible glass, shake the palmed silks into view, Figure 192. Note : (Rehearse the pantomine part of effect with actual silks.)

M. C. 20th Century Silks * H A R O L D

63 R.

R I C E

This effect is currently popular in the East. Effect : An invisible silk is vanished, then reappears (still invisible) between two visible silks, Figure 388. Required : Two 18” (a red and a blue) silks; a thin black thread. Preparation : Fasten the ends of the thread to the silks, Figure 386. Presentation : 1. “Display the silks, Figure 387. 2. Lay them aside. 3. Pretend to produce a silk. 4. Now vanish the invisible silk. 5. Pick up the red silk at corner “C”, announcing the vanished silk is now tied between the two silks, Figure 388. 6. Explain that the center silk can’t be seen…as it is invisible !

Unprepared 20th Century *

P R I N C E

64 H A R A .

Effect : A vanished solid color silk reappears between two knotted rainbows. Required : Three 18” silks (solid orange and two rainbows). Preparation : Tie one rainbow to the other with a loose square knot, Figure 318, then upset the knot, Figure 120 or 319. Place the prepared silks on the table or a chair as in Figure 389. Place the orange silk in a convenient place.

Presentation : 1. Display the orange silk, then vanish it (French Drop), Figures 9-16, Chapter 8, Volume 1. 2. With the vanished silk palmed in the right hand, pick up the two knotted rainbows at “X” (Figure 389) in the right hand, Figure 390. 3. Take the second rainbow at “Y” and corner “A” of the orange silk in the left hand, Figure 391. 4. Now separate the hands, displaying the orange silk between the two (supposedly tied) rainbows, Figure 392.

One More 20th Century *

R U S S

65 W A L S H

Effect : A yellow silk vanished in the performer’s pocket reappears between two purple silks, but changes to red. Expecting to find the yellow silk back in his pocket, the performer finds a red ! Now the red silk which appeared between two purples is yellow ! Required : Ten 18” silks (6 purple, 2 red, and 2 yellow).

Preparation : Replace your regular breast coat pocket with one with three compartments shown in Figure 393. Tie a yellow silk between two purples, Figure 266,and tuck the three in pocket “B”. Tie a red between two purples and tuck the three in pocket “A’, Figure 393. Roll the remaining red and place it in the top of the left trouser pocket, Figure 357, Page 514, Volume 1. Presentation : 1. Tie the two purples together, tuck them into pocket “C”, Figure 393. 2. Pull two corners of the purple silks from pocket “A” into

view, Figure 394. 3. Show the trouser pocket empty, Figure 359, Page 515, Volume 1. 4. As you replace the pocket, push the hidden red silk down into the bottom of the pocket. 5. Show the yellow silk, roll it, and in placing it in the left trouser pocket, force it up into the top corner with your thumb, Figure 395. 6. State yellow silk has left your trouser pocket and is now tied between the two purples. 7. Take ‘A” in one hand and “B” in the other (Figure 394), displaying the red silk between, Figure 396. 8. Being perplexed, roll the silks and place them back in pocket “A”. Call attention to your left trouser pocket, them pull the purple ends of silks from pocket “B” into view, Figure 394. 9. Reach into your trouser pocket, expecting to find the yellow. Instead, you produce the red! Show the pocket now empty, Figure 359, Page 515, Volume 1. 10. Taking corner “A” and “B”, Figure 394,pull the silks into view, and the yellow silk is now between the purples, Figure 396.

The Fourth Dimension K E I T H

66 C L A R K

A 20th. Century is included in Clark’s Silks Supreme routine which is explained in detail in Volume 4. Comedy 20th Century H A R O L D

67 R.

R I C E

A 20 th. Century based on my Capers With Colors appears in Volume 4.

Sleight 20th Century *

H A R O L D

68 R.

R I C E

Effect : A vanished white silk reappears tied between a red and a blue, Figure 396. Required : Six 12” silks (2 each red, white, and blue); a rubber band. Preparation : Tie a white silk between a red one a blue, Figure 396. Starting with the red, roll the silks into a ball, Figure397. Place the rolled silks and the rubber band in the right coat pocket, the white silk in the breast coat pocket, and the remaining red and blue on the table. Presentation : 1. Have a spectator tie the red and blue together. 2. Starting with the red, roll the silks into a ball, Figure 397. 3. With the ball in your left hand, Figure 398, reach with your right into your pocket for a rubber band. 4. Bring out the rubber band (and the three silks), Figure 399. 5. Place the ball of two silks in your right hand, Figure 400, so you can have the left free to stretch the rubber band, Figure 401. 6. Release the band from the right hand, then work the ball of three silks up into view with the right fingers, Figure 402. 7. Place the band around the three silks, then give them to a spectator to hold. 8. Reach into the breast pocket for the white silk, leaving the ball of two silks in the pocket, Figure 403. 9. Vanish the white silk, Chapter 8, Volume 1.

10. Have the spectator remove the band from his silks, then display them, Figure 273.

20th Century Hank Trick*

69

J U S T I N A I N I

This effect is explained in Dai Vernon’s Select Secrets. Effect : A vanished white silk reappears tied between a red and a blue silk placed singularly in a paper cone. Required : Five 18” silks (2 red, 2 white, and a blue); a wand, and a sheet of newspaper.

Preparation : Tie a white silk between a red and a blue, Figure 396. Fold, then pleat the red silk and part of the white, Figure 404. Now wrap the balance of the white silk tightly around the pleated portion, Figure 405. Finally, the packet is placed under the corner of the blue silk and laid on your table with the remaining red and white silks.

Presentation : 1. Form the newspaper into a large cane, fastening it with a pin so it can’t open. 2. Display the red silk, then drop it into the cone. 3. Using the wand, force the silk into a small ball deep in the cone, Figure 406. 4. Now pick up the blue silk, palming the prepared red & white. 5. Drop the ball of silks and part of the blue silk into the come, Figure 406. The red and white will unroll. 6. Stand the cone upright in a large glass. 7. Vanish the white silk, Chapter 8, Volume 1. 8. Pull the silks from the cone, Figure 407. 9. Turn the cone upside down (red silk won’t fall out), then tear it to bits and toss it aside.

Spectator 20th Century * J E A N

70 H U G A R D

Magic is always more effective when the spectators participate. Effect : A vanished white silk reappears between a red and blue tied together and held by a spectator, Figure 396. Required : Six 12” silks (2 each, red, white and blue); a rubber band. Preparation : Tie a red, a white, and a blue together, Figure 396. Accordion pleat, then roll the silks into a ball, the blue on the outside, Figure 397. Place the ball of silks under your vest, Figure 8, Page 61, Volume 1, and the rubber band in your right coat pocket. Presentation : 2. Give the red and blue silks to a spectator, asking him to knot them together. 3. Next ask him to roll them into a small ball, red inside blue. 4. White he does, palm the ball of three from under the vest, Figure 9 and 10, Page 61, Volume 1. 5. Take his bundle in your left hand, saying, “The silks must be pressed in to a small ball, like this.” 6. Bring the hands together to squeeze the silks, allowing the audience to see the two balls as one, Figure 408. 7. Take the ball of silks (3) into your left hand, toss them into the air and catch them as you reach into your right pocket to get the rubber band (and leave the two silks). 8. Put the rubber band around the 3 silks, then hand them to the spectator assistant to hold. 9. Vanish the white silk, Chapter 8, Volume !

1. Have the spectator remove the band and discover the white silk tied between the red and blue, Figure 396.

Bottomless Glass 20th Century * J E A N

71

H U G A R D

Effect : A vanished white silk reappears between two silks in a glass. Required : Six 12” silks (2 each red, white, and blue) ; a bottomless glass, Figure 164, Page 328, Volume 1; a table with a black art well; several rubber bands, and a linen hank. Preparation : Tie a red, a white, and a blue silk together, Figure 396. Starting with the red silk, roll the three into a ball, Figure 397. Put the rubber band around them, then place the ball under the vest, Figure 8, Page 61, Volume 1. Place the glass and the other three on your table. Presentation : 1. Tie the red silk to the blue, roll them into a ball, Figure 397, then put a rubber band around them and drop them into the bottomless glass. 2. Cover the glass with the linen hank, holding it in place with a rubber band. 3. Slide the glass over the black art well, allowing silks to secretly fall out of the glass into the table, then pick up the glass in your left hand, Figure 409.

4. At the same time steal the ball of silks from under your vest, Figure 9 and 10, Page 61, Volume 1, into your right hand. 5. Transfer the glass to your right hand, sitting it over the palmed silks, Figure 410. 6. With the left hand twist the bottom of the hank around the glass, Figure 411, then hand the glass to a spectator to hold. 7. Vanish the white silk, Chapter 8, Volume 1. 8. Take the covered glass from the spectator, remove the hank, and pour the ball of silks into the spectator’s hands. 9. Have the spectator display the string of three silks, Figure 396.

Pass-It *

72 H A R O L D

R.

R I C E

Effect : A silk vanished by the performer reappears tied to a silk held by a spectator, Figure 419. Required : Three 18” silks (2 yellow and a purple). Preparation : Tie a yellow silk to the purple, Figure 412. Fold the yellow silk, Figure 413, then roll it into the purple, Figures 414, 415 and 416.

Presentation : 1. Pick up the purple silk as in Figure 417, holding it taut. 2. Hand the silk to a spectator, asking him to hold it taut at the extreme tips and in a vertical position, Figure 418. 3. Vanish the remaining yellow silk, Chapter 8, Volume 1. 4. Take corner “X” of the purple silk, Figure 418, in your right hand. 5. With a sweeping motion pull the silk from the spectator’s hand and display the two silks, Figure 419.

Stage 20th Century * ( C H U N G

73 L I N G

S O O )

In this stage version a thread is attached to a corner of a rainbow silk inside of the usual prepared silk, Figure 420. The prepared silk and another solid colored silk are tied to a “T” stand, Figure 421. A prepared clear glass decanter, Figure 422, is arranged on a table as in Figure 423. Knot the solid and the corner of the of the rainbow together, Figure 424. Display a duplicate rainbow, then tuck it into the decanter. After about half of the silk is inside,

roll the rubber band off the decanter on to the center of the silk, Figure 425. Push the balance of the rainbow into the decanter. Upon command the assistants off stage pull on the threads. A rainbow appears tied between the two silks as the one in the decanter vanishes, Figure 426.

Simplicity Silks *

L E N

74 J.

Effect : A vanished silk reappears tied to four silks, Figure 432. Required : Five 18” silks prepared as in Figure 427, plus an additional purple silk. Preparation : Starting at the center of the purple silk, Figure 428, roll the purple silk and place a rubber band around it, then add the remaining purple silk, Figure 429. Presentation : 1. Holding the silks as in Figure 430, lay the silks one by one back over the hand, Figure 431. 2. Remove the free purple silk, then tuck the bundle into a glass. 3. Vanish the purple silk, Chapter 8, Volume 1. 4. Taking the red and blue silks at corners, pull the silks from the glass. The rubber band flys off and the silks are displayed as in Figure 432.

S E W E L L

Appearing And Self-Tieing Silks * K E I T H

75

C L A R K

Effect : A vanished rainbow silk reappears tied between two silks previously shown separately. Required : Four heavier than usual (8 momme) 18” silks (a red, a green, and two rainbows with green corners), a 1½ oz. pear shaped lead sinker, Figure 433, and a block nylon thread. Preparation : Sew the green silk into a bag, Figure 13. Cover the sinker with black cloth, then pass the black thread thru the hole in its center, Figure 433. Fold a rainbow, sewing the sinker firmly in place, Figure 434. Knot corner “C” and thread end “A’ to the green bag, Figure 435. Now cut the thread so it is just slightly shorter than the diagonal of the rainbow (about 28” long), then knot end “B” of the thread to the red silk. Finally, tie a small knot in corner “D” of the rainbow, Figure 436. If properly constructed, the rainbow will appear to be tied between the two solids when held as in Figure 437.

Place the rainbow inside of the green bag silk, knot “D” protruding. Place the two silks on a table, the duplicate rainbow hiding the thread. Presentation : 1. After showing and tucking the rainbow in your breast pocket, display the two solid color silks, Figure 438. 2. Place the red silk on a chair, Figure. 439, then the green, corner “X” falling on top, Figure 440. 3. Take the duplicate from your pocket, then vanish it, Chapter 8, Volume 1. 4. Take corner ‘X”, lift the silks, and the rainbow will fall into place, Figure 437. N t Thi ff t i k t d d

Writing the Colors

76

EDWARD BAGSHAWE (Also known as Sterling’s Fourth Dimension Tray) Effect : The middle silk of three separate silks is taken from a tray and vanished. The tray is tipped, and two silks fall to the floor, the vanished silk reappearing tied between them !

Required : Four 18” silks (two yellow, a red, and a green) and a special tray, as explained in Figures 441-449. Preparation : Tie a yellow silk between the red and green, Figure 345. Place the yellow silk and the two knots in the velvet packet, Figure 450. Place the duplicate yellow between the red & green, Figure 451. Presentation : 1. Show three silks on the tray, then remove the yellow and vanish it, Chapter 8, Volume 1. 2. Tilt the tray, pulling the slide, and the silks knotted together fall to the floor. Note : This tray can also be used in presenting the Sympathetic Silks, Ch. 18.

Another Visible 20th Century * E R I C

C.

77 L E W I S

Effect : A rainbow draped over two knotted silks, Figure 452, ties itself between them, Figure 453. Required : Four 18” silks (two duplicate rainbows with green corners; a red, and a green), a small brass ring, a strong silk card, and a loop of fine wire ; a small lead weight. Preparation : Prepare the green silk into a bag as shown in Figure 454. Sew a lead weight in one corner of the remaining rainbow.

Presentation : 1. Holding the silks as in Figure 455, knot the red silk to the green corner of the hidden rainbow. 2. Holding the silks as in Figure 456, drop the weight of the rainbow thru the wire lop, Figure 457. 3. With the silks now in Figure 452 position, extend the arms. The Figure 457 rainbow goes inside of the green bag, and the duplicate appears as though tied between the two solids, Figure 453.

There and Back

78 V E R R A L L

W A S S

Effect : A vanished white silk reappears tied between a red and a blue, Figure 463. Then the white silk vanishes again and appears in performer’s breast pocket. Required : Six silks (2-12” red, 1-12” blue, and 3-9” white) Preparation : Prepare the red silks as in Figure 458. To this add the white and blue silks, Figure 459. Pull the white silk inside of the red bag, Figure 460. Attach a black thread to the corner of a white silk, Figure 461, then arrange the thread under the coat as in Figure 462. Presentation : 1. Holding the silks as in Figure 460 position, place them on a chair. 2. Vanish a white silk, Ch. 8, Volume 1. 3. Taking corner “A” of the blue silk, flick the silks into the air, the white appearing between the red and blue. 4. Take the bead in your right hand and the large ring in your left, waving the silks up and down slowly. 5. Pull sharply on the bead which will bring the white

silk inside of the red, Figure 463. 6. Display the two silks, Figure 460, then lay them aside. 7. Grasp the ring at the bottom of the coat (Figure 462) with your left hand, pull down sharply, and the white silk will reappear in the breast pocket.

Shot Silk *

79 F R E D D I E

S H A R P E

Here is a stand for a novel and different presentation of the 20 century. Effect : A vanished silk reappears between two silks on a stand, Figure 470. Required : A special figure stand, Figure 464, and 4-24” silks (2 duplicates). Preparation : Construct a figure from plywood, Figure 464. Sew a small ring to one corner of each of two silks and hang the silks in place, Figure 465. To the back of the figure attach a strong elastic pull, Figure 466. At the front of the base of the figure fasten a tube, then drill a hole thru the plywood, Figure 467. To two diagonal corners of a duplicate silk, sew two buttons slightly larger than the brass rings on the silks in Figure 465. To each button tie the end of a length of black thread. Place the silk in the Figure 467 tube, buttons at the top. Pass the threads thru the rings in the silks, then thru the hole in the base, Figure 468, tieing the free ends to the ring at the end of the pull, Figure 469. th

Presentation : 1. Call attention to the silks attached to stand, Figure 465.

2. Vanish the remaining duplicate silk, Ch. 8, Vol. 1. 3. Release the ring at the rear of the stand, Figure 466. 4. The duplicate silk is pulled into place, Figure 470.

Newspaper 20th. Century * J O H N N Y

80 P E N R O S E

Effect : One of three silks produced from a newspaper vanishes, then reappears, tied between the remaining two, Figure 472. Required : Four 12” silks (a red, a green, and two yellow), a sheet of newspaper, and a Silks From Newspaper Fake, Figure 127, Page 220, Volume 1. Preparation : Tie a yellow between the red and green, Figure 345. Place these into the fake, followed by the remaining yellow. Reread the Silks from Newspaper effect, Page 219, Volume 1. Presentation : 1. Show the paper front and back, Figures 128-136, Page 220, Vol. 1, then produce the yellow silk. 2. Show the paper, front and back. 3. Move the fake into position to produce the first of the three silks knotted together. 4. Move the fake to the left, producing the silk at the other end of the chain, Figure 471. 5. Remove the yellow silk as you lay the paper and fake on the table. 6. Vanish the yellow silk, Chapter 8, Volume 1. 7. Show the paper again, then turn it around, showing the yellow silk tied in place, Figure 472.

The Calipk’s Colour *

M A R V I N R O Y Effect : Six small silks vanish and reappear tied between the performer’s and a spectator’s linen handkerchief, Figure 475. Required : Twelve 12” silks (two each of 6 different colors, including white) and a double linen hank, Figure 473.

Preparation : Tie six of the silks into a string, attach them to a corner of the Figure 473 hank, and tuck them inside, Figure 474. Tie the remaining six into a string. Presentation : 1. Borrow a linen hank and tie it to the corner of the white silk in the double linen hank. 2. Place the hanks in a glass. 3. Vanish the remaining string of 6-12” silks, Chapter 8, Volume 1. 4. Produce the six silks between the linen hanks, Figure 475.

81

Satan’s Silks *

82 O R V I L L E

M E Y E R

An effect featured in the JNX. Effect : A green silk tied between two red silks penetrates a saucer. Then the two reds visibly tie themselves together. Required : Six 18” silks (4 red and 2 green); a mirror glass, Page 325, Volume 1; Al Producto, Page 91, Vol. 1; a source, rubber band, thread and a black button. Preparation : Attach thread to a red silk, Figure 476, then prepare the silks as in Figure 477. Place them in one side of the mirror glass. Put a green silk in the Al Producto Newspaper Fake, Figure 12, Page 92, Volume 1. Presentation: 1. Tie a green silk between two reds, Figure 345, then place them in the empty side of the mirror glass. 2. Reach for the source, turning the mirror glass as you do so, bringing the two threaded red silks to the front. 3. Place the source on the glass, then sit both on your table. 4. Show a small piece of newspaper and form it into a cone, Figures 13-18, Page 92, Volume 1, loading green silks as shown. 5. Place a rubber band around the cone to prevent the silk from escaping, then place the cone upside down on the saucer, Figure 478. 6. Command the green silk to pass up thru the source and into the cone. 7. Lift the cone and show the green silk, Figure 479. 8. Remove the silks from the glass and display the two red silks, green missing, Figure 480. 9. Holding the button under the right thumb, exchange the silks from one hand to the other. This brings the thread into Figure 481 position.

10. Retain the button in the right hand, but let the silk slide thru your right fingers, causing the silk to slide mysteriously toward the other silk, Figure 482, If you allow the left silk to slide a bit too, the two silks will move in to meet each other. 11. When the knots meet, release the left silk and display as in Figure 483.

Visible 20th Century *

E R I C

83 C.

L E W I S

Effect : A yellow silk visibly penetrates a glass cylinder to join two other silks therein, Figure 487. Required : Four silks (2-12” yellow, an 18” red and 18” blue); a glass cylinder ; a strong Pand L sleeve reel (Chapter 15); and a metal fake, Figure 484. Preparation : Place a yellow silk in the fake and place both under the blue silk on your table. To the end of your pull attach a loop of flesh colored cat-gut. Place the loop over your right middle finger. Presentation : 1. Show the empty glass cylinder. 2. Place 18” red silk in one end. 3. Pick up the 18” blue silk, finger palming the loaded fake. 4. Place the blue silk in the other end, the fake hooked over the end, Figure 485. 5. Lay the cylinder aside for a moment. 6. Take the remaining 12” yellow in the left hand, stroking it several times with the right. Secretly pass the loop over the silk. 7. Holding the silk in your right hand, take the cylinder in your left. 8. Drape the yellow silk over the center of the cylinder, a finger pressing the thread of the pull against glass, Figure 486.

9. Insert the right finger into the fake, Figure 486, release the pull, and at the same time force the yellow silk into the cylinder. 10. One yellow silk vanishes as the other appears in the cylinder, Figure 487.

The Century Silk Frame * E

D

W A R D

84 M.

Effect : A vanished silk reappears between two other silks in a frame, Figure 494. Required : Four 18” silks (two yellow, a red and a blue); and a Massey Frame, Figure 488. Preparation : Raise the trap doors in the base, Figure 489, then set one of the elastics under the catch, Figure 490. Fold a yellow silk into a strip about 2” x 6” and lay it across the elastic and catch, Figure 491. The coil spring hinges, Figure 489, will pull the doors back in place. Place a red, a yellow and a blue between the two elastic, Figure 494. Presentation : 1. Display the frame with three silks in place, Figure 494. 2. Remove the center (yellow)

M A S S E Y

silk, Figure 493, then vanish it, Chapter 8, Volume 1. 3. Release the catch, Figure 490, and the yellow silk flies into place, Figure 494.

Baffling Bloomer 20th Century * H A R O L D

R.

85 R I C E

Effect : When presenting the 20th century the performer is interrupted by a spectator who sees the vanished silk (?) hanging out of the performer’s pocket, Figure 499. Following considerable by play, the supposedly vanished silk is shown to be a pair of silk bloomers, Figure 496. The spectator put in his place, the performer finishes the effect without further interruption. Required : In addition to the four silks for the standard 20th century, Figure 21, a silk of a solid color matching that of the center of the rainbow is needed, Figure 495. Preparation : Cut the matching silk and prepare it to resemble a pair of bloomers, Figure 496. Tuck the silk bloomers in your right pocket as in Figure 497.

Presentation : 1. Tie the silk in the bag and the solid together, Figure 17. 2. Place the silks around your neck, Figure 18. 3. Roll the rainbow between your hands, pretending to palm it in your left, but making it very obvious that you have it in your right. 4. In a poor attempt to call the audience’s attention to your closed left, Figure 19, openly place your right hand in your right trouser pocket, leaving the silk and taking corner “A” of the bloomers, Figure 498. 5. As you withdraw your right hand, pull “A” into view, Figure 499. 6. As you continue with the effect, a spectator will cry out, thinking he sees the poorly vanished silk protruding, Figure 499. 7. Try to convince the spectator he is wrong. Then pull the bloomers into view and display them, Figure 500, saying ..” you pulled a bloomer, Mister !” 8. Lay the bloomers aside and finish standard 20th Century. Note : Rice’s Baffling Bloomers can be presented as an M .C. effect using only the bloomers and the matching rainbow, or a silk of a solid color to match the bloomers.

A Silk Combination *

86

O. M E Y E R Effect : A freely selected silk vanishes and reappears tied between the two remaining silks. The string of three are layed aside, and a fourth silk is displayed. Then, as if by magic, this silk changes places with the silk in the center of the string of three. Required : Thirteen 12” silks (5 orange, 3 green, 3 blue, 2 white) ; a mirror glass, (Figure 150, Page 325, Volume 1); a changing bag, (Figure 182, Page 334, Volume 1) ; an Ideal color-change tube (Figure 2, Ch. 13); a felt hat, wand rubber bands, and a table. Preparation : The silks and apparatus are arranged as shown in Figure 501. Rubber bands in right coat pocket. Presentation : 1. Show the changing bag empty (Page 335, Volume 1). 2. Roll the green, orange and blue silks into small separate balls, FINGER FOLD, Pa. 40, Volume 1. 3. Drop the green and blue silks into the bag, then turn the handle and drop the orange silk in with the two other orange silks already there, Figure 502. 4. THE FORCE (Al Baker) Ask a spectator to freely

select any one of the rolled silks from within the bag. He selects orange (as all three available to him are orange) and holds it. Turn the handle, then dump the blue and green silks from the bag which is now shown empty. 5. Have another spectator unroll the two silks and tie the blue to the green. 6. Roll the silks, pick up the mirror glass, and place the silks in the empty front compartment. 7. Cover the mirror glass with a linen hank, turn the glass, Page 326, Volume 1, and sit the glass on the table. 8. Take the orange silk from the spectator, then vanish it Chapter 8, Volume 1. 9. Remove the hank, then take the string of three silks from the glass and hand them to the spectator. 10. Ask the spectator to open his string of three silks and display them, showing the orange silk in the center. 11. Have the spectator reroll the silks into a ball. 12. As he does, secretly obtain in the left hand the string of green, white, and blue silks from the table. 13. Add the spectator’s silks to those palmed in the left hand, then display the two sets as one with the right hand, Figure 503. 14. Place the green, white, and blue silks in the left hand, secretly palming the green, orange and blue in the right hand. 15. Reach into the right pocket and obtain a rubber hand, leaving the ball of silks behind. 16. Place the band around the silks, then hand them to a spectator. 17. Take the white silk and the ideal tube from the table. 18. Push the white silk into the tube, forcing the orange silk into the closed left fist. 19. Steal the tube into your right hand, Effect No. 7, Chapter 13. 20. Reach for the wand on the hot, Figure 501, dropping the tube into the hat. 21. Top the closed left fist with the wand. 22. Command the white and orange silk to change places. 23. Open your left fist, showing an orange silk instead of white. 24. Have the spectator unroll his silks to discover the center silk is now white !

Visible “40th Century” Silks

87

A L B E N I C E

No. 8 in Chapter 15, REEL MAGIC, is another 20th Century effect.

The Houdini Hank Escape * L.

L.

88 I R E L A N D

Effect : Houdini, tied between two guards and locked in a jail, escapes and reappears on a spectator’s back, Figure 504. Required : Eight 12” silks (3 orange imprinted Houdini, and 5 green imprinted Guard); a prepared jail, Figure 509, and a fake to hold the Houdini silk that appears on the spectator’s back, Figure 513. Preparation : Study the figures carefully. There are removable flaps in the sides, back, and bottom, Figures 505 and 506. Two brass guides are in the base, Figures 506 and 507. Knot two green silks with a square knot, Figure 510. Pass the end of one silk thru the right hole, then under the right brass guide, Figure 506. Now fasten the end of a tape to the corner of the silk, Figures 506 and 508. Next pass the tape and silk under the left brass guide. Finally fasten the card

loop under two metal clips in the left side, Figure 509. Now put the side flaps back in place, Figure 505. Bring corners “B” and “X” inside of the box, corner “A” resting just inside of the hole in the right side, Figure 509. Now tie a green silk to an orange with a square knot, Figure 510,

then tie the diagonal corner of the orange silk to corner “B” (Figure 509) with a dissolving knot, Figure 511. Replace the back flap, then attach the orange silk near its dissolving knot on the pin, Figure 512. Then, put the front and top on the box (Figure 504), hooking them in place with small latches attached. Finally, insert the prepared orange silk in the fake, Figure 513. Pocket the loaded fake. Presentation : 5. Show the jail (box) on all sides. 6. Ask a spectator to die Houdini (orange silk) between two Guards (green) with square knots, Figure 504. 7. Lift the top, release the back Flap, Figure 514, and drop one green silk in the space behind Flap, Figure 515. 8. Pull corner “A” (Figure 512) out into view, then push the orange and green silks into the space back of Flap. 9. Close the flap, then open the front door, showing three silks, Figure 512. 10. Now pull the other green silk thru the hole in the left side, Figure 516. 1. Show that the green silks actually pass thru the holes. To do so, hold the left green silk at “R-R” and pull it right and left. Repeat with the right silk by holding it at “S-S”. 2. Close the box and ask the spectator to hold it. 3. Steal the fake from your pocket and secretly hang the orange silk on the spectator’s back, Figure 504. 4. Take the green corner of the silk in the hole of the right side, pulling sharply. Two green silks emerge,

Figure 504. (The dissolving knot inside unties, orange silk slips off the pin, and the orange and green silks are drawn inside left side down into the base.) 11. Open the box and show it empty, Figure 505. 12. Turn the spectator to face the back of the stage, disclosing the Houdini silk on his back.